Roland MV-8800 Digital Production Studio Owner`s manual

Add to my manuals
244 Pages

advertisement

Roland MV-8800 Digital Production Studio Owner`s manual | Manualzz

MV-8800_r_e.book 1 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

Screen Guide

Copyright © 2006 ROLAND CORPORATION

All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form without the written permission of ROLAND CORPORATION.

Roland International Web Site: http://www.Roland.com

MV-8800_r_e.book 2 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

Common items in all screens

These items are common to all screens.

Screen title / F (Function) buttons area

This area shows information such as the screen name, current time, and song name.

• The title area and function buttons area are the same for all screens ( – ).

Explanation of each area

Screen name

The name of this screen.

Song number, song name/

Pattern number, Pattern name

In Song mode, this shows the number and name of the currently selected song (current song). In Pattern mode, this shows the number and name of the currently selected pattern (current pattern).

PadBank: (pad bank) number

This shows the pad bank number of the sound generator part you can play from the top panel VELOCITY PADS.

Sound Generator

Audio Phrase

Instrument part

Pattern

Pix jam

Range

01–32

01–06

01–08

01–06

Target played by the velocity pads

This shows what the velocity pads are assigned to play.

Display

(A.Phrs)

(Part01)–(Part16)

(Ptrn)

(P.Jam)

(Multi)

Explanation

Audio phrase part

Instrument part 1–16

Pattern

Pix jam

Multi timber sampler mode

Slider:

This shows the name of the current function for the eight top panel sliders.

Value

Audio

Part1–8

Part9–16

AUX/In

Explanation

Audio mixer 1–8 level sliders

Instrument part mixer 1–8 level sliders

Instrument part mixer 9–16 level sliders

AUX, effect, audio phrase, and input mixer level sliders

Assignable slider Assign

Now: (now time)

This indicates the current location (measure/beat/tick) of the sequencer.

BPM (Beats Per Minute / tempo)

This indicates the tempo of the sequencer.

Scroll bar

Indicates the approximate portion of the data (horizontal) and track (vertical) list that are visible.

Menu

When “M” icon displays here, you can press [MENU] to

display the MENU popup (e.g., p. 7) in the LCD.

F (function) buttons

The [F1] – [F5] buttons correspond to functions displayed at the bottom of the LCD.

S-2

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 3 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

Common items in all screens

EDIT NAME popup

This screen lets you edit the name of a folder, file, library, pad, or track.

Explanation of each area

Popup name

The name of this popup. The popup name will depend on the type of name you are assigning.

Popup name

EDIT SAMPLE NAME

EDIT PARTIAL NAME

EDIT PATCH NAME

Explanation

Changes the sample name

Changes the partial name

Changes the audio phrase name

EDIT PAD BANK NAME Changes the pad bank name

EDIT AUDIO PHRASE

NAME

Changes the patch name

EDIT SONG NAME Changes the song name

EDIT MIDI CLIP NAME Changes the MIDI clip name

EDIT TRACK NAME Changes the track name

EDIT LOCATOR NAME Changes the locator name

EDIT MFX NAME Changes the MFX library name

EDIT DELAY/

CHORUS NAME

Changes Delay/Chorus library name

EDIT REVERB NAME

EDIT MTK NAME

Changes Reverb library name

Changes the MTK library name

EDIT VOLUME LABEL

EDIT PATTEN NAME

EDIT FOLDER NAME

EDIT FILE NAME

Changes the volume label

Changes the pattern name

* Changes the folder name

* Changes the file name

EDIT PROJECT NAME * Changes the project name

MIXDOWN FILE NAME * Changes the Mixdown file name

MASTERING FILE NAME * Changes the Mastering file name

• When naming a file or folder (shown as * in the operation overview above), you cannot assign a name that already exists within the same folder.

• You cannot input the space character to the volume label.

The space character will replace to the “_” (underscore).

Name

You can edit the name.

For details on inputting characters, refer to “Inputting text”

(Owner’s Manual; p. 33).

F-buttons

• [F1](History)

Displays the HISTORY popup. You can recall (and re-input) up to the ten most recent names you input in the EDIT NAME popup since turning on the power.

Selects the name at the cursor in the history list then press [F5](Select).

• [F2](Insert Space)

Inserts a space at the cursor location.

• [F3](Delete)

Deletes the character at the cursor location. Characters at the right of the cursor will be moved forward to fill the gap.

• [F4](A

➜ a/a

A)

Switches the character at the cursor location between uppercase and lowercase.

• [F5](OK) / [F5](Execute)

Finalizes the name and closes the EDIT NAME popup.

• When the cursor is located at the first character, you can

press the left cursor key to open the SELECT CATEGORY popup (p. 4). You can use this popup in the following

popups.

• EDIT SAMPLE NAME popup

• EDIT PARTIAL NAME popup

• EDIT PATCH NAME popup

• EDIT AUDIO PHRASE NAME popup

• EDIT MIDI CLIP NAME popup

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-3

MV-8800_r_e.book 4 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

Common items in all screens

SELECT CATEGORY popup

This popup lets you select a category.

■ To access this screen

Accesses the EDIT NAME popup (p. 3)

➜ CURSOR [ ]

(Only for EDIT SAMPLE NAME, EDIT PARTIAL NAME, EDIT PATCH

NAME, EDIT AUDIO PHRASE NAME, and EDIT MIDI CLIP NAME.)

• [INSTRUMENTS] ➜ [F4](Library) ➜ [F3](Category)

• [SONG] or [PATTERN] ➜ [F5](Seq Edit) ➜ select a

MIDI track as the current track

[MENU]

“Paste MIDI Clip...” ➜ [F5](Select)

Select

➜ [F1](Category)

• [PROJECT] ➜ icons ➜ move the cursor to the lower row of

[F3](SmplMgr) ➜ [MENU]

“Category...”

[F5](Select)

➜ Select

Accesses the SAMPLE LIST popup (p. 130)

[F3](Category)

Explanation of each area

List

Displays a list of categories. The category name selected by the cursor is highlighted.

SLD

TEK

PLS

FX

SYN

BPD

SPD

ORC

HIT

WND

FLT

BRS

SBR

SAX

HLD

ACD

HRM

AGT

EGT

DGT

BS

SBS

STR

Category

---

PNO

EP

KEY

BEL

MLT

ORG

Content

Not categorized

Acoustic piano

Electric piano

Other keyboards (e.g., clavi, harpsichord)

Bell, bell pad

Mallet

Electric organ, church organ

Accordion

Harmonica, blues harp

Acoustic guitar

Electric guitar

Distortion guitar

Acoustic bass, electric bass

Synth bass

Strings

Orchestra ensemble

Orchestral hits, hits

Wind instruments (e.g., oboe, clarinet)

Flute, piccolo

Acoustic brass

Synth brass

Sax

Synth lead (hard)

Synth lead (soft)

Techno synth

Pulsating sounds

Synth FX (e.g., noise)

Poly synth

Synth pad (bright)

Synth pad (soft)

S-4

MV-8800 Screen Guide

Category

VOX

PLK

ETH

FRT

PRC

SFX

BTS

DRM

CMB

7X0

AK

Content

Voice, choir

Plucked instruments (e.g., harp, ethnic instruments)

Other ethnic instruments

Fretted plucked instruments (e.g., mandolin)

Percussion

Sound effects

Beats, grooves

Drum sets

Other patches using splits or layers

Roland S-700 series

AKAI MPC series/S series

F-buttons

• [F1](Select All)

Displays the all categories.

• The [F1](Select All) is valid if displays the follow screens.

PASTE MIDI CLIP popup (p. 47)

PATCH LIBRARY popup (p. 117)

SAMPLE LIST popup (p. 130)

• [F5](Select)

Finalize the category.

MV-8800_r_e.book 5 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

PAD BANKS popup

Here you can select pad banks.

Common items in all screens

■ To access this screen

• [PADBANKS]

Explanation of each area

Velocity pads

Shows the state of the current pads. Red-colored velocity pads have data recorded in them.

Pad bank list

Lists the names of the pad banks. The pad bank selected by the cursor is highlighted.

You can switch pad banks by using the VALUE dial or

[INC]/[DEC].

F-buttons

• [F1](Name)

Displays the EDIT NAME popup (p. 3), allowing you to

name the pad bank.

• [F5](Close)

Closes the PAD BANKS popup (this popup).

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-5

MV-8800_r_e.book 6 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

Common items in all screens

SELECT DRIVE popup

Here you can select the drive.

■ To access this screen

• Press [F1](Select Drive) shown in various screens, etc.

Explanation of each area

Drive list

This area lists the drives that are installed in the

MV-8800 (hard disk, CD-R/RW drive). The drive selected by the cursor is highlighted.

Icon Explanation

Hard disk drive

F-button

• [F5](Select)

Selects the drive indicated by the cursor in the drive list.

CD-ROM/Audio CD drive

• The CD-ROM icon and Audio CD icon let you differentiate between types of media inserted in the drive.

S-6

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 7 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

Common items in all screens

MENU popup / COMMAND popup

This page explains the operations that apply in common to any command or menu you access as a popup.

■ To access this screen

• [MENU]

• Press [F5](Command) shown in various screens, etc.

F-buttons

• [F1](

) / [F2](

)

These buttons move the cursor between menu items or commands shown in the popup.

• You can also use [DEC]/[INC], the VALUE dial, or the cursor buttons to move the cursor.

• [F5](Select)

Executes the menu item or command that is selected by the cursor.

• You can also use [ENTER] buttons to execute the selected menu item or command.

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-7

MV-8800_r_e.book 8 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

Here you can perform sequencer-related operations.

SONG screen

This is the basic screen where you play or record songs.

■ To access this screen

• [SONG]

Explanation of each area

Now time

This indicates the current location (measure/beat/tick, time code) of the sequencer.

Time Signature

Displays the time sign of the current song.

Step Time

This is the unit by which the current time will move when you press STEP [ ]/[ ].

Metronome

Displays the metronome setting.

Icon Explanation

The metronome will not sound.

The metronome will sound only during recording.

The metronome will sound during playback and recording.

The metronome will always sound.

Loop Quick Set Length

Displays the number of measures that are automatically specified as the loop length when you press

[QUICK SET].

Region of Punch In/Out

Specifies the starting time and end time of the auto punch in recording. The following characters show the

Punch In/Out status.

Characters Explanation

Punch In/Out function is Off.

Punch In/Out function is On.

S-8

MV-8800 Screen Guide

Region of Loop play

Specifies the starting time and end time of the loop. The following characters show the Loop status.

Characters Explanation

Loop function is Off.

Loop function is On.

No. (track number and icon)

Shows the number of the each track recorded in the sequencer. The icon at the right of the track number shows the type of track.

Icon Explanation

MIDI track

Audio track

Pattern track

• The line of the track number selected by the cursor is highlighted. This track is called the “current track.”

Track Name

Shows the name assigned to each track.

MV-8800_r_e.book 9 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

Track Status (M/S/R)

Sets the status of the track.

Indication

M= Muted

S= Solo

R=Record

Explanation

This track will not play.

Only this track will play.

Recording will occur on this track.

• If you simultaneously turn on M (Mute) and S (Solo) for the same track, the S (Solo) setting will take priority.

Play List

The boxes show the existence of data recorded in each track.

A gray box is shown for data that contains no note events.

Tempo Track

This is a special track that records tempo data. This track always stays in this location. (Its location is not affected by scrolling.)

• You can’t record data on the tempo track.

Sequence Memory meter/

Wave Memory meter

Displays the remaining number of events available for recording in the sequencer, or the remaining time available for recording audio tracks.

View filter indicator

Indicates the View Filter status you specified.

Icon Explanation

View Filter is off (Events displayed)

View Filter is on (Events not displayed)

For details on View filter icons refer to VIEW FILTER popup (p. 53).

SONG

F-buttons and menu

• [F1](Song Menu)

Displays the SONG MENU screen (p. 78).

• [F2](Track Param)

Displays the TRACK PARAMETER popup for the track selected by the cursor.

• The TRACK PARAMETER popup that appears will depend on the type of the current track.

Current track Popup

Audio track

MIDI track

Pattern track

TRACK PARAMETER popup (for an

Audio track) (p. 14)

TRACK PARAMETER popup (for a MIDI track) (p. 11)

TRACK PARAMETER popup (for a

Pattern track) (p. 15)

• [F3](Event List)

If the current track is a MIDI track, displays the EVENT

LIST screen (p. 23).

• If the current track is not a MIDI track, the indication

“Current Track is not MIDI Track.” will appear.

• [F4](PianoRoll)

If the current track is a MIDI track, displays the PIANO

ROLL EDIT screen (p. 30).

• If the current track is not a MIDI track, the indication

“Current Track is not MIDI Track.” will appear.

• [F5](Seq Edit)

Displays the SEQUENCE EDIT screen (p. 31).

• [MENU]

Displays the MENU popup.

S-9

MV-8800_r_e.book 10 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

Menu items

1 Tempo Track

Displays the TEMPO TRACK screen (p. 52).

2 Mute Control Track

Displays the MUTE CONTROL TRACK screen (p. 71).

3 Add MIDI Tracks...

Displays the ADD MIDI TRACKS popup (p. 54).

4 Add Audio Tracks...

Displays the ADD AUDIO TRACKS popup (p. 55).

5 Add Pattern Track

Adds a Pattern track.

6 Delete Tracks...

Displays the DELETE TRACKS popup (p. 56).

7 Merge Tracks...

Displays the MERGE TRACKS popup (p. 69).

8 Track List

Displays the TRACK LIST (OUTPUT) screen (p. 50).

9 Track Name...

Displays the EDIT NAME popup (p. 3).

10 Erase All Events

Deletes the all events of current track. The message

“Erase all events in track” will appear.

F-button

[F1](No)

[F5](Yes)

Explanation

To cancel the operation.

To delete the events of current track.

• You can undo only once after executing Erase All Events.

11 Marker

Displays the MARKER popup (p. 57).

12 View Filter

Displays the VIEW FILTER popup (p. 53).

13 Step Time

Displays the STEP TIME popup (p. 58).

14 Recording Parameter

Displays the RECORDING PARAMETER (MIDI) popup

(p. 16), the RECORDING PARAMETER (AUDIO) popup

(p. 19), or the RECORDING PARAMETER (PATTERN)

popup (p. 20).

• The RECORDING PARAMETER popup that appears will depend on the type of the current track.

15 Metronome

Displays the METRONOME popup (p. 22).

16 Loop

Displays the LOOP popup (p. 48).

17 Save As User Template

A message of “Save Song setting as User Track

Template?” will appear.

F-button Explanation

[F1](No) To cancel without saving.

[F5](Yes)

Save the track settings of the current song as a user template on the hard disk.

18 Drum Grid

Displays the DRUM GRID screen (p. 73).

S-10

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 11 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

TRACK PARAMETER popup (for a MIDI track)

Here you can make detailed parameter settings for a MIDI track.

■ To access this screen

• [SONG] or [PATTERN] ➜ select a MIDI track as the current track ➜ [F2](Track Param)

Explanation of each area

Track (Track number and track name)

This is the number and name of the track you are editing.

You can press [F1](Name) to display the EDIT NAME popup (p. 3) and edit the name of the track.

Mute Control

Specifies whether the track will be muted by the Track

Mute data recorded in the Mute Control track.

Value

Off

On

On

(Default=Off)

On

(Default=On)

Explanation

The recorded mute data will be disabled.

(Manual)

The recorded mute data will be enabled.

(Automatic)

The recorded mute data will be enabled.

(Automatic)

With this setting, moving to the beginning of the track will automatically defeat muting.

The recorded mute data will be enabled.

(Automatic)

With this setting, moving to the beginning of the track will automatically activate muting.

Output Assign

Specifies the output destination for the data recorded in the MIDI track.

Value

Off

1–16

Explanation

No output.

Instrument part 1–16

MFX

MFX (Analog modeling bass and effect parameter adjustments)

Pix jam (Switch image clips) Pix Jam

Mixer AUX1–4 Mixer channel (AUX1–4)

Mixer DlyCho Mixer channel (delay/chorus)

Mixer Reverb Mixer channel (reverb)

Mixer A.Phrs

Mixer channel (audio phrase)

Mixer input

AMix

Mixer channel (input)

Mixer channel (audio track)

MIDI (MIDI output)

Specifies the MIDI connector and channel used for MIDI output of the data from the MIDI track.

Value

Off

A-1–A-16

B-1–B-16

R-1–R-16

Explanation

No output.

Output to the MIDI OUT A connector

(MIDI channel 1–16)

Output to the MIDI OUT B connector

(MIDI channel 1–16)

Output to the R-BUS connector

(MIDI channel 1–16)

Prog (Program change)

Specifies the MIDI program change that will be transmitted each time you play back from the beginning of the song or pattern.

Range: Off, 1–128

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-11

MV-8800_r_e.book 12 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

Bank.H/L

A bank select message will be transmitted together with the program change message. If you set this to ---, a bank select message will not be transmitted. This setting is valid if the Prog parameter is set to anything other than

Off.

Parameter Value

Bank.H

L

---, 0–127

---, 0–127

Explanation

Bank select MSB (CC#0) value

Bank select LCB (CC#32) value

Quantize Type

Select the type of quantization (timing correction) that will be applied when the sequencer plays.

Value

Off

Grid

Shuffle

Template

Explanation

Play Quantize will not be applied.

The data will be adjusted toward intervals of the beat specified by the Grid Quantize Resolution parameter.

Shuffle Quantization will be applied. Notes will be adjusted forward or backward toward intervals of the beat specified by the Shuffle Quantize

Resolution parameter, by the amount specified by Shuffle Rate.

This adds a “shuffle” or “swing” character to the rhythm.

A quantize template will be applied. By choosing one of 71 quantization settings, you can easily modify the beat in a wide variety of ways. In addition to various shuffle templates, these also include templates that use velocity to create a rhythm feel (Groove Quantize).

Strength (Quantize strength)

Sets the strength of quantization that will be applied to the notes specified by the Grid Quantize Resolution parameters. Higher value of this parameter will cause notes to be adjusted more closely toward the rhythmic intervals specified by Grid Quantize Resolution.

Range: 0%– 100 %

• A setting of 100 produces the strongest effect; at a setting of 0 no correction will be applied.

Resolution

Specifies the quantization timing. Choose the shortest note value that occurs in the region you want to quantize.

Quantize Type Range

(60), (80), (120) , (160),

Grid

Shuffle (120) , (240)

Rate

When Quantize Type=Shuffle, this specifies how far away the “backbeat” notes (relative to the Shuffle

Quantize Resolution setting) will be from the downbeats.

You can create a sense of swing by shifting the timing of the backbeats. With a setting of 50%, the backbeats will be exactly between the preceding and following downbeats. With a setting of 0%, the backbeats will be moved to the same timing as the preceding downbeat.

With a setting of 100%, the backbeats will be moved to the same timing as the following downbeat.

Range: 0%– 66 % –100%

Template

When Quantize Type=Template, you can use the following quantize templates.

Dance

01 16 Norm. Dance L.Acc

02 16 Norm. Dance H.Acc

03

05

06 16 Heavy Dance H.Acc

07

16 Norm. Dance L.Swg

04 16 Norm. Dance H.Swg

16 Heavy Dance L.Acc

16 Heavy Dance L.Swg

Low dynamics

High dynamics

Light swing

Strong swing

Low dynamics, dragging the beat

High dynamics, dragging the beat

Light swing, dragging the beat

08 16 Heavy Dance H.Swg

Strong swing, dragging the beat

09 16 Pushed Dance L.Acc

Low dynamics, rushing the beat

10 16 Pushed Dance H.Acc

High dynamics, rushing the beat

11 16 Pushed Dance L.Swg

Light swing, rushing the beat

12 16 Pushed Dance H.Swg

Strong swing, rushing the beat

Fusion

13 16 Norm. Fusion L.Acc

14 16 Norm. Fusion H.Acc

15 16 Norm. Fusion L.Swg

Low dynamics

High dynamics

Light swing

16 16 Norm. Fusion H.Swg

Strong swing

17 16 Heavy Fusion L.Acc

18 16 Heavy Fusion H.Acc

Low dynamics, dragging the beat

High dynamics, dragging the beat

19 16 Heavy Fusion L.Swg

Light swing, dragging the beat

20 16 Heavy Fusion H.Swg

Strong swing, dragging the beat

21 16 Pushed Fusion L.Acc

Low dynamics, rushing the beat

22 16 Pushed Fusion H.Acc

High dynamics, rushing the beat

23 16 Pushed Fusion L.Swg

Light swing, rushing the beat

24 16 Pushed Fusion H.Swg

Strong swing, rushing the beat

Reggae

25 16 Norm. Reggae L.Acc

Low dynamics

26 16 Norm. Reggae H.Acc

High dynamics

27 16 Norm. Reggae L.Swg

Light swing

28 16 Norm. Reggae H.Swg

Strong swing

29 16 Heavy Reggae L.Acc

Low dyndragging the beat

30 16 Heavy Reggae H.Acc

High dynamics, dragging the beat

31 16 Heavy Reggae L.Swg

Strong swing, dragging the beat

32 16 Heavy Reggae H.Swg

Strong swing, dragging the beat

33 16 Pushed Reggae L.Acc

Low dynamics, rushing the beat

34 16 Pushed Reggae H.Acc High dynamics, rushing the beat

35 16 Pushed Reggae L.Swg Light swing, rushing the beat

36 16 Pushed Reggae H.Swg Strong swing, rushing the beat

Pops

37 8 Norm. Pops L.Acc

38 8 Norm. Pops H.Acc

39 8 Norm. Pops L.Swg

40 8 Norm. Pops H.Swg

41 8 Heavy Pops L.Acc

42 8 Heavy Pops H.Acc

43 8 Heavy Pops L.Swg

44 8 Heavy Pops H.Swg

45 8 Pushed Pops L.Acc

46 8 Pushed Pops H.Acc

Low dynamics

High dynamics

Light swing

Strong swing

Low dynamics, dragging the beat

High dynamics, dragging the beat

Light swing, dragging the beat

Strong swing, dragging the beat

Low dynamics, rushing the beat

High dynamics, rushing the beat

S-12

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 13 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

47 8 Pushed Pops L.Swg

48 8 Pushed Pops H.Swg

Light swing, rushing the beat

Strong swing, rushing the beat

Rhumba

49 8 Norm. Rhumba L.Acc

Low dynamics

50 8 Norm. Rhumba H.Acc

High dynamics

51 8 Norm. Rhumba L.Swg

Light swing

52 8 Norm. Rhumba H.Swg

Strong swing

53 8 Heavy Rhumba L.Acc

Low dynamics, dragging the beat

54 8 Heavy Rhumba H.Acc

High dynamics, dragging the beat

55 8 Heavy Rhumba L.Swg

Light swing, dragging the beat

56 8 Heavy Rhumba H.Swg

Strong swing, dragging the beat

57 8 Pushed Rhumba L.Acc

Low dynamics, rushing the beat

58 8 Pushed Rhumba H.Acc

High dynamics, rushing the beat

59 8 Pushed Rhumba L.Swg

Light swing, rushing the beat

60 8 Pushed Rhumba H.Swg Strong swing, rushing the beat

Other

61 Samba 1Pandero etc

62 Samba 2Surdo/Timba

63 Axe 1Caixa

64 Axe 2Surdo

65 Salsa 1Cascala

66 Salsa 2Conga

67 Triplets

68 Quintuplets

69 Sextuplets

70 7 Against 2 QuaterNo

71 Lagging Triplets

Samba (for pandero, etc.)

Samba (for surdo and timbale, etc.)

Axe (for caixa)

Axe (for surdo)

Salsa (for cascara)

Salsa (for conga)

Triplets

Pentuplets

Sextuplets

Seven over two beats

Lagging triplets

Velocity

When Quantize Type=Template, this specifies the strength of the velocity correction that will be applied by the Quantize Template you select. Higher settings will cause the velocities to be adjusted more closely toward the velocities of the template.

Range: 0– 100 %

• With a setting of 0, the velocities will not be adjusted at all.

SONG

F-buttons

• [F1](Name)

Displays the EDIT NAME popup (p. 3), where you can

name the current track.

• [F5](Close)

Closes the TRACK PARAMETER popup (for a MIDI track) (this popup).

S-13

MV-8800_r_e.book 14 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

TRACK PARAMETER popup (for an Audio track)

Here you can make detailed parameter settings for an audio track.

■ To access this screen

• [SONG] or [PATTERN] ➜ select an audio track as the current track ➜ [F2](Track Param)

Explanation of each area

Track (Track number and track name)

This is the number and name of the track you are editing.

You can press [F1](Name) to open the EDIT NAME popup

(p. 3) and edit the track name.

Mute Control

Specifies whether the track will be muted by the Track

Mute data recorded in the Mute Control track.

Value

Off

On

On

(Default=Off)

On

(Default=On)

Explanation

The recorded mute data will be disabled.

(Manual)

The recorded mute data will be enabled.

(Automatic)

The recorded mute data will be enabled.

(Automatic)

With this setting, moving to the beginning of the track will automatically defeat muting.

The recorded mute data will be enabled.

(Automatic)

With this setting, moving to the beginning of the track will automatically activate muting.

Output Assign

Specifies the output jack from which the audio recorded on the track will be output.

Value

Mix

AUX1–AUX4

Explanation

Mix bus

AUX bus 1–4

MLT1–MLT8 Multi output bus 1–8 (mono)

MLT1/2–MLT7/8 Multi output bus 1/2–7/8 (stereo)

Level

Specifies the volume of each part.

Range: 0– 100 –127

Pan

Specifies the panning at which the signal is sent to the bus.

Range: L63– C –R63

DlyCho Send

Specifies the amount of signal sent to the delay/chorus effect.

Range: 0 –127

Reverb Send

Specifies the amount of signal sent to the reverb effect.

Range: 0 –127

F-buttons

• [F1](Name)

Displays the EDIT NAME popup (p. 3), where you can

name the current track.

• [F5](Close)

Closes the TRACK PARAMETER popup (for an Audio track) (this popup).

S-14

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 15 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

TRACK PARAMETER popup (for a Pattern track)

Make detailed parameter settings for the Pattern track.

■ To access this screen

• [SONG] ➜ select a pattern track as the current track

➜ [F2](Track Param)

Explanation of each area

Track (Track number and track name)

This is the number and name of the track you are editing.

You can press [F1](Name) to open the EDIT NAME popup

(p. 3) and edit the track name.

Mute Control

Specifies whether the track will be muted by the Track

Mute data recorded in the Mute Control track.

Value

Off

On

On

(Default=Off)

On

(Default=On)

Explanation

The recorded mute data will be disabled.

(Manual)

The recorded mute data will be enabled.

(Automatic)

The recorded mute data will be enabled.

(Automatic)

With this setting, moving to the beginning of the track will automatically defeat muting.

The recorded mute data will be enabled.

(Automatic)

With this setting, moving to the beginning of the track will automatically activate muting.

F-buttons

• [F1](Name)

Displays the EDIT NAME popup (p. 3), where you can

name the current track.

• [F5](Close)

Closes the TRACK PARAMETER popup (for a Pattern track) (this popup).

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-15

MV-8800_r_e.book 16 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

RECORDING PARAMETER (MIDI) popup

Here you can set parameters for recording onto a MIDI track.

■ To access this screen

• [SONG] ➜ select a MIDI track as the current track

[MENU] ➜ select “Recording Parameter” ➜

[F5](Select)

• [STOP ( )] ➜ [REC ( )]

Explanation of each area

Rec Mode (Recording mode)

Specifies how recording will occur

Value

Overdub1

Overdub2

Replace

Explanation

Newly recorded data will be added to the previously-recorded data.

By using this in conjunction with loop recording, you can repeatedly overdub a specified region.

For example, you can use this method to record the individual instruments of a drum performance one by one, like this: bass drum

123 snare drum

hi-hat.

If you enter an identical note event at the same timing as a previously entered note event, the velocity of the existing event will be replaced by the new velocity.

Newly recorded data will replace the previously-recorded data. Use this when you want to re-record.

Count In

Specifies how recording will start.

Value

Off

1 Meas

2 Meas

Wait Note

Explanation

Recording will begin the instant you press

[PLAY ( )]. (There will be no count.)

Recording will begin after a one-measure count.

Recording will begin after a two-measure count.

Recording will begin the moment one of the following occurs.

A note message is received (you play a keyboard or other device connected to the

MIDI IN connector)

You strike a velocity pad

You press [PLAY ( )]

Auto Punch In / Auto Punch Out

You can specify two time locations at which recording will automatically start and stop (“auto punch”).

Parameter

Auto Punch In

Auto Punch Out

Value

0000-01-000–9999-**-***

0000-01-000–9999-**-***

• *-*** will change according to the number of beats specified

in “Time Signature” (p. 79).

• You cannot set Auto Punch In to a location after Auto

Punch Out.

Metronome Mode

Specifies when the metronome signal will be output.

Value

Off

Rec Only

Play&Rec

Always

Explanation

The metronome will not sound.

The metronome will sound only during recording.

The metronome will sound during playback and recording.

The metronome will always sound.

S-16

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 17 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

Input Quantize Type

You can apply quantization while you record, so that the corrected data is recorded on the sequencer track.

Value

Off

Grid

Shuffle

Explanation

Input quantization will not be used.

The data will be adjusted to the timing intervals specified by the Grid Quantize Resolution parameter.

Shuffle quantization will be used. The data will be adjusted forward or backward relative to the timing intervals specified by Shuffle Quantize Resolution, by the amount specified by Shuffle Quantize Rate.

This can give the beat a bouncy feel, such as

“shuffle” or “swing.”

Strength (Quantize strength)

Specifies the strength of synchronization applied to the notes specified by Grid Quantize Resolution or Shuffle

Quantize Resolution. Higher values will adjust the notes further toward the locations specified by the Grid

Quantize Resolution or Shuffle Quantize Resolution parameter.

Range: 0%– 100 %

• A setting of 100 produces the strongest effect; a setting of

0 produces no adjustment at all.

Quantize Resolution

Specifies the quantization timing. Select the shortest note value that occurs in the region you are quantizing.

Input Quantize

Type parameter

Value

Grid

Shuffle

(60), (80), (120) , (160), (240),

(320), (480)

(120) , (240)

Rate

When Type=Shuffle, this specifies how far away the

“backbeat” notes (relative to the Shuffle Quantize

Resolution setting) will be from the downbeats. You can create a sense of swing by shifting the timing of the backbeats. With a setting of 50%, the backbeats will be exactly between the preceding and following downbeats.

With a setting of 0%, the backbeats will be moved to the same timing as the preceding downbeat. With a setting of 100%, the backbeats will be moved to the same timing as the following downbeat.

Range: 0%– 66% –100%

F-buttons

• [F1](Rec Filter)

Displays the RECORDING FILTER popup (p. 18).

• [F3](Metronome)

Displays the METRONOME popup (p. 22).

• [F5](Close)

Closes the RECORDING PARAMETER (MIDI) popup

(this popup).

• The Shuffle Quantize Resolution parameter and Shuffle

Quantize Timing parameter settings are valid when Type is set to Shuffle.

S-17

MV-8800_r_e.book 18 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

RECORDING FILTER popup

Here you can restrict the data that will be recorded during MIDI sequence recording.

■ To access this screen

• [SONG] or [PATTERN] ➜ select a MIDI track as the current track ➜ [MENU] ➜ select “Recording

Parameter” ➜ [F5](Select) ➜ [F1](Rec Filter)

• [STOP ( )] ➜ [REC ( )] ➜ [F1](Rec Filter)

Explanation of each area

Filter

Messages with the ✔ remove the ✔

mark will be recorded. If you

mark, those messages will not be recorded on the sequencer.

Parameter Explanation

Note messages. Data that plays notes.

Note

Poly

Aftertouch

Control

Change

Program

Change

Channel

Aftertouch

Polyphonic aftertouch. Data that applies aftertouch independently to an individual key.

Control changes. Data that applies various effects (e.g., modulation) according to the control number.

Program changes. Data that selects sounds

(patches).

Channel aftertouch. Data that applies aftertouch to an entire channel.

Pitch Bend Pitch bend. Data that changes the pitch.

Tune

Request

This MIDI message causes an analog synthesizer to tune itself.

Mode

Message

System

Exclusive

MIDI Mode Message that changes the mode

System exclusive messages.

F-buttons

• [F1](All On)

Specifies all messages will be recorded.

• [F2](All Off)

Specifies all messages will not be recorded.

• [F3](On/Off)

Specifies whether the message at the cursor will be recorded.

• [F5](Close)

Closes the RECORDING FILTER popup (this popup).

S-18

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 19 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

RECORDING PARAMETER (AUDIO) popup

Here you can set recording parameters for an audio track.

■ To access this screen

• [SONG] ➜ select an audio track as the current track

[MENU] ➜ select “Recording Parameter” ➜

[F5](Select)

• [STOP ( )] ➜ [REC ( )]

Explanation of each area

Rec Mode (Recording mode)

Specifies how recording will occur.

Value

Direct Rec

Resample

Mix

Event

Explanation

Record audio directly from the Input to the track

(2-channels).

Record the audio of the master out.

Record the playback timing of audio phrases triggered from the velocity pads.

Since only timing data will be recorded, this is a way to conserve the data size when recording the identical audio material on the track.

Sample Type

Specifies the number of input channels. This setting is valid if Rec Mode is set to anything other than Event.

Value

Stereo

Mono

Explanation

The audio will be recorded in stereo (2 channels).

The audio will be recorded in monaural (1 channel).

Count In

Specifies how recording will start.

Value

Off

1 Meas

2 Meas

Wait Note

Explanation

Recording will begin the instant you press

[PLAY ( )].(There will be no count.)

Recording will begin after a one-measure count.

Recording will begin after a two-measure count.

Recording will begin the moment one of the following occurs.

A note message is received (you play a keyboard or other device connected to the

MIDI IN connector)

You strike a velocity pad

• You press [PLAY ( )]

Auto Punch In / Auto Punch Out

You can specify two time locations at which recording will automatically start and stop (“auto punch”).

Parameter

Auto Punch In

Auto Punch Out

Value

0000-01-000–9999-**-***

0000-01-000–9999-**-***

*-*** will change according to the number of beats specified

in “Time Signature” (p. 79).

You cannot set Auto Punch In to a location after Auto

Punch Out.

Metronome Mode

Specifies when the metronome signal will be output.

Value

Off

Rec Only

Play&Rec

Always

Explanation

The metronome will not sound.

The metronome will sound only during recording.

The metronome will sound during playback and recording.

The metronome will always sound.

Input Quantize Type

You can apply quantization while you record into the sequencer when Rec Mode is “Event.”

Range: Off, (60), (80), (120) , (160), (240),

(320), (480)

Input level meter

Indicates the input level.

F-buttons

• [F1](Reset Peak)

Clears the indicators of the peak hold in the Level meters.

• [F3](Metronome)

Displays the METRONOME popup (p. 22).

• [F5](Close)

Closes the RECORDING PARAMETER (AUDIO) popup

(this popup).

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-19

MV-8800_r_e.book 20 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

RECORDING PARAMETER (PATTERN) popup

Here you can set recording parameters for an pattern track.

■ To access this screen

• [SONG] ➜ select a pattern track as the current track

➜ [MENU] ➜ select “Recording Parameter” ➜

[F5](Select)

• [STOP ( )] ➜ [REC ( )]

Explanation of each area

Count In

Specifies how recording will start.

Value

Off

1 Meas

2 Meas

Wait Note

Explanation

Recording will begin the instant you press

[PLAY ( )].(There will be no count.)

Recording will begin after a one-measure count.

Recording will begin after a two-measure count.

Recording will begin the moment one of the following occurs.

A note message is received (you play a keyboard or other device connected to the

MIDI IN connector)

You strike a velocity pad

• You press [PLAY ( )]

Auto Punch In / Auto Punch Out

You can specify two time locations at which recording will automatically start and stop (“auto punch”).

Parameter

Auto Punch In

Auto Punch Out

Value

0000-01-000–9999-**-***

0000-01-000–9999-**-***

*-*** will change according to the number of beats specified

in “Time Signature” (p. 79).

You cannot set Auto Punch In to a location after Auto

Punch Out.

Metronome Mode

Specifies when the metronome signal will be output.

Value

Off

Rec Only

Play&Rec

Always

Explanation

The metronome will not sound.

The metronome will sound only during recording.

The metronome will sound during playback and recording.

The metronome will always sound.

Input Quantize Type

You can apply quantization while you record into the sequencer when Rec Mode is “Event.”

Range: Off , (60), (80), (120), (160), (240),

(320), (480)

F-buttons

• [F3](Metronome)

Displays the METRONOME popup (p. 22).

• [F5](Close)

Closes the RECORDING PARAMETER (PATTERN) popup (this popup).

S-20

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 21 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

RECORDING PARAMETER (MUTE CONTROL) popup

Here you can set recording parameters for a mute control track.

■ To access this screen

• [SHIFT] + [PAD BANKS] ➜ [REC ( )]

SONG

Explanation of each area

Count In

Specifies how recording will start.

Value

Off

1 Meas

2 Meas

Wait Note

Explanation

Recording will begin the instant you press

[PLAY ( )].(There will be no count.)

When you press [PLAY ( )], a count

(playback) will begin from one measure before the recording-start location, and recording will begin at the recording-start location.

When you press [PLAY ( )], a count

(playback) will begin from two measures before the recording-start location, and recording will begin at the recording-start location.

Recording will begin the moment one of the following occurs.

A note message is received (you play a keyboard or other device connected to the

MIDI IN connector)

You strike a velocity pad

• You press [PLAY ( )]

Auto Punch In / Auto Punch Out

You can specify two time locations at which recording will automatically start and stop (“auto punch”).

Parameter

Auto Punch In

Auto Punch Out

Value

0000-01-000–9999-**-***

0000-01-000–9999-**-***

• *-*** will change according to the number of beats specified

in “Time Signature” (p. 79).

• You cannot set Auto Punch In to a location after Auto

Punch Out.

Metronome Mode

Specifies when the metronome signal will be output.

Value

Off

Rec Only

Play&Rec

Always

Explanation

The metronome will not sound.

The metronome will sound only during recording.

The metronome will sound during playback and recording.

The metronome will always sound.

Input Quantize Type

You can apply quantization while you record into the sequencer.

Range: Off , (60), (80), (120), (160), (240),

(320), (480)

F-buttons

• [F3](Metronome)

Displays the METRONOME popup (p. 22).

• [F5](Close)

Closes the RECORDING PARAMETER (MUTE

CONTROL) popup (this popup).

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-21

MV-8800_r_e.book 22 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

METRONOME popup

Here you can make metronome settings.

■ To access this screen

• [SONG] or [PATTERN] ➜ [MENU]

“Metronome” ➜ [F5](Select)

➜ select

• [STOP ( )] ➜ [REC ( )] ➜ [F3](Metronome)

Explanation of each area

Mode (Metronome Mode)

Specifies when the metronome signal will be output.

Value

Off

Rec Only

Play&Rec

Always

Explanation

The metronome will not sound.

The metronome will sound only during recording.

The metronome will sound during playback and recording.

The metronome will always sound.

Output (Metronome Output)

Specifies the output destination for the metronome signal.

Value

Click

Beep

Explanation

Output the internal metronome sound (click).

Output the internal metronome sound

(beep).

Part 1-16

Use an instrument part to sound the metronome.

MIDI A-1–A-16 Transmit a note message from MIDI OUT A.

MIDI B-1–B-16 Transmit a note message from MIDI OUT B.

MIDI R-1–R-16 Transmit a note message from R-BUS.

Level

Specifies the volume of the metronome.

Range: 1– 50 –127

• The Metronome Level parameter is valid only when

Metronome Output is set to Click or Beep.

To

Specifies the output destination of the metronome sound.

Value

Mix

MLT1 –MLT8

M1/2 – M7/8

Explanation

Mix bus

Multi output bus (mono)

Multi output bus (stereo)

• The Metronome To parameter is valid only when

Metronome Output is set to Click or Beep.

Accent Note

Specifies the note number for the strong beat (first beat).

Range: C-1– C#2 –G9

Accent Velocity

Specifies the velocity for the strong beat (first beat). The

Accent Note will be output with the specified velocity.

Range: 1– 100 –127

Normal Note

Specifies the note number for the weak beats (other than the first beat).

Range: C-1– C#2 –G9

• When using the metronome to play a drum set, you can select a desired percussion instrument by specifying the note number.

Normal Velocity

Specifies the velocity for the weak beats (other than the first beat). The Normal Note will be output with the specified velocity.

Range: 1– 64 –127

F-button

• [F5](Close)

Closes the METRONOME popup (this popup).

S-22

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 23 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

EVENT LIST screen

Here you can edit the MIDI messages recorded in a MIDI track.

■ To access this screen

• [SONG] or [PATTERN] ➜ select a MIDI track as the current track ➜ [F3](Event list)

Explanation of each area

Event Position

Indicates the time location of the MIDI messages recorded in the current track.

Event parameters

Displays the parameters of the message selected by the cursor. The parameters shown will depend on the selected message, as follows.

Message

Note

Poly Aftertouch

Control Change

Displayed parameters

Pad

Note

Velo

Duration

OffV

Pad

Note

Value

Number

Value

Number

Name

Program Change

Bank H

Ch Aftertouch

Pitch Bend

Sys.Excl

Local Control

Mono Mode

L

Value

Value

Value

Value

Value

Explanation

Pad number

Note number

Velocity

Duration

Off-velocity

Pad number

Note number

Value

Control change number

Value

Program change number

Patch name on library

Program change bank number (upper)

Program change bank number (lower)

Value

Value

Value

Local Control On/Off

Number of channels

Event list

Lists the MIDI events recorded in the current track.

Use the cursor to select a MIDI event, and press the right cursor button to move the cursor to each event parameter. Press the left cursor button to move the cursor to the time location. If the MIDI event at the current location is a system exclusive message, the

SYS-EX popup (p. 27) will appear.

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-23

MV-8800_r_e.book 24 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

F-buttons and menu

• [F1](Create)

Displays the CREATE EVENT popup (p. 25).

• [F2](Erase)

Erases the event at the cursor location. The erased data will be held in the clipboard.

• [F3](Copy)

Copies the event at the cursor location into the clipboard.

• [F4](Paste)

Displays the PASTE EVENT popup (p. 26), allowing you

to paste the event that was held in internal memory by the Erase or Copy command.

• [F5](View Filter)

Display the VIEW FILTER popup (p. 53).

• [MEMU]

Displays the MENU popup.

Menu items

1 Step Time

Displays the STEP TIME popup (p. 58).

2 Track Parameter

Displays the TRACK PARAMETER popup (for a MIDI track) (p. 11).

3 Solo On/Off

Turns solo on/off for the current track.

S-24

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 25 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

CREATE EVENT popup

This lets you add a new event to a MIDI track.

■ To access this screen

• [SONG] or [PATTERN] ➜ select a MIDI track as the current track ➜ [F3](Event List) ➜ [F1](Create)

Explanation of each area

Event

Specify the type of MIDI event you want to add.

Parameter

Note

Poly

Aftertouch

Control

Change

Program

Change

Channel

Aftertouch

Pitch Bend

Tune

Request

Mode

Message

System

Exclusive

Explanation

Note messages. Data that plays notes.

Program changes. Data that selects sounds

(patches).

Control changes. Data that applies various effects (e.g., modulation) according to the control number.

Pitch bend. Data that changes the pitch.

Polyphonic aftertouch. Data that applies aftertouch independently to an individual key.

Channel aftertouch. Data that applies aftertouch to an entire channel.

This MIDI message causes an analog synthesizer to tune itself.

MIDI Mode Message that changes the mode

System exclusive messages.

F-buttons

• [F1](

) / [F2](

)

These buttons move the cursor between commands shown in the popup.

• [F5](Select)

Adds the MIDI event selected by the cursor.

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-25

MV-8800_r_e.book 26 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

PASTE EVENT popup

An event temporarily stored in the event list clipboard can be “pasted” at the specified time location.

■ To access this screen

• [SONG] or [PATTERN] ➜ [F3](Event List) ➜ copy an event ➜ [F4](Paste)

Explanation of each area

To

Specifies the time location at which the MIDI event will be added.

Range: 0000-01-000–9999-**-***

• ** will depend on the number of beats in the time signature selected in “Time Signature” (p.237).

F-button

• [F5](Execute)

Adds the event and closes the PASTE EVENT popup.

■ If the “Sequence memory full” message appears

The data cannot be created because the sequence memory is full.

S-26

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 27 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

SYS-EX popup

Here you can edit a system exclusive message.

■ To access this screen

• [SONG] or [PATTERN] ➜ [F3](Event list) ➜ move the cursor in the event list to a system exclusive message ➜ CURSOR [ ]

• [SONG] or [PATTERN] ➜ [F3](Event list)

➜ [F1](Create) ➜ select “System Exclusive” ➜

[F5](Select)

• This screen will appear if the current track is a MIDI track.

Explanation of each area

Message

This shows the system exclusive message. Input the message between F0 and F7. Use the VALUE dial or

[DEC]/[INC] to specify the data.

Auto Sum

Make this indicator appear if you want the check-sum to be calculated automatically. Press [F1](Auto Sum) to switch this indicator on/off.

F-buttons

• [F1](Auto Sum)

When you are inputting a Roland system exclusive message, you can use Auto Check Sum to calculate the checksum automatically.

If Auto Sum is On, the data byte preceding the end of the message (F7) will be the checksum; the calculated result will be inserted here automatically.

If input is not successful, turn Auto Sum “Off” and then

“On” again.

• [F2](Insert)

Adds data at the cursor location. A value of “00” will be inserted; edit this value as desired.

• [F3](Delete)

Deletes the data at the cursor location.

• [F4](Test)

Transmits the currently-shown system exclusive message from the MIDI OUT connector.

• [F5](Execute)

Finalizes the system exclusive message that you input.

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-27

MV-8800_r_e.book 28 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

AUDIO EVENT PARAMETER popup

Here you can adjust the parameters of the event at the current time location within an audio track.

■ To access this screen

• [SONG] or [PATTERN] ➜ [F5](Seq Edit) ➜ an audio track as the current track ➜ select

[MENU] ➜ select “Audio Event Parameter” ➜ [F5](Select)

Explanation of each area

Track (Track number and track name)

This is the number and name of the track you are editing.

Position

Displays the starting time of the event.

Duration

Specifies the length of the individual event.

Range: 0000-01 (1 tick)–

9999-*** (9999 beats *** ticks)

Sample

Indicates the sample number that exists at the current time location.

Level

Specifies the volume of the audio event.

Range: 0– 127

Coarse Tune

Adjusts the pitch of the audio event in semitone steps.

Range: -48– 0 –+48 (+/-4 octaves)

Fine Tune

Adjusts the pitch of the audio event in one-cent steps.

Range: -50– 0 –+50

• One cent = 1/100th of a semitone

BPM Sync

Selects whether the playback speed of the audio event will be adjusted in realtime according to sequencer tempo changes. If this is On, tempo changes will shorten or lengthen the phrase in realtime.

Range: Off , On

Stretch Type

If the BPM Sync parameter is On, this setting adjusts the audio quality with which the sample is stretched or shrunk (Time Stretch). The ideal setting will depend on the type of audio material. If you choose Auto, the appropriate setting will be automatically assigned based on the length of the sound and the BPM.

Range: Auto , 1–10

BPM

Specifies the tempo of audio event. When BPM Sync parameter is on, audio event played by this BPM setting.

Range: 5.00– 120.00

–300.00

F-button

• [F1](Move)

Displays the MOVE AUDIO EVENT popup (p. 113). This

allows you to modify the length of the audio event or move it to a different time location.

• [F2](Sample Edit)

Displays the AUDIO EVENT SAMPLE EDIT popup (p.

29). This allows you to adjust the playback region of the

sample used by the audio event.

• [F5](Close)

Closes the AUDIO EVENT PARAMETER popup (this popup).

S-28

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 29 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

AUDIO EVENT SAMPLE EDIT popup

Here you can adjust the samples of the event at the current time location within an audio track.

■ To access this screen

• [SONG] or [PATTERN] ➜ [F5](Seq Edit) ➜ an audio track as the current track ➜ select

[MENU] select “Audio Event Parameter” ➜ [F5](Select)

[F2](Sample Edit)

[

Explanation of each area

Sample

Indicates the sample number and sample name that you are editing.

Zoom level

Indicates the ratio at which the waveform shown in the wave window is being magnified or shrunk.

Wave window

Shows the audio event (waveform) that you are editing.

Start Point

The point at which playback will start. Set this to skip any unwanted portion of the waveform at the beginning of the sample, so that the sample will begin playing at the desired timing.

Loop Point

Specifies the point at which the playback will begin repeating (i.e., for the second and subsequent plays).

Set this if you want to the sample to loop from a point other than the Start Point.

End Point

Specifies the point at which playback will end. Set this to avoid playing any unwanted portion of the waveform at the end of the sample.

Loop

Loops the sample. If this is On, the sample will play from the Start Point to the End Point, and then continue playing repeatedly in the forward direction from the Loop

Start Point to the End Point.

Range: On , Off

Start Point Loop Point End Point

Reverse

Plays the sample backward. If this is On, the sample will play only once from the End Point to the Start Point in the reverse direction.

Range: Off , On

Start Point Loop Point End Point

• If you use this in conjunction with the Loop parameter, the sample will play from the End Point to the Start Point, and then continue playing repeatedly from the Loop Start Point to the Start Point in the reverse direction.

Start Point Loop Point End Point

F-buttons

• [F4](Preview)

The sample will play while you hold down the button.

• [F5](Command)

Displays the SELECT SAMPLE EDIT COMMAND popup

(p. 132).

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-29

MV-8800_r_e.book 30 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

PIANO ROLL EDIT screen

Here you can edit the MIDI messages that are recorded on a MIDI track. The piano roll graphically indicates the pitch, duration, and velocity.

■ To access this screen

• [SONG] or [PATTERN] ➜ select a MIDI track as the current track ➜ [F4](PianoRoll)

Explanation of each area

Note number (keyboard)

The note numbers (keys) are shown from bottom to top.

Since the actual pitches correspond to the note numbers, the displayed location of the note tells you the pitch.

Editing Region

Displays the editing region (region in time–out time).

Piano roll

This shows the note events. The horizontal axis is time, and the vertical axis is note number (pitch). You can change the note number or time location by moving the displayed note event.

Velocity

Indicates the velocity of the note event. The velocity is shown as a pair with the note event; a longer bar indicates a stronger velocity.

Step Time

This is the unit by which the current time will move when you press STEP [ ]/[ ].

F-buttons

• [F1](Note Sel)

Selects/de-selects the note number at the note cursor. If an In time and Out time are specified for the selected note number, the note numbers existing within that time range will be selected.

• [F2](All Note Sel)

Selects/de-selects all note numbers. If all note numbers are selected, and an In time and Out time are specified, all note numbers existing in that time region will be selected.

• [F3] (Rgn In/Out)

Specifies the editing region. Press this once to set the beginning (In time) of the editing region, or once again to set the end (Out time) of the editing region. If you press it yet again, the beginning (In time) of the editing region will again be set.

• [F4] (Quick Rgn)

Selects the data at which the current note and the current time location intersect.

• [F5] (Command)

Displays the SELECT PIANO ROLL EDIT COMMAND popup (p. 33).

• [MENU]

Displays the MENU popup.

Menu items

1 Step Time

Displays the STEP TIME popup (p. 58).

2 Track Parameter

Displays the TRACK PARAMETER popup (for a MIDI track) (p. 11)

3 Solo On/Off

Turns solo on/off for the current track.

S-30

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 31 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

SEQUENCE EDIT screen

Here you can perform a variety of editing operations on the specified region of the events recorded in each track.

■ To access this screen

• [SONG] or [PATTERN] ➜ [F5](Seq Edit)

Explanation of each area

Now time

Indicates the current time (measure/beat/tick) in the sequencer.

Time Sign

Indicates the time sign of the current song.

Step Time

This is the unit by which the current time will move when you press STEP [ ]/[ ].

Editing Region

Displays the editing region (region in time–out time).

No. (Track number and icon)

This indicates the number of each track recorded in the sequencer. The icon at the right of the track number shows the type of track.

Icon Explanation

MIDI track

Audio track

Pattern track

• The line of the track number selected by the cursor is highlighted. We refer to this track as the “current track.”

Track Name

Shows the name assigned to each track.

Track status (M/S)

Switches the state of the track.

M column

When displays “M,” mute is on. Sound will not be played back from this track.

When Displays “-,” mute is off.

S column

When displays “S,” solo is on.

Sound will be played back from only this track.

When displays “-,” solo is off.

• If you simultaneously turn on M (Mute) and S (Solo) for the same track, the S (Solo) setting will take priority.

Play List

The boxes show the existence of data recorded in each track.

A gray box is shown for data that contains no note events.

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-31

MV-8800_r_e.book 32 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

F-buttons and menu

• [F1](Track Sel)

Selects/de-selects the current track. If an In time and Out time are specified for the selected tracks, track events existing in that time region will be selected (highlighted).

• [F2](All Track Sel)

Selects/de-selects all tracks. If all tracks are selected, and an In time and Out time are specified, all track events existing in that time region will be selected

(highlighted).

• [F3](Rgn In/Out)

Specifies the editing region. Press this once to specify the current time location as the beginning (In time) of the editing region, or once again to specify it as the end (Out time) of the editing region. If you press it yet again, the current time location will once again be specified as the beginning (In time) of the editing region.

• [F4](Quick Rgn)

Selects the data at which the current track and the current time location intersect.

• [F5](Command)

Displays the SELECT SEQUENCE EDIT COMMAND popup (p. 34).

• [MENU]

Displays the MENU popup.

Menu items

1 View Filter

Displays the VIEW FILTER popup (p. 53).

2 Step Time

Displays the STEP TIME popup (p. 58).

3 Insert Measure...

Displays the INSERT MEASURE popup (p. 64).

4 Delete Measure...

Displays the DELETE MEASURE popup (p. 65)

5 Audio Event Parameter

Displays the AUDIO EVENT PARAMETER popup

(p. 28).

6 Copy As Audio Phrase...

Displays the COPY AS AUDIO PHRASE popup (p. 45).

7 Pattern Event Parameter

Displays the PATTERN EVENT PARAMETR popup

(p. 112).

• This item is displayed only in Song mode.

8 Paste MIDI Clip...

Displays the PASTE MIDI CLIP popup (p. 47).

9 MIDI Clip Library

Displays the MIDI CLIP LIBRARY popup (p. 46).

10 Paste Pattern...

Displays the PASTE PATTERN popup (p. 106).

S-32

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 33 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

SELECT PIANO ROLL EDIT COMMAND popup

You can execute editing commands on selected note events in the PIANO ROLL EDIT screen.

■ To access this screen

• [SONG] or [PATTERN] ➜ select a MIDI track as the current track ➜ [F4](PianoRoll) ➜ specify the editing region and track ➜ [F5](Command)

Explanation of each area

1 Move...

Displays the MOVE popup (p. 36).

2 Copy&Paste...

Displays the COPY&PASTE popup (p. 35).

3 Copy&Insert...

Displays the COPY&INSERT popup (p. 37).

4 Erase

Deletes the data. The deleted region will be blank.

5 Quantize...

Displays the QUANTIZE popup (p. 38).

6 Change Velocity...

Displays the CHANGE VELOCITY popup (p. 39).

7 Change Duration...

Displays the CHANGE DURATION popup (p. 40).

8 Shift Timing...

Displays the SHIFT TIMING popup (p. 41).

9 Transpose...

Displays the TRANSPOSE popup (p. 43).

F-buttons

• [F1](

) / [F2](

)

These buttons move the cursor between commands shown in the popup.

• [F5](Select)

Executes the menu item or command that is selected by the cursor.

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-33

MV-8800_r_e.book 34 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

SELECT SEQUENCE EDIT COMMAND popup

You can execute editing commands on selected tracks in the SEQUENCE EDIT screen.

■ To access this screen

• [SONG] or [PATTERN] ➜ [F5](Seq Edit) ➜ specify the editing region and track ➜ [F5](Command)

Explanation of each area

1 Move...

Displays the MOVE popup (p. 36).

2 Copy&Paste...

Displays the COPY&PASTE popup (p. 35).

3 Copy&Insert...

Displays the COPY&INSERT popup (p. 37).

4 Erase

Deletes the data. The deleted region will be blank.

5 Cut

Deletes the data. Subsequent data will be moved forward.

6 Quantize...

Displays the QUANTIZE popup (p. 38).

7 Change Velocity...

Displays the CHANGE VELOCITY popup (p. 39).

8 Change Duration...

Displays the CHANGE DURATION popup (p. 40).

9 Shift Timing...

Displays the SHIFT TIMING popup (p. 41).

10 Data Thin...

Displays the DATA THIN popup (p. 42).

11 Transpose...

Displays the TRANSPOSE popup (p. 43).

S-34

MV-8800 Screen Guide

12 Split Notes...

Displays the SPLIT NOTES popup (p. 66).

13 Change Continuous Data...

Displays the CHANGE CONTINUOUS DATA popup

(p. 68).

14 Create Continuous Data...

Displays the CREATE CONTINUOUS DATA popup

(p. 67).

15 Copy As MIDI Clip...

Displays the COPY AS MIDI CLIP popup (p. 44).

16 Copy As New Pattern...

Displays the COPY AS NEW PATTERN popup (p. 105).

F-buttons

• [F1]( ▲ ) / [F2]( ▼ )

These buttons move the cursor between commands shown in the popup.

• [F5](Select)

Executes the menu item or command that is selected by the cursor.

MV-8800_r_e.book 35 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

COPY&PASTE popup

This copies the data of the “In time–Out time” region to the specified location.

■ To access this screen

• Accesses the SELECT SEQUENCE EDIT

COMMAND popup (p. 34)

or

SELECT PIANO ROLL

EDIT COMMAND popup (p. 33)

➜ select

“Copy&Paste...” ➜ [F5](Select)

• The parameters in the COPY&PASTE popup will differ according to whether you access it from PIANO ROLL

EDIT or from SEQUENCE EDIT. In this page we describe all the parameters that might appear; ignore the ones that don’t apply.

Explanation of each area

To

Specifies the copy-destination time.

Range: 0001-01-000–9999-**-***

• *-*** will change according to the number of beats specified

in “Time Signature” (p. 79).

To Track

Specifies the copy-destination track number.

To Track appears only if you are using SEQUENCE EDIT.

If you’ve selected two or more tracks, you won’t be able to select the To Track value. (The display will indicate “Multi tracks selected.”)

Times

Specifies the number of times the copy will be repeated.

Range: 1 –99

Mode

Selects the way in which any data existing at the copy-destination will be handled.

Value

Mix

Replace

Explanation

The data will be combined with the data that exists at the copy-destination.

The data will replace (overwrite) the data that exists at the copy-destination.

Transpose

Specifies the amount of transposition in semitone steps.

Specify a positive (+) value to raise the pitch, or a negative (-) value to lower the pitch. A setting of 0 produces no change.

Range: -127– 0 –127

• Transpose appears only if you are using PIANO ROLL

EDIT.

F-button

• [F5](Execute)

Executes the Copy operation.

You can use the VIEW FILTER popup (p. 53) to limit the

events that will be copied.

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-35

MV-8800_r_e.book 36 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

MOVE popup

This moves the data of the “In time–Out time” region to the specified location.

■ To access this screen

• Accesses the SELECT SEQUENCE EDIT

COMMAND popup (p. 34)

or

SELECT PIANO ROLL

EDIT COMMAND popup (p. 33)

➜ select “Move...”

➜ [F5](Select)

• The parameters in the MOVE popup will differ according to whether you access it from PIANO ROLL EDIT or from

SEQUENCE EDIT. In this page we describe all the parameters that might appear; ignore the ones that don’t apply.

Explanation of each area

To

Specifies the move-destination time.

Range: 0001-01-000–9999-**-***

• *-*** will change according to the number of beats specified

in “Time Signature” (p. 79).

To Track

Specifies the move-destination track number.

To Track appears only if you are using SEQUENCE EDIT.

If you’ve selected two or more tracks, you won’t be able to select the To Track value. (The display will indicate “Multi tracks selected.”)

Mode

Selects the way in which any data existing at the move-destination will be handled.

Value

Mix

Replace

Explanation

The data will be combined with the data that exists at the move-destination.

The data will replace (overwrite) the data that exists at the move-destination.

Transpose

Specifies the amount (in semitones) by which the data will be transposed when it is moved.

Specify a positive (+) value to raise the pitch, or a negative (-) value to lower the pitch. With a setting of 0, the data will not be transposed.

Range: -127– 0 –127

• Transpose appears only if you are using PIANO ROLL

EDIT.

F-button

• [F5](Execute)

Executes the Move operation.

You can use the VIEW FILTER popup (p. 53) to limit the

events that will be moved.

S-36

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 37 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

COPY&INSERT popup

This inserts the data of the “In time–Out time” region into the current time location. Data at the insert-destination will not be overwritten; it will move backward in time (i.e., later in the song) by the corresponding distance.

■ To access this screen

• Accesses the SELECT SEQUENCE EDIT

COMMAND popup (p. 34)

or

SELECT PIANO ROLL

EDIT COMMAND popup (p. 33)

➜ select

“Copy&Insert...” ➜ [F5](Select)

• The parameters in the COPY&INSERT popup will differ according to whether you access it from PIANO ROLL

EDIT or from SEQUENCE EDIT. In this page we describe all the parameters that might appear; ignore the ones that don’t apply.

Explanation of each area

To

Specifies the insert-destination time.

Range: 0001-01-000–9999-**-***

• *-*** will change according to the number of beats specified

in “Time Signature” (p. 79).

To Track

Specifies the insert-destination track number.

To Track appears only if you are using SEQUENCE EDIT.

If you’ve selected two or more tracks, you won’t be able to select the To Track value. (The display will indicate “Multi tracks selected.”)

Times

Specifies the number of times the data will be inserted.

The identical data will be inserted the specified number of times.

Range: 1 –255

Shift All Tracks / Shift All Notes

Specifies whether the data of other tracks / notes will also be shifted backward in time following the insert-destination point.

Range: Off, On

For details on Shift All Track and Shift All Notes refer to

“Copying data and inserting it at another location (Copy &

Insert)” (Owner’s Manual; p. 190).

F-button

• [F5](Execute)

Executes the Copy&Insert operation.

You can use the VIEW FILTER popup (p. 53) to limit the

events that will be copied.

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-37

MV-8800_r_e.book 38 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

QUANTIZE popup

This adjusts the timing of MIDI note events in the way you specify.

■ To access this screen

• Accesses the SELECT SEQUENCE EDIT

COMMAND popup (p. 34)

or

SELECT PIANO ROLL

EDIT COMMAND popup (p. 33)

➜ select

“Quantize...” ➜ [F5](Select)

Explanation of each area

Quantize Type

Selects the type of quantization.

Value

Grid

Shuffle

Template

Explanation

The data will be adjusted toward intervals of the beat specified by the Resolution parameter.

Shuffle Quantization will be applied. Notes will be adjusted forward or backward toward intervals of the beat specified by the Resolution parameter, by the amount specified by Shuffle Quantize Rate.

This adds a “shuffle” or “swing” character to the rhythm.

A quantize template will be applied. By choosing one of 71 quantization settings, you can easily modify the beat in a wide variety of ways. In addition to various shuffle templates, these also include templates that use velocity to create a rhythm feel (Groove Quantize).

Strength

Sets the strength of quantization. Higher value of this parameter will cause notes to be adjusted more closely toward the rhythmic intervals specified by the Resolution parameter.

Range: 0– 100

• A setting of 100 produces the strongest effect; at a setting of 0 no correction will be applied.

Resolution

Specifies the shortest interval to which the note timing will be quantized. The available values will depend on the Type parameter setting.

Quantize Type

Parameter

Range

(60), (80), (120) , (160),

Grid

Shuffle

(120) , (240)

S-38

MV-8800 Screen Guide

Rate

When Type=Shuffle, this specifies how far away the

“backbeat” notes (relative to the Shuffle Quantize

Resolution setting) will be from the downbeats. You can create a sense of swing by shifting the timing of the backbeats. With a setting of 50%, the backbeats will be exactly between the preceding and following downbeats.

With a setting of 0%, the backbeats will be moved to the same timing as the preceding downbeat. With a setting of 100%, the backbeats will be moved to the same timing as the following downbeat.

Range: 0%– 66% –100%

Template

A variety of quantization settings are provided.

See

Template on TRACK PARAMETER popup (for a

MIDI track) (p. 12).

Velocity

When Type=Template, this specifies the strength of the velocity correction that will be applied by the Quantize

Template you select. Higher settings will cause the velocities to be adjusted more closely toward the velocities of the template.

Range: 0– 100

• With a setting of 0, the velocities will not be adjusted at all.

Note Range

Specifies the range of note numbers that will be quantized.

Range: 0 (C-1) –127 (G 9) (lower limit)

0 (C-1)– 127 (G 9) (upper limit)

• Note Range appears only if you are using SEQUENCE

EDIT.

F-button

• [F5](Execute)

Executes the Quantize operation.

MV-8800_r_e.book 39 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

CHANGE VELOCITY popup

This changes the velocity of note events in the “In time–Out time” region.

■ To access this screen

• Accesses the SELECT SEQUENCE EDIT

COMMAND popup (p. 34)

or

SELECT PIANO ROLL

EDIT COMMAND popup (p. 33)

➜ select “Change

Velocity...” ➜ [F5](Select)

Explanation of each area

Magnify

Reduces or increases velocity differences between notes. Settings of 99 or lower will reduce the dynamic variation of the note data; settings of 101 or higher will make the dynamic variation broader. A setting of 100 will produce no change.

Range: 0%– 100% –200%

Bias

Specifies a constant value that will be added to the current velocity. Use this to change all velocities in the same way.

Range: -99– 0 –+99

Note Range

Specifies the range of note numbers whose velocities will be modified.

Range: C-1 –G9 (lower limit)

C-1– G9 (upper limit)

• Note Range appears only if you are using SEQUENCE

EDIT.

F-button

• [F5](Execute)

Executes the Change Velocity operation.

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-39

MV-8800_r_e.book 40 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

CHANGE DURATION popup

This changes the duration (note length) of note events in the “In time–Out time” region.

■ To access this screen

• Accesses the SELECT SEQUENCE EDIT

COMMAND popup (p. 34)

or

SELECT PIANO ROLL

EDIT COMMAND popup (p. 33)

➜ select “Change

Duration...” ➜ [F5](Select)

Explanation of each area

Magnify

Shortens or lengthens the duration of notes. Settings of

99 or lower will make the actual duration shorter than the rhythm value of the note; settings of 101 or higher will make the duration longer. A setting of 100 will produce no change.

Range: 0%– 100% –200%

Bias

Specifies a constant value that will be added to the current duration. Use this to change all durations in the same way.

Range: -4800– 0 –+4800

Note Range

Specifies the range of note numbers whose duration will be modified.

Range: 0 (C-1) –127 (G 9) (lower limit)

0 (C-1)– 127 (G 9) (upper limit)

• Note Range appears only if you are using SEQUENCE

EDIT.

F-button

• [F5](Execute)

Executes the Change Duration operation.

S-40

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 41 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

SHIFT TIMING popup

This moves the events of the “In time–Out time” region forward or backward in units of one tick (1/480th of a quarter note).

■ To access this screen

• Accesses the SELECT SEQUENCE EDIT

COMMAND popup (p. 34)

or

SELECT PIANO ROLL

EDIT COMMAND popup (p. 33)

➜ select “Shift

Timing...” ➜ [F5](Select)

Explanation of each area

Bias

Adjusts the event timing forward or backward in units of one tick.

Range: -4800– 0 –+4800

Note Range

Specifies the range of note numbers that will be shifted.

Range: 0 (C-1) –127 (G 9) (lower limit)

0 (C-1)– 127 (G 9) (upper limit)

• Note Range appears only if you are using SEQUENCE

EDIT.

F-button

• [F5](Execute)

Executes the Shift Timing operation.

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-41

MV-8800_r_e.book 42 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

DATA THIN popup

This thins-out events of the “In time–Out time” region to reduce the amount of data. You can use this to decrease the amount of space occupied by continuous controller data you recorded, such as pitch bend and aftertouch.

■ To access this screen

• Accesses the SELECT SEQUENCE EDIT

COMMAND popup (p. 34)

➜ select “Data Thin...” ➜

[F5](Select)

Explanation of each area

Value

Set this to a high value if you are thinning continuous data whose value changes significantly. If you don’t want to thin the data very much even though the change is large, set this to a low value.

Range: 0 –99

Time

Set this to a high value if you are thinning continuous data that changes slowly. If you don’t want to thin the data very much even though the change is slow, set this to a low value.

Range: 0 –999

Note Range

Specifies the range of note numbers for polyphonic aftertouch that will be thinned.

Range: 0 (C-1) –127 (G 9) (lower limit)

0 (C-1)– 127 (G 9) (upper limit)

F-button

• [F5](Execute)

Executes the Data Thin operation.

S-42

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 43 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

TRANSPOSE popup

This transposes the pitch of note events in the “In time–Out time” region, in units of a semitone.

■ To access this screen

• Accesses the SELECT SEQUENCE EDIT

COMMAND popup (p. 34)

or

SELECT PIANO ROLL

EDIT COMMAND popup (p. 33)

➜ select

“Transpose...” ➜ [F5](Select)

Explanation of each area

Transpose

Specifies the amount of transposition in semitone steps.

Specify a positive (+) value to raise the pitch, or a negative (-) value to lower the pitch. A setting of 0 produces no change.

Range: -127– 0 –+127

• If executing this Transpose operation would cause the note number to be higher than G9 or lower than C-1.

Note Range

Specifies the range of note numbers that will be transposed.

Range: 0 (C-1) –127 (G 9) (lower limit)

0 (C-1)– 127 (G 9) (upper limit)

• Note Range appears only if you are using SEQUENCE

EDIT.

F-button

• [F5](Execute)

Executes the Transpose operation.

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-43

MV-8800_r_e.book 44 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

COPY AS MIDI CLIP popup

This adds the data in the “In time–Out time” region to the MIDI clip library.

■ To access this screen

• Accesses the SELECT SEQUENCE EDIT

COMMAND popup (p. 34)

➜ select “Copy As MIDI

Clip...” ➜ [F5](Select)

Explanation of each area

List

Shows the clips you are adding to the MIDI clip library.

• If you selected two or more tracks in the SEQUENCE EDIT

(or PATTERN EDIT) screen, the data is displayed as two or more clips.

Clip name

Shows the name of the MIDI clips you are adding.

A provisional category name is automatically assigned in

. The category is copied from the patch name, and the name is copied from the track name. If you’ve selected multiple tracks, a number will be added to the last two digits of the clip name so that the names do not conflict.

F-buttons

• [F1](Name)

Displays the EDIT NAME popup (p. 3), allowing you to

edit the clip name.

• [F5](Execute)

Adds the MIDI clip to the MIDI clip library.

S-44

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 45 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

COPY AS AUDIO PHRASE popup

This copies the Audio Event on the current time to a pad.

■ To access this screen

• [SONG] or [PATTERN] ➜ [F5](Seq Edit) ➜ select an audio track as the current track ➜ move to the time location of the event that you want to use as an audio phrase ➜ [MENU]

Phrase...” ➜ [F5](Select)

➜ select “Copy As Audio

Explanation of each area

Pads

Shows the status of the current pads. Red-colored velocity pads have data recorded in them.

Assign To

Specifies the copy-destination pad.

As Audio Phrase

Shows the name of an audio phrase.

F-buttons

• [F1](Name)

Displays the EDIT NAME popup (p. 3), allowing you to

edit the name of the audio phrase.

• [F5](Execute)

Executes the Copy operation.

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-45

MV-8800_r_e.book 46 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

MIDI CLIP LIBRARY popup

Here you can rename or delete items in the MIDI clip library.

■ To access this screen

• [SONG] or [PATTERN] ➜ [F5](Seq Edit) ➜ [MENU]

➜ select “MIDI Clip Library” ➜ [F5](Select)

Explanation of each area

MIDI clip list

Lists the MIDI clips that are currently saved. The MIDI clip selected by the cursor is highlighted.

F-buttons

• [F1](Name)

Displays the EDIT NAME popup (p. 3), allowing you to

edit the name of the clip.

• [F2](Delete)

Deletes the MIDI clip from the MIDI clip library. Move the cursor to the MIDI clip you want to delete, and press

[F2](Delete).

• [F4](Preview)

Auditions the MIDI clip selected by the cursor, using the settings of the current track.

• [F5](Close)

Closes the MIDI CLIP LIBRARY popup (this popup).

S-46

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 47 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

PASTE MIDI CLIP popup

Here you can paste a MIDI clip from the MIDI clip library into the current MIDI track.

■ To access this screen

• [SONG] or [PATTERN] ➜ select a MIDI track as the current track ➜ [F5](Seq Edit) ➜ [MENU] ➜ select

“Paste MIDI Clip...” ➜ [F5](Select)

Explanation of each area

MIDI clip list

Lists the MIDI clips that are saved in the MIDI clip library.

Clip name

Shows the category and name of the MIDI clips.

F-buttons

• [F1](Category)

Displays the SELECT CATEGORY popup (p. 4).

• [F4](Preview)

Auditions the MIDI clip selected by the cursor, using the settings of the current track.

• [F5](Execute)

Pastes the MIDI clip at the cursor into the current track.

• The clip will be pasted at the current time location of the current track.

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-47

MV-8800_r_e.book 48 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

LOOP popup

Here you can set parameters for loop playback.

■ To access this screen

• [SONG] ➜ [MENU] ➜ select “Loop” ➜ [F5](Select)

Explanation of each area

QUICK Loop Length

Specify the length of the loop that will be set when you press LOOP [QUICK SET].

Range: Marker, 1– 2 –32

• If you choose Marker, the region between markers will be the loop region. However if not even one marker has been set, looping will not turn on.

Loop Top

Specifies the starting time of the loop.

Range: 0001-01-000–(Loop End)

Loop End

Specifies the end time of the loop (i.e., where it will return to the beginning).

Range: (Loop Top)–9999-**-***

• *-*** will change according to the number of beats specified

in “Time Signature” (p. 79).

• Even if you set the Loop Start/End times, the Quick Loop

Length will be used if you turn looping on in QUICK SET.

(The Loop Start/End times will be lost.)

• Changing the Quick Loop Length does not adjust the Loop

End time location.

• You cannot set Loop Start to a location after Loop End.

F-buttons

• [F1](Now

Top)

Assigns the current time as the value of the Loop Top parameter.

• [F2](Now

End)

Assigns the current time as the value of the Loop End parameter.

S-48

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 49 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

AUTO PUNCH popup

Here you can set the auto punch-in/out parameters.

■ To access this screen

• [SHIFT] + [AUTO PUNCH]

• You can also make Auto Punch settings in the

RECORDING PARAMETER (MIDI) popup (p. 16), or in the

RECORDING PARAMETER (AUDIO) popup (p. 19).

Explanation of each area

Switch

Specifies whether auto punch will be used.

Range: Off , On

• You can also change this setting by directly pressing

[AUTO PUNCH].

Punch In

Specifies the starting time of the auto punch recording.

Range: 0001-01-000–(Punch Out)

Punch Out

Specifies the end time of the auto punch recording.

Range: (Punch In)–9999-**-***

• *-*** will change according to the number of beats specified

in “Time Signature” (p. 79).

• You cannot set Auto Punch In to a location after Auto

Punch Out.

F-buttons

• [F1](Now

In)

Assigns the current time as the value of the Punch In parameter.

• [F2](Now

Out)

Assigns the current time as the value of the Punch Out parameter.

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-49

MV-8800_r_e.book 50 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

TRACK LIST (OUTPUT) screen

This lists the parameters of each track. The TRACK LIST (OUTPUT) screen shows the output destination settings for the playback tracks.

■ To access this screen

• [SONG] or [PATTERN] ➜ [MENU] ➜

List” ➜ [F5](Select) select “Track

Explanation of each area

No. (track number and icon)

Shows the number of the tracks recorded in the sequencer. The icon at the right of the track number shows the type of track.

Icon Explanation

Audio track

MIDI track

Pattern track

• The line of the track number selected by the cursor is highlighted. This track is called the “current track.”

Track Name

Shows the name assigned to each track.

Track Status (M/S/R)

Sets the status of the track.

Indication

M= Muted

S= Solo

R=Record

Explanation

This track will not play.

Only this track will play.

Recording will occur on this track.

• If you simultaneously turn on M (Mute) and S (Solo) for the same track, the S (Solo) setting will take priority.

Output

Shows the Output Assign parameter setting of each track.

MIDI Output

Shows the Output Assign MIDI parameter setting of MIDI tracks.

F-buttons

• [F1](Output)

Displays TRACK LIST (OUTPUT) screen (this screen).

• [F2](PlayQtz) Play Quantize

Displays the TRACK LIST (PLAY QUANTIZE) screen (p.

51).

• [F3](Track Param)

Displays the TRACK PARAMETER popup for the track selected by the cursor.

• The TRACK PARAMETER popup that appears will depend on the type of the current track.

Current track Popup

Audio track

MIDI track

Pattern track

TRACK PARAMETER popup (for an

Audio track) (p. 14)

TRACK PARAMETER popup (for a MIDI track) (p. 11)

TRACK PARAMETER popup (for a

Pattern track) (p. 15)

• [F4](Move ▲ ) / [F5](Move ▼ )

These move the current track upward [F4](Move ▲ ) or downward [F5](Move ▼ ) within the displayed list of tracks.

S-50

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 51 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

TRACK LIST (PLAY QUANTIZE) screen

This lists the parameters of each track. The TRACK LIST (PLAY QUANTIZE) screen shows settings related to Play Quantization.

■ To access this screen

• [SONG] or [PATTERN] ➜ [MENU] ➜ select “Track

List” ➜ F5](Select) ➜ [F2](PlayQtz)

Explanation of each area

Type (Quantize type)

Indicates the quantize type.

Type

Off

Grid

Shuffle

Template’s name

Explanation

Quantization will not be used

Grid quantize

Shuffle quantize

Use a quantize template

* The first 14 characters of the quantize template name are shown.

Resolution

Indicates the quantization timing.

Strn (Strength)

Indicates the strength of quantization.

Rate (Shuffle rate)

Indicates the time difference between the backbeats and downbeats of the note value specified by the Resolution parameter.

Velo (Template velocity)

When Type=Template, this specifies the strength of velocity adjustment that will be applied by the template selected by the Quantize Template parameter.

F-buttons

• [F1](Output)

Displays the TRACK LIST (OUTPUT) screen (p. 50).

• [F2](PlayQtz) Play Quantize

Displays the TRACK LIST (PLAY QUANTIZE) screen

(this screen).

• [F3](Track Param)

Displays the TRACK PARAMETER popup for the track selected by the cursor.

• The TRACK PARAMETER popup that appears will depend on the type of the current track.

Current track Popup

Audio track

TRACK PARAMETER popup (for an

Audio track) (p. 14)

MIDI track

Pattern track

TRACK PARAMETER popup (for a MIDI track) (p. 11)

TRACK PARAMETER popup (for a

Pattern track) (p. 15)

• [F4](Move

) / [F5](Move

)

These move the current track upward [F4](Move ▲ )or downward [F5](Move ▼ )within the displayed list of tracks.

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-51

MV-8800_r_e.book 52 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

TEMPO TRACK screen

Here you can edit the tempo data and time signature data in the tempo track.

■ To access this screen

• [SONG] ➜ [MENU] ➜ select “Tempo Track” ➜

[F5](Select)

Explanation of each area

Meas

Shows the locations at which the tempo will change, and the region of measures to which that tempo data will be applied.

Time Signature

Sets the time signature.

Range: 1– 4 –32 / 2, 4 , 8, 16

BPM

Sets the tempo of the sequencer in units of BPM (quarter note beats per minute). In the example shown here, the five measures starting at the beginning (measure 1) will play at a time signature of 4/4 and a tempo of 120.0.

Range: 5.0– 100.0

–300.0

F-buttons

• [F2](Create)

Creates tempo data at the first beat of the measure following the tempo data at the cursor.

• If the message “Tempo/Time signature event full” is displayed, there is insufficient memory in the track that records tempo and time signature data. No further data can be recorded.

• [F3](Delete)

Deletes the tempo data at the cursor.

• [F4](Shift ▲ )

Moves the tempo data at the cursor and the tempo data of subsequent measures together to the preceding measure.

• [F5](Shift

)

Moves the tempo data at the cursor and the tempo data of preceding measures together to the next measure.

S-52

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 53 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

VIEW FILTER popup

Here you can select the MIDI events that you want to view or edit in the SONG, PATTERN, SEQUENCE

EDIT, and EVENT LIST EDIT screens.

■ To access this screen

• [SONG] or [PATTERN] ➜ [MENU] ➜

Filter” ➜ [F5](Select) select “View

• [SONG] or [PATTERN] ➜ select a MIDI track as the current track ➜ [F3](Event List) ➜ [F5](View Filter)

• [SONG] or [PATTERN] ➜ [F5](Seq Edit) ➜ [MENU]

➜ select “View Filter” ➜ [F5](Select)

Explanation of each area

Filter

MIDI data with a ✔ mark will be displayed. Your editing will affect only the displayed events. If you remove the ✔ mark, those events will not be displayed or edited.

Parameter Explanation

Note

Note messages. Data that plays notes.

Poly

Aftertouch

Polyphonic aftertouch. Data that applies aftertouch independently to an individual key.

Control

Change

Control changes. Data that applies various effects (e.g., modulation) according to the control number.

Program

Change

Program changes. Data that selects sounds

(patches).

Channel

Aftertouch

Channel aftertouch. Data that applies aftertouch to an entire channel.

Pitch

Bend

Tune

Request

Mode

Message

System

Exclusive

Pitch bend. Data that changes the pitch.

This MIDI message causes an analog synthesizer to tune itself.

Mode Messages are messages that switch the MIDI channel mode.

System exclusive messages.

Audio

Event

Audio events (performance data of audio phrases, or audio data directly recorded) on audio tracks.

They are displayed on the SONG screen,

PATTERN screen and SEQUENCE EDIT screen.

Ctrl Change (Control change)

Of the control change messages, you can limit the range of control change numbers that will be displayed.

Value

All

Except

Only

Explanation

Accept all control change numbers.

Accept all control changes except for the range specified by Range.

Accept only the control changes in the specified Range.

Ctrl Change Range (Control change range)

This parameter lets you limit the control change values that will be received. This parameter works in conjunction with the Ctrl Change parameter.

Value (lower limit): 0 –119

Value (upper limit): 0– 119

• The Ctrl Change parameter and Ctrl Change Range parameter are valid if there is a

mark for the Filter parameter Ctrl Change.

F-buttons

• [F1](All On)

Turns the ✔ mark on for all parameters.

• [F2](All Off)

Turns the ✔ mark off for all parameters.

• [F3](On/Off)

Turns the ✔ mark on/off for an individual parameter.

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-53

MV-8800_r_e.book 54 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

ADD MIDI TRACKS popup

This lets you add MIDI tracks.

■ To access this screen

• [SONG] or [PATTERN] ➜ [MENU] ➜

MIDI Tracks...” ➜ [F5](Select) select “Add

Explanation of each area

Number of Tracks

Specifies the number of tracks that will be added. This lets you create more than one track at once.

Range: 1 –128

(in Pattern mode, the maximum is 64)

Output Assign

Specifies the part to which MIDI data recorded on the track will be output.

Value

Off

1–16

MFX

Explanation

No output.

Instrument part 1–16

MFX (Analog modeling bass and effect parameter adjustments)

Pix Jam Pix jam (Switch image clips)

Mixer AUX1–4 Mixer channel (AUX1–4)

Mixer DlyCho Mixer channel (delay/chorus)

Mixer Reverb Mixer channel (reverb)

Mixer A.Phrs

Mixer channel (audio phrase)

Mixer input Mixer channel (input)

Mixer AMix Mixer channel (audio track)

MIDI

Specifies the MIDI connector and channel from which data recorded on the MIDI track will be output.

Range: Off , A-1–A-16, B-1–B-16, R-1–R-16

New Track No.

Displays the track number that will be newly added, and the name assigned to the track.

F-buttons

• [F1](Name)

Displays the EDIT NAME popup (p. 3), where you can

edit the name of the current track.

• [F5](Execute)

Adds the MIDI track(s).

• The track(s) will be added below the current track.

S-54

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 55 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

ADD AUDIO TRACKS popup

This lets you add audio tracks.

■ To access this screen

• [SONG] ➜ [MENU] ➜ select “Add Audio Tracks...” ➜

[F5](Select)

Explanation of each area

Number of Tracks

Specifies the number of tracks that will be added. This lets you create more than one track at once.

Range: 1 –8

Output Assign

Specifies the bus (audio signal route) to which audio events recorded on the track will be output.

Value

Mix

AUX1–AUX4

MLT1–MLT8

Explanation

No output.

AUX bus 1–4

Multi output bus 1–8 (mono)

MLT1/2–MLT7/8 Multi output bus 1/2–7/8 (stereo)

Track number and track name

Displays the number and name of the current track.

F-buttons

• [F1](Name)

Displays the EDIT NAME popup (p. 3), where you can

edit the name of the current track.

• [F5](Execute)

Adds the audio track(s).

• The track(s) will be added below the current track.

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-55

MV-8800_r_e.book 56 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

DELETE TRACKS popup

Specify the range of tracks that you want to delete.

■ To access this screen

• [SONG] or [PATTERN] ➜ [MENU] ➜ select “Delete

Tracks...” ➜ [F5](Select)

Explanation of each area

Delete From

To

Specify the range of track(s) (Delete From—To) that you want to delete.

Range: 1–137

(in Pattern mode, the maximum is 65)

F-button

• [F5](Execute)

Deletes the specified track(s).

S-56

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 57 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

MARKER popup

Here you can add or delete markers.

■ To access this screen

• [SONG] ➜ [MENU] ➜ select “Marker” ➜

[F5](Select)

SONG

Explanation of each area

Marker list

Lists the markers in the song. The marker selected by the cursor is highlighted.

Marker number

Markers are numbered consecutively. You can use up to one hundred markers; 01–99.

Time location

Indicates the time location (measure/beat/tick) at which the marker is assigned.

F-buttons

• [F3](Delete)

Deletes the marker at the cursor from the marker list.

• [F5](Jump)

Moves the current time to the location of the marker selected by the cursor in the marker list.

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-57

MV-8800_r_e.book 58 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

STEP TIME popup

Here you can specify the interval by which STEP [ ] [ ] will change the time location.

■ To access this screen

• [SONG] or [PATTERN] ➜ [MENU] ➜ select “Step

Time” ➜ [F5](Select)

Explanation of each area

Step Time

Specifies the unit of time by which STEP [ ]/[ ] will move.

Range: (30), (40), (60), (80), (120),

(160), (240), (320), (480) ,

(640), (960), (1920), (3840)

F-button

• [F5](Close)

Closes the STEP TIME popup (this popup).

S-58

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 59 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

LOCATOR popup

Here you can manage locator points.

■ To access this screen

• [LOCATOR]

SONG

Explanation of each area

Locator list

Lists the locator points assigned in the song. The locator point selected by the cursor is highlighted.

Locator number

Locator points are displayed in numerical order. You can use ten points; 0–9.

Time

Displays the time location (measure/beat/tick) at which the locator point is assigned.

Locator name

Displays the name assigned to each locator point.

F-buttons

• [F1](Set Now)

Stores the current time to the locator number at the cursor. If you store to a locator number that already has been used, the previous time location will be overwritten.

• [F2](Clear)

Deletes the locator at the cursor location from the locator list.

• [F3](Edit)

Displays the EDIT LOCATOR popup. This allows you to edit the time location of an existing locator point.

• [F4](Name)

Displays the EDIT NAME popup (p. 3), allowing you to

edit the locator name.

• [F5](Jump)

Moves the current time to the location of the locator point selected by the cursor in the list.

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-59

MV-8800_r_e.book 60 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

JUMP popup

Here you can make the current time location jump directly to a location you specify.

■ To access this screen

• [SHIFT] + [JUMP]

Explanation of each area

Jump

Input a time location (measure/beat/tick) and jump to that location.

• You can edit the value highlighted by the cursor. In addition to using the VALUE dial, you can use [DEC]/[INC] or the numeric keys for input.

• You can use the [JUMP]+VALUE dial to move in steps of one tick.

F-button

• [F5](Close)

Closes the JUMP popup (this popup).

S-60

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 61 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

EVENT ERASE popup

This lets you erase specific note events while recording.

■ To access this screen

• (Recording) [EVENT ERASE]

SONG

Explanation of each area

Mode

Selects the way in which note events will be deleted.

Value

Direct

Range

Explanation

Only the note events of the pads you hold down will be erased.

Events will be erased for all pads between

(and including) the pads you hold down.

• During recording, you can hold down [EVENT ERASE] to switch to Event Erase mode. While holding down [EVENT

ERASE], press and hold the pad(s) corresponding to the note event(s) you want to delete; note events that occur during this time will be deleted.

F-button

• [F5](Close)

Closes the EVENT ERASE popup (this popup).

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-61

MV-8800_r_e.book 62 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

STEP REC screen

Here you can use the pads to record note data on a MIDI track.

■ To access this screen

• select a MIDI track as the current track ➜

[SHIFT] + [REC ( )]

Explanation of each area

Step Time

Specifies the note value of the notes you will input.

Range: (30), (40), (60), (80), (120),

(160), (240), (320), (480),

(640), (960), (1920), (3840)

• You can change the step time by pressing [ (1)] – [ (9)]

(numeric keys).

Dot (dotted note)

This lets you add a dot to the note value specified by the

Step Time parameter.

Dot

None

1(.)

2(..)

Length relative to the specified Step Time value

1x (Step Time is used without change)

1.5x (1.5 times the Step Time)

1.75x (1.75 times the Step Time)

Duration

Specifies the actual length of the note, as a percentage of the note value you specified for Step Time.

Range: 1%–200%

Velocity

Specifies the strength of the note.

Range: Real, 1–127

Note number (keyboard)

The note numbers (keys) are shown from bottom to top.

Since the actual pitches correspond to the note numbers, the displayed location of the note tells you the pitch.

Piano roll

This shows the note events. The horizontal axis is time, and the vertical axis is note number (pitch). The range of shown note changes by inputting the note number.

S-62

MV-8800 Screen Guide

Velocity

Indicates the velocity of the note event. The velocity is shown as a pair with the note event; a longer bar indicates a stronger velocity.

F-buttons

• [F1](Back Step)

Reverts the preceding input.

• [F3](Tie)

Connects (extends) the event at the current time to the next step.

• [F5](Rest)

Inputs a rest (silence).

• During step recording, you can press [REC ( )] to make the REC indicator (red) blink. In this state, pressing the pads will not record anything. This is a convenient way for you to check the sound produced by each pad.

MV-8800_r_e.book 63 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

AUDIO PHRASE STEP REC screen

Here you can use the pads to record onto an audio track.

■ To access this screen

• select an audio track as the current track ➜

[SHIFT] + [REC ( )]

SONG

Explanation of each area

Step Time

Specifies the note value of the notes you will input.

Range: (30), (40), (60), (80), (120),

(160), (240), (320), (480), (640),

• You can change the step time by pressing [ (1)] – [ (9)]

(numeric keys).

Dot (dotted note)

This lets you add a dot to the note value specified by the

Step Time parameter.

Dot

None

1(.)

2(..)

Length relative to the specified Step Time value

1x (Step Time is used without change)

1.5x (1.5 times the Step Time)

1.75x (1.75 times the Step Time)

Duration

Specifies the actual length of the note, as a percentage of the note value you specified for Step Time.

Range: 1%–100%

Velocity

Specifies the strength of the note.

Range: Real, 1–127

No. (track number and icon)

Shows the number of the tracks recorded in the sequencer. The icon at the right of the track number shows the type of track.

Icon Explanation

MIDI track

Audio track

Pattern track

• The line of the track number selected by the cursor is highlighted. This track is called the “current track.”

Track Name

Shows the name assigned to each track.

Play List

The boxes show the existence of data recorded in each track.

A gray box is shown for data that contains no note events.

F-buttons

• [F1](Back Step)

Reverts the preceding input.

• [F3](Tie)

Connects (extends) the event at the current time to the next step.

• [F5](Rest)

Inputs a rest (silence).

• During step recording, you can press [REC ( )] to make the REC indicator (red) blink. In this state, pressing the pads will not record anything. This is a convenient way for you to check the sound produced by each pad.

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-63

MV-8800_r_e.book 64 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

INSERT MEASURE popup

This lets you insert blank measures.

■ To access this screen

• [SONG] or [PATTERN] ➜

➜ select “Insert Measure...”

[F5](Seq Edit) ➜

➜ [F5](Select)

[MENU]

Explanation of each area

To

Specify the measure number at which you want to insert measures.

Range: current measure number–9999

For

Specify the number of blank measures.

Range: 1 –9999

Time Signature

Specify the time signature of the measures you want to insert.

Range: The same time signature as the preceding measure, 1–32 / 2, 4, 8, 16

Tempo Track / Marker / Locator

Specify whether the Insert Measure operation will affect the tempo track, locators, and markers.

Value

Off

On (

)

Explanation

The time location of tempo change events, markers, and locators will not change when you insert measures.

The time location of tempo change events, markers, and locators located after the point where you inserted the blank measures will change according to the number of measures you inserted.

• The Tempo Track check box can be selected if the tempo track is enabled.

• To turn the tempo track on/off, press [BPM/TAP] to access the BPM/TAP popup window, and use [F5](T.Track On)

[F5](T.Track Off) to switch the setting.

• You can’t set these options in Pattern mode.

F-button

• [F5](Execute)

Insert the blank measures.

S-64

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 65 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

DELETE MEASURE popup

This lets you delete measures.

■ To access this screen

• [SONG] or [PATTERN] ➜

[F5](Seq Edit) ➜ [MENU] select “Delete Measure...” ➜ [F5](Select)

Explanation of each area

From

Specify the number of the first measure you want to delete.

Length

Specify the number of measures that you want to delete, starting with the measure specified by From.

Range: 1 –9999

Tempo Track / Marker / Locator

Specify whether the Insert Measure operation will affect the tempo track, locators, and markers.

Value

Off

On ( ✔ )

Explanation

The time location of tempo change events, markers, and locators will not change when you insert measures.

The time location of tempo change events, markers, and locators located after the point where you inserted the blank measures will change according to the number of measures you inserted.

• The Tempo Track check box can be selected if the tempo track is enabled.

• To turn the tempo track on/off, press [BPM/TAP] to access the BPM/TAP popup window, and use [F5](T.Track On)

[F5](T.Track Off) to switch the setting.

• You can’t set these options in Pattern mode.

F-button

• [F5](Execute)

Delete the specified region of measures.

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-65

MV-8800_r_e.book 66 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

SPLIT NOTES popup

This lets you extract specific note events from the note events recorded in a track, and move them to a different track.

■ To access this screen

• [SONG] or [PATTERN] ➜ the editing region ➜

Notes...” ➜ [F5](Select)

[F5](Seq Edit) ➜

[F5](Command) ➜ specify select “Split

Explanation of each area

Note Range

Specifies the range of note numbers that you want to extract.

Range: 0 (C-)–127 (G 9)

Type

Specifies how you want to handle the track from which the note events are extracted.

Value

Move

Copy

Explanation

The notes will be moved to the other track. Notes within the specified Note Range will be deleted from the source track.

The notes will be copied to the other track. The specified notes will remain in the source track.

Send To

Specifies how the extracted note events will be stored.

Value

Separate

TracksByPitch

One Track

One New Track

Explanation

A track will be created for each identical note.

The extracted note events will be pasted into the track you specify by the Track parameter.

A new track will be created, and the extracted note events will be pasted into it.

Track

Specifies the track number into which the extracted note events will be placed. This is valid if the Send To parameter is set to One Track.

Range: 1– current track –137

(in Pattern mode, the maximum is 65)

F-button

• [F5](Execute)

Extracts the specified note events and pastes them into another track.

S-66

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 67 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

CREATE CONTINUOUS DATA popup

This allows you to enter automation data that changes smoothly in a specified region (Owner’s Manual; p. 219).

■ To access this screen

• Accesses the SELECT SEQUENCE EDIT

COMMAND popup (p. 34)

➜ select “Create

Continuous Data...” ➜ [F5](Select)

Explanation of each area

Event

Specifies the type of data that you want to enter.

Range: Control Change , Channel Aftertouch,

Poly Aftertouch, Pitch Bend

Number

Specifies the control change number that you want to enter. This is valid if the Event parameter is set to

Control Change.

Range: 0:BankSel MSB– 7:Volume –119:

Note

Specifies the note number to enter. This is valid if the

Event parameter is set to Poly Aftertouch.

Range: 0 (C-)– 60 (C 4) –127 (G 9)

Value From

Specifies the initial value at the starting point of the continuous data. The range of this value will depend on your choice of Event parameter.

Value

Control Change

Channel Aftertouch

Poly Aftertouch

Pitch Bend

Explanation

0 –127

-8192– 0 –8191

Value To

Specifies the final value at the ending point of the continuous data. The range of this value will depend on your choice of Event parameter.

Value

Control Change

Channel Aftertouch

Poly Aftertouch

Pitch Bend

Explanation

0 –127

-8192– 0 –8191

Curve

Specifies how the value will change from the starting point to the ending point of the continuous data. The graph at the right of this parameter will change according to this setting.

Range: -3, -2, -1, Linear, +1, +2, +3

Interval Time

Specifies the interval at which the continuous data will be spaced. This is specified in units of ticks.

Range: 1 (--) –30 ( )–999 (--)

F-button

• [F5](Execute)

Creates the continuous data.

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-67

MV-8800_r_e.book 68 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

CHANGE CONTINUOUS DATA popup

This allows you to modify continuous data in the specified region.

■ To access this screen

• Accesses the SELECT SEQUENCE EDIT

COMMAND popup (p. 34)

➜ select “Change

Continuous Data...” ➜ [F5](Select)

Explanation of each area

Event

Specifies the type of data that you want to edit.

Range: Control Change , Channel Aftertouch,

Poly Aftertouch, Pitch Bend

Number

Specifies the control change number that you want to edit. This is valid if the Event parameter is set to Control

Change.

Range: 0:BankSel MSB– 7:Volume –119:

Note Range

Specifies the range of note numbers that you want to edit. This is valid if the Event parameter is set to Poly

Aftertouch.

Range (Lower limit):

Range (Upper limit):

0 (C-) –127 (G 9)

0 (C-)– 127 (G 9)

Magnify

This parameter lets you increase or decrease the upper and lower limits of the selected values. Settings of 101% or higher will increase the amount of change. Settings of

99% or lower will decrease the amount of change. If this parameter is set to 100%, the amount of change will stay the same. For example, you would set this parameter to

50% if you want the difference between the maximum and minimum data values to be half of their current state, or to 200% if you want the difference to be double the current state. Negative values for this parameter will invert the upper and lower limits.

Range: -200%– 100% –200%

Bias

This parameter lets you increase or decrease the value for the data by a fixed Bias amount you specify. The range of this value will depend on your choice of Event parameter.

Explanation Value

Control Change

Channel Aftertouch

Poly Aftertouch

Pitch Bend

-99– 0 –99

-999– 0 –999

F-button

• [F5](Execute)

Applies the change to the specified region of data.

S-68

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 69 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

MERGE TRACKS popup

This merges (combines) the performance data recorded on multiple adjacent MIDI tracks into a single track.

■ To access this screen

• [SONG] or [PATTERN] ➜ [MENU] ➜

Tracks...” ➜ [F5](Select) select “Merge

Explanation of each area

Source From / Source To

Specifies the first (Source From) and last (Source To) track numbers that you want to merge.

Range: 1– current track –137

(in Pattern mode, the maximum is 65)

Merge To

Specifies the destination for the merged data.

Value

New

Explanation

A new track will be created, and the merged data will be placed in it.

1–137 *

The merged data will be placed in the track number you specify.

* In Pattern mode, the maximum is 65.

Keep Source Tracks

Specifies whether the performance data in the tracks specified by Source From/To will be preserved after the merge operation.

Value

Off

On (

)

Explanation

The performance data will be deleted from the

Source From/To tracks.

The performance data in the Source From/To tracks will be preserved.

Fix Quantize

Specifies whether the Play Quantize settings of the merge-source tracks will be reflected when placing the data in the merge-destination track.

Value

Off

On (

)

Explanation

The performance data of Source From/To will be placed in the destination track without change (Play Quantize will not be applied).

The Play Quantize settings will be applied to the performance data when placing it in the

Merge To track.

F-button

• [F5](Execute)

Merges the data into the specified MIDI track.

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-69

MV-8800_r_e.book 70 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

BPM/TAP popup

Here you can specify the tempo of the sequencer.

■ To access this screen

• [BPM/TAP]

Explanation of each area

BPM (Tempo)

Specifies the tempo of the sequencer in units of BPM

(the number of beats per minute of playback).

Range: 5.00–300.00

Tap

Specifies whether to use the Tap function.

Value

Off

On (

)

Explanation

The Tap function will not be used.

When you successively strike [BPM/TAP] at the desired playback tempo, the sequencer will be set to the corresponding tempo.

Tap resolution

Specifies the note value corresponding to the interval at which you strike [BPM/TAP] when using the Tap function. The BPM (tempo) will be calculated according to the intervals at which you strike [BPM/TAP], taken as the note value you specify here.

Range: (120), (240), (480)

Tempo Track On

The Tempo track is enabled if this indication is shown.

You can’t specify the tempo from this popup. In this

case, use the TEMPO TRACK screen (p. 52) to specify

the tempo.

F-button

• [F5](T.Track On) / (T.Track Off)

Turns the Tempo track on/off.

When you press [F5](T.Track On), the Tempo track will be enabled and the sequencer will follow the settings in the Tempo track.

If you press [F5](T.Track Off), the Tempo track will be disabled, and the sequencer will follow the setting you make in the BPM/TAP popup.

• In Pattern mode, this will be [F5] (Close), and the button will close the BPM/TAP popup (this popup).

S-70

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 71 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

MUTE CONTROL TRACK screen

Here you can edit the track mute data recorded in the Mute Control track.

■ To access this screen

• [SONG] or [PATTERN] ➜

Control Track” ➜

[MENU]

[F5](Select)

➜ select “Mute

• [SHIFT] + [PAD BANKS] ➜

Control Track” ➜

[MENU]

[F5](Select)

➜ select “Mute

Explanation of each area

Event Position

Shows the time location of the recorded mute control events.

Track

Shows the track number of the recorded mute control events. Use the cursor to select a mute control event, and press the right cursor button to highlight the track number. Now you can change the track number.

Mute

Shows the status (on/off) of the recorded mute control events. Use the cursor to select a mute control event, and press the right cursor button twice to highlight the mute indication. Now you can change the mute setting.

Event list

Lists the mute control events recorded in the Mute

Control track.

Use the cursor to select a mute control event, and press the right cursor button to move the cursor to each parameter. Press the left cursor button to move the cursor to the time.

F-buttons

• [F1](Create)

Adds a mute control event.

• [F2](Erase)

Erases the event at the cursor position. At this time the erased mute control event will be temporarily held in internal memory.

• [F3](Copy)

Copies the mute control event at the cursor position temporarily into internal memory.

• [F4](Paste)

Displays the PASTE EVENT popup (p. 26).

This allows you to paste the mute control event that was stored in internal memory by the Erase or Copy operation.

• [F5](Track Sel)

Displays the TRACK SELECT popup (p. 72).

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-71

MV-8800_r_e.book 72 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

TRACK SELECT popup

Here you can specify the tracks for which the mute data recorded in the Mute Control track will be shown

in the MUTE CONTROL TRACK screen (p. 71).

■ To access this screen

• [SONG] ➜ [MENU] ➜ select “Mute Control Track” ➜

[F5](Select) ➜ [F5](Track Sel)

• [SHIFT]+[PAD BANKS]

Control Track” ➜

➜ [MENU] ➜ select “Mute

[F5](Select) ➜ [F5](Track Sel)

Explanation of each area

Mode

Specifies whether the MUTE CONTROL TRACK screen

(p. 71) will show mute data for all tracks or for only the

single track you specify.

Value Explanation

All

Mute control messages of all tracks will be shown.

One Track Limit the display to a single track.

Track

Specifies the track that will be shown. This is valid if the

Mode parameter is set to One Track.

S-72

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 73 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

DRUM GRID screen

Here you can enter note events by note number (rows) and time (columns).

■ To access this screen

• [SONG] or [PATTERN] ➜ current track ➜ [MENU] ➜ select a MIDI track as the select “Drum Grid” ➜

[F5](Select)

Explanation of each area

Step Time

Indicates the time value of the notes you will enter.

You can make this setting in the RECORDING

PARAMETER popup (for the drum grid) (p. 74).

Duration

Indicates the actual duration (%) of the entered notes relative to the note value entered in Step Time.

You can make this setting in the RECORDING

PARAMETER popup (for the drum grid) (p. 74).

Pad Velocity

Indicates the strength of the notes entered by the velocity pads. With a setting of 1–127, the notes will be entered with the corresponding fixed velocity value. If you choose the Real setting, the notes will be entered with a velocity value corresponding to the force with which you actually strike the pad.

You can make this setting in the RECORDING

PARAMETER popup (for the drum grid) (p. 74).

Grid Velocity

Modifies the velocity of the note events you enter. If you set this to ---, that note event will not sound. (The note event will be deleted.)

Range: ---, 1–127

1-01–6-16

Indicates the sound assigned to each velocity pad. The numbers shown indicate the pad bank number and the velocity pad number.

Drum grid

Here you can enter note events and their velocities. The indication will change according to the velocity of the note events you enter.

0 1–42 43–84 85–126 127 Velocity

Drum grid display

F-buttons

• [F1](16Notes)

Sets the input mode to 16Notes. Velocity pad numbers will correspond to different note numbers. This allows you to enter sixteen different note numbers at the selected time location.

• [F2](16Grid)

Sets the input mode to 16Grid. Velocity pad numbers will correspond to different step times. This allows you to enter events of a single note number at sixteen different steps.

• [F4](REC Param)

Displays the RECORDING PARAMETER popup (for the drum grid) (p. 74).

• [F5](Solo)

Turns the Solo setting on/off for the current track.

• [MENU]

Displays the MENU popup.

Menu item

1 Track Parameter

Displays the TRACK PARAMETER popup (for a MIDI track) (p. 11).

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-73

MV-8800_r_e.book 74 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

RECORDING PARAMETER popup (for the drum grid)

Here you can set parameters that specify how notes will be recorded in the drum grid.

■ To access this screen

• [SONG] or [PATTERN] ➜ current track ➜ [MENU] ➜ select a MIDI track as the select “Drum Grid” ➜

[F5](Select) ➜ [F4](REC Param)

Explanation of each area

Step Time

Specifies the time value of the notes you will enter.

Range: (30), (40), (60), (80), (120) ,

(160), (240), (320), (480),

(640), (960), (1920), (3840)

Pad Velocity

Specifies the strength of the notes entered by the velocity pads.

With a setting of 1–127, the notes will be entered with the corresponding fixed velocity. If you choose the Real setting, the notes will be entered with a velocity value corresponding to the force with which you actually strike the pad.

Range: Real , 1–127

Duration

Specifies the actual duration (%) of the entered notes relative to the Step Time.

Range: 1%– 80% –200%

F-button

• [F5](Close)

Closes the RECORDING PARAMETER popup (for the drum grid) (this popup).

S-74

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 75 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

TRACK MUTE screen

Here you can use the velocity pads to switch the Mute status of each track.

■ To access this screen

• [SHIFT] + [PAD BANKS]

SONG

Explanation of each area

Track Bank

The up to 137 tracks in a song and the up to 65 tracks in a pattern are divided into groups of sixteen tracks, called

“track banks.” One track bank lets you switch the mute status for a bank of sixteen tracks.

Range: 1–9 (song), 1–5 (pattern)

Track bank list

Shows the status of all tracks.

Normal Track muted

F-buttons

• [F1](Mute)

Displays the TRACK MUTE screen (this screen).

• [F2](Solo)

Displays the TRACK SOLO screen (p. 76).

• [F4](All Mute Off)

Defeats muting for all tracks.

• [F5](All Solo Off)

Defeats solo for all tracks.

• [MENU]

Displays the MENU popup.

Velocity pads

Shows the mute/solo status.

Velocity Pad Explanation

Normal track.

Track mute is on. The velocity pad is shown in dark grey, and the MUTE icon will appear.

Track Solo is on. The velocity pads are shown in white, and the SOLO icon is displayed.

Other tracks have been muted

(silenced) by Solo playback. The velocity pads are shown in dark gray.

Menu items

1 Track Mute Setup

Displays the TRACK MUTE SETUP popup (p. 77).

2 Mute Control Track

Displays the MUTE CONTROL TRACK screen (p. 71).

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-75

MV-8800_r_e.book 76 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

TRACK SOLO screen

Here you can use the velocity pads to switch the Solo status of each track.

■ To access this screen

• [SHIFT] + [PAD BANKS] ➜ [F2](Solo)

Explanation of each area

Track Bank

The up to 137 tracks in a song and the up to 65 tracks in a pattern are divided into groups of sixteen tracks, called

“track banks.” One track bank lets you switch the solo status for a bank of sixteen tracks.

Range: 1–9 (song), 1–5 (pattern)

Track bank list

Shows the status of all tracks.

Tracks muted by Track Solo Track Solo

F-buttons

• [F1](Mute)

Displays the TRACK MUTE screen (p. 75).

• [F2](Solo)

Displays the TRACK SOLO screen (this screen).

• [F3](All Mute Off)

Defeats muting for all tracks.

• [F4](All Solo Off)

Defeats solo for all tracks.

Velocity pads

Shows the mute/solo status.

Velocity Pad Explanation

Normal track.

Track mute is on. The velocity pad is shown in dark grey, and the MUTE icon will appear.

Track Solo is on. The velocity pads are shown in white, and the SOLO icon is displayed.

Other tracks have been muted

(silenced) by Solo playback. The velocity pads are shown in dark gray.

S-76

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 77 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

TRACK MUTE SETUP popup

Here you can make settings for the mute control track.

■ To access this screen

• [SHIFT] + [PAD BANKS] ➜ [F1](Mute) ➜ [MENU]

➜ select “Track Mute Setup” ➜ [F5](Select)

Explanation of each area

Mute Control Track

Specifies whether to enable the dedicated track for controlling mute operations (the Mute Control track).

Range: Off, On

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-77

MV-8800_r_e.book 78 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

SONG MENU screen

In this menu screen you can choose various song-related items.

■ To access this screen

• [SONG] ➜ [F1](Song Menu)

Explanation of each area

SONG PARAMETER

Displays the SONG PARAMETER screen (p. 79).

SYNC

Displays the SYNC screen (p. 81).

CREATE NEW SONG

Displays the CREATE NEW SONG screen (p. 83).

SELECT SONG

Displays the SELECT SONG screen (p. 85).

DELETE SONG

Displays the DELETE SONG screen (p. 86).

COPY AS NEW SONG

Displays the COPY AS NEW SONG popup (p. 87).

SAVE AS SMF

Displays the SAVE SONG AS SMF popup (p. 88).

LOAD SONG

Displays the LOAD SONG screen (p. 89).

F-buttons

• The F-buttons will change depending on the location of the cursor.

■ If the cursor is in the upper line

• [F1](SongParam)

Displays the SONG PARAMETER screen (p. 79).

• [F2](Sync)

Displays the SYNC screen (p. 81).

• [F3](CreateNew)

Displays the CREATE NEW SONG screen (p. 83).

• [F4](SelectSong)

Displays the SELECT SONG screen (p. 85).

• [F5](DeleteSong)

Displays the DELETE SONG screen (p. 86).

■ If the cursor is in the lower line

• [F1](CopyAsNew)

Displays the COPY AS NEW SONG popup (p. 87).

• [F2](SaveAsSMF)

Displays the SAVE SONG AS SMF popup (p. 88)

• [F3](LoadSong)

Displays the LOAD SONG screen (p. 89).

S-78

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 79 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

SONG PARAMETER screen

Here you can make settings for the current song.

■ To access this screen

• [SONG] ➜ [F1](Song Menu) ➜ move the cursor to the upper line of icons ➜ [F1](SongParam)

Explanation of each area

Song No. (Song number)

This is the song number. The MV-8800 can have up to

16 songs in each project, and these songs are numbered

1–16.

Song Name

This is the name of the song.

Comment

This is a comment you can add to the song. You can add a comment of up to fifty characters to each song.

• To input the Song Name, press [F1](Name) to access the

EDIT NAME popup (p. 3). To input the Comment, press

[F2](Comment) to access the EDIT COMMENT popup (p.

80).

BPM (Song tempo)

Specifies the tempo of the song.

Range: 5.00– 100.00

–300.00

Time Signature

Specifies the time signature of the song, in terms of the number of notes in a measure and their note value.

Value

Number

Type

Explanation

1– 4 –32

2 (half notes), 4 (quarter notes), 8 (eighth notes), 16 (sixteenth notes)

Tempo Track

Specifies whether the Tempo track (a track that contains tempo and time signature data) will be used.

Value

Off

On

Explanation

The Tempo & Time Signature track will not be used. The song will play according to the Song parameter settings BPM and Time Signature.

The Tempo & Time Signature track will be used. The BPM and time signature of the song will change according to the data in this track.

* You can’t use [BPM/TAP] to set the tempo.

Mute Control Track

Enables or disables the special track that records mute operations (the Mute Control track).

Range: Off, On

Sequence Memory

Indicates the amount of memory available for recording data.

used free

F-buttons

• [F1](Name)

Displays the EDIT NAME popup (p. 3).

• [F2](Comment)

Displays the EDIT COMMENT popup (p. 80).

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-79

MV-8800_r_e.book 80 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

EDIT COMMENT popup

Here you can add a comment to the current song.

■ To access this screen

• [SONG] ➜ [F1](Song Menu) ➜ move the cursor to the upper line of icons ➜ [F1](SongParam) ➜

[F2](Comment)

Explanation of each area

Comment

Add a comment or note to the song. You can input a comment up to fifty characters long.

For details on inputting characters, refer to “Inputting text”

(Owner’s Manual; p. 33).

• You may omit the comment if you wish.

F-buttons

• [F2](Insert Space)

Inserts a space at the cursor location.

• [F3](Delete)

Deletes the character at the cursor location.

• [F4](A

➜ a/a

A)

Switches the character at the cursor location between uppercase and lowercase.

• [F5](OK)

Finalizes the comment and closes the EDIT COMMENT popup (this popup).

S-80

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 81 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

SYNC screen

Here you can make synchronization settings.

■ To access this screen

• [SONG] ➜ [F1](Song Menu) ➜ move the cursor to the upper line of icons ➜ [F2](Sync)

Explanation of each area

Sync Mode

Specifies how external devices will synchronize with the

MV-8800.

Parameters

MASTER

Slave-MIDI (MIDI)

Explanation

The MV-8800 will operate according to its own internal clock (Master operation).

The MV-8800 will receive MIDI clock data at its MIDI IN connector, and operate as a Slave.

Slave-MIDI (R-BUS) The MV-8800 will receive MIDI clock data at its R-BUS connector, and operate as a Slave.

Slave-MTC (MIDI) The MV-8800 will receive MTC data at its MIDI IN connector, and operate as a Slave.

Slave-MTC (R-BUS) The MV-8800 will receive MTC data at its R-BUS connector, and operate as a

Slave.

Remote (MIDI) The MV-8800 will receive Start, Stop, and Continue messages at its MIDI IN connector, and will be remotely controlled by these messages.

Remote (R-BUS) The MV-8800 will receive Start, Stop, and Continue messages at its R-BUS connector, and will be remotely controlled by these messages.

MIDI Clock Output

Specifies whether MIDI clock data will be transmitted from MIDI OUT A, MIDI OUT B, and R-BUS when Sync

Mode = Master.

Parameters Value

MIDI OUT A Off (not transmitted) / On (transmitted)

MIDI OUT B

R-BUS

Off

Off

(not transmitted) / On (transmitted)

(not transmitted) / On (transmitted)

MMC Mode

Specifies the device that will be remotely controlled via

MMC (MIDI Machine Control).

Value

Master

Slave (MIDI)

Slave (R-BUS)

Explanation

The MV-8800 will transmit MMC to control other connected devices.

The MV-8800 will receive and be controlled by MMC transmitted by another connected device.

MMC Output

Specifies the connector from which MMC will be output

(transmitted) when MMC Mode = Master.

Parameters

MIDI OUT A

MIDI OUT B

R-BUS

Value

Off (not transmitted) / On (transmitted)

Off (not transmitted) / On (transmitted)

Off (not transmitted) / On (transmitted)

MTC Frame Rate

Specifies the format of the MTC transmitted (output) by the MV-8800.

Value

30

29.97ND

29.97D

25

24

Explanation

30 frames per second

29.97 frames per second, non-drop

29.97 frames per second, drop-frame

25 frames per second

24 frames per second

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-81

MV-8800_r_e.book 82 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

Error Level

This specifies the interval at which the MTC reception status is checked. This setting is valid if the Sync Mode is set to Slave-MTC (MIDI) or Slave-MTC (R-BUS).

Range: 0–5–10 (increasing this setting lengthens the time interval between checking)

• Synchronized operation will halt if the reception status check determines that there is a communication problem.

Increasing this setting may allow synchronized operation to continue even if slight problems occur with MTC reception.

Offset Time

Specifies the time difference between the sequencer time and the MTC timing when the MV-8800 is

MTC-synchronized from an external device.

Range: 00h00m00s00f –23h59m59s##f

• The equation is as follows.

Setting = (MTC time) - (song time when MTC was received)

If this calculation would result in a negative value, it will be performed as:

Setting = (MTC time) + 24:00:00:00 - (song time when

MTC was received)

• ** will depend on the setting of the MTC Frame Rate parameter.

MTC Output

Specifies whether MTC will be transmitted from MIDI

OUT A, MIDI OUT B, and R-BUS if the Sync Mode parameter is set to Master.

Parameters

MIDI OUT A

MIDI OUT B

R-BUS

Value

Off (not transmitted) / On (transmitted)

Off (not transmitted) / On (transmitted)

Off (not transmitted) / On (transmitted)

S-82

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 83 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

CREATE NEW SONG screen

Here you can create a new song within the current project.

■ To access this screen

• [SONG] ➜ [F1](Song Menu) ➜ move the cursor to the upper line of icons ➜ [F3](CreateNew)

Explanation of each area

Song No. (Song number)

This is the song number. The MV-8800 can have up to sixteen songs in a project, and these are numbered 1–

16. When you access this screen, the lowest unused song number will be assigned automatically.

Song Name

This is the song name. When you access this screen, an initial name of “Init Song ##” will be assigned as a provisional name. (## will be a number that does not conflict with an existing filename.)

Comment

This is a comment you can add to the song. You can add a comment of up to fifty characters to each song.

• To input the Song Name, press [F1](Name) to access the

EDIT NAME popup (p. 3). To input the Comment, press

[F2](Comment) to access the EDIT COMMENT popup (p.

80).

Sequence Memory

Indicates the amount of data stored in the DIMM, both numerically and as a graph.

used free

BPM (Song tempo)

Specifies the tempo of the song in units of BPM (the number of quarter-note beats in one minute).

Range: 5.00– 100.00

–300.00

Time Signature

Specifies the time signature of the song, in terms of the number of notes in a measure and their note value.

Value

Number

Type

Explanation

1– 4 –32

2 (half notes), 4 (quarter notes), 8 (eighth notes), 16 (sixteenth notes)

Track Layout

Several basic track configurations are provided for your convenience. You can use these to create a new song.

Value

00 Current Song

01 Very Simple

Explanation

Create a song with the same track configuration as the current song.

Create a song with one MIDI track and one audio track.

02 MIDI Sequencer Create a song with sixteen MIDI tracks.

03 Audio Recorder Create a song with eight audio tracks.

04 Basic

05 User Template

Create a song with sixteen MIDI tracks and eight audio tracks.

A song will be created with the structure saved in the user track template.

“Using a user track template to create a song” (Owner’s Manual; p. 147)

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-83

MV-8800_r_e.book 84 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

Copy From Current Song

You can copy parameters or data from the current song to a new song. Add a check mark ✔ to the parameters that you want to copy.

Value

Instruments

Effects

Explanation

Instrument settings and samples

Effect (MFX, Dly/Cho, Rev) settings

• If you create a song without checking Instruments, all of the instrument patches will be “Init Patch,” and there will be no sound unless you change these settings.

• If you create the song without a check mark in Effects, the settings of preset number 1 will be loaded from each effect library.

F-buttons

• [F1](Name)

Displays the EDIT NAME popup (p. 3).

• [F2](Comment)

Displays the EDIT COMMENT popup (p. 80).

• [F5](Execute)

Creates a song according to the parameters you specified. The new song will become the current song,

and the SONG screen (p. 8) will appear.

S-84

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 85 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

SELECT SONG screen

Here you can change the current song by recalling the desired song.

■ To access this screen

• [SONG] ➜ [F1](Song Menu) ➜ move the cursor to the upper line of icons ➜ [F4](SelectSong)

Explanation of each area

Song No. (Song number)

Shows the number of the song. The MV-8800 can have up to sixteen songs in a project, and these are numbered

1–16.

Song Name

Shows the song name.

Comment

Shows the memo assigned to the song.

Sequence Memory

Indicates the amount of data stored in the DIMM, both numerically and as a graph.

used free

Song list

Lists the songs saved in the current project. The song selected by the cursor is highlighted.

• The current song has an asterisk “*” by its song name.

F-button

• [F5](Execute)

Selects the song at which the cursor is located in the

song list, and the SONG screen (p. 8) will appear.

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-85

MV-8800_r_e.book 86 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

DELETE SONG screen

Here you can delete an unwanted song.

■ To access this screen

• [SONG] ➜ [F1](Song Menu) ➜ move the cursor to the upper line of icons ➜ [F5](DeleteSong)

Explanation of each area

Song No. (Song number)

Shows the number of the song. The MV-8800 can have up to sixteen songs in a project, and these are numbered

1–16.

Song Name

Shows the song name.

Comment

Shows the memo assigned to the song.

BPM

Shows the tempo of the song selected by the cursor.

Sequence Memory

Indicates the amount of data stored in the DIMM, both numerically and as a graph.

used free

Song list

Lists the songs in the current project. The song selected by the cursor is highlighted.

• The current song has an asterisk “*” by its name.

F-button

• [F5](Execute)

Deletes the song selected by the cursor in the song list.

• You cannot delete the current song (the song that has an asterisk “*” by its name).

If the display asks “Delete song #### Are you sure?”

When you attempt to delete a song, a confirmation message of “Delete song #### Are you sure?” will appear (#### is the song name selected by the cursor).

F-button

[F1](No)

[F5](Yes)

Explanation

To cancel without deleting.

To delete the song.

• There is no way for you to recover deleted data (unless you have previously made a backup of it). Roland accepts no responsibility for the recovery of lost data, nor for any damages that may result from such loss.

S-86

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 87 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

COPY AS NEW SONG popup

Here you can copy the current song, and switch the current song to be the resulting copy.

■ To access this screen

• [SONG] ➜ [F1](Song Menu) ➜ move the cursor to the lower line of icons ➜ [F1](CopyAsNew)

Explanation of each area

Name

Assign a name to the song. You can assign a name of up to twelve characters.

For details on how to enter characters, refer to Owner’s

Manual “Inputting text” (p. 33).

Sequence Memory

Indicates the amount of data stored in the DIMM, both numerically and as a graph.

used free

F-buttons

• [F1](History)

You can recall (and re-input) up to the ten most recent names you input in the EDIT NAME popup since turning on the power. Selects the name at the cursor in the history list then press [ENTER].

• [F2](Insert Space)

Inserts a space at the cursor location.

• [F3](Delete)

Deletes the character at the cursor location.

• [F4](A

➔ a/a

A)

Switches the character at the cursor location between uppercase/lowercase and numeral/symbol.

• [F5](Execute)

Copies the current song, and makes the resulting copy

the current song. The SONG screen (p. 8) will appear.

If the message “Sequence memory full.” appears

The song cannot be created because there is insufficient sequence memory for the newly created song.

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-87

MV-8800_r_e.book 88 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

SAVE SONG AS SMF popup

Here you can save the current song as a SMF (Standard MIDI File) Format 1 data.

■ To access this screen

• [SONG] ➜ [F1](Song Menu) ➜ move the cursor to the lower line of icons ➜ [F2](SaveAsAMF)

Explanation of each area

Song number, Song name

Displays the number and name of the song which can be saved.

Fix Quantize

Indicates whether the Play Quantize settings of the MIDI track will be reflected in the data that is saved.

If you want to save the song in a condition that reflects the Play Quantize settings, press [F2](Fix Qtz) to turn it

On.

Current folder name

Displays the destination folder you want to save.

Folder levels below the root folder (the top level folder in the hard disk) are shown by a slash “/” symbol.

File list

Displays the name of the files and folders saved in the current folder.

Drive capacity

Displays the free space of the hard disk.

F-buttons

• [F2](Fix Qtz)

Switches the setting that specifies whether the Play

Quantize settings of the MIDI track will be reflected in the data that is saved.

• [F4](Make Folder)

Displays the EDIT NAME popup (p. 3), where you can

create a new folder inside the current folder.

• [F5](Save)

Saves the current song as a SMF format 1 data.

Displays the EDIT NAME popup (p. 3), where you can

specify the file name of the saved SMF data.

S-88

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 89 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

LOAD SONG screen

Here you can load a song saved in another project into the current project.

■ To access this screen

• [SONG] ➜ [F1](Song Menu) ➜ move the cursor to the lower line of icons ➜ [F3](LoadSong)

Explanation of each area

Name

Shows the project name.

Wave Size

Shows the size of the wave data used by the selected project.

Sequence Memory

Shows the remaining amount of sequence memory available for recording in the current project.

used free

Wave Memory

Shows the remaining amount of wave memory available for recording in the current project.

Select Project

Selects the project that contains the song you want to load.

F-button

• [F5](SongList)

Displays the SONG LIST popup (p. 90).

A list of the songs in the selected project will appear.

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-89

MV-8800_r_e.book 90 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SONG

SONG LIST popup

This lists the songs in some other project.

■ To access this screen

• [SONG] ➜ [F1](Song Menu) ➜ move the cursor to the lower line of icons ➜ [F3](LoadSong) ➜ select a project ➜ [F5](SongList)

Explanation of each area

SONG LIST

This is a list of the songs in the selected project. Select the song that you want to load.

F-button

• [F5](Execute)

Loads the song and wave data into the current project.

S-90

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 91 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

PATTERN

These screens let you perform pattern-related operations.

PATTERN screen

Here you can record or play patterns.

■ To access this screen

• [PATTERN]

Explanation of each area

Now time

This indicates the current location (measure/beat/tick, time code) of the sequencer.

Time Signature

Displays the time sign of the current pattern.

Step Time

This is the unit by which the current time will move when you press STEP [ ]/[ ].

Metronome

Displays the metronome setting.

Icon Explanation

The metronome will not sound.

The metronome will sound only during recording.

The metronome will sound during playback and recording.

The metronome will always sound.

Pattern length

Records or plays the current pattern.

Region of Punch In/Out

Specifies the starting time and end time of the auto punch in recording. The following characters show the

Punch In/Out status.

Display Explanation

Punch In/Out function is Off.

Punch In/Out function is On.

Region of Loop play

Specifies the starting time and end time of the loop. The following characters show the Loop status.

Display Explanation

Loop function is Off.

Loop function is On.

No. (track number and icon)

Shows the number of the each track recorded in the pattern. The icon at the right of the track number shows the type of track.

Icon Explanation

MIDI track

Audio track

• The line of the track number selected by the cursor is highlighted. This track is called the “current track.”

Track Name

Shows the name assigned to each track.

Track Status (M/S/R)

Sets the status of the track.

Display Explanation

M (=Mute) This track will not play.

S (=Solo) Only this track will play.

R (=Rec) Recording will occur on this track.

• If you simultaneously turn on M (Mute) and S (Solo) for the same track, the S (Solo) setting will take priority.

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-91

MV-8800_r_e.book 92 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

PATTERN

Play List

The boxes indicate the presence or absence of performance data recorded in each track.

A gray box is shown for data that contains no note events.

Sequence Memory meter/

Wave Memory meter

Displays the remaining number of events available for recording in the sequencer, or the remaining time available for recording audio tracks.

View filter indicator

Indicates the View Filter status you specified.

Icon Explanation

View Filter is off (Events displayed)

View Filter is on (Events not displayed)

For details on View filter icons refer to VIEW FILTER popup (p. 53)

F-buttons

• [F1](Pattern List)

Displays the PATTERN LIST screen (p. 96).

• [F2](Track Param)

Displays the TRACK PARAMETER popup.

• The TRACK PARAMETER popup that appears will depend on the type of the current track.

Current track

Audio track

MIDI track

Popup

TRACK PRAMETER popup (for

Audio track) (p. 14)

TRACK PRAMETER popup (for MIDI

track) (p. 11)

• [F3](Event List)

If the current track is a MIDI track, displays the EVENT

LIST screen (p. 23).

• [F4](PianoRoll)

If the current track is a MIDI track, displays the PIANO

ROLL EDIT screen (p. 30).

• [F5](Seq Edit)

Displays the SEQUENCE EDIT screen (p. 31).

• [MENU]

Displays the MENU popup.

S-92

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 93 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

Menu items

1 Pattern Parameter...

Displays the PATTERN PARAMETER popup (p. 99).

2 Mute Control Track

Displays the MUTE CONTROL TRACK screen (p. 71).

3 Add MIDI Tracks...

Displays the ADD MIDI TRACKS popup (p. 54).

4 Add Audio Track

Adds an Audio track.

5 Delete Tracks...

Displays the DELETE TRACKS popup (p. 56).

6 Merge Tracks...

Displays the MERGE TRACKS popup (p. 69).

7 Track List

Displays the TRACK LIST (OUTPUT) screen (p. 50).

8 Track Name...

Displays the EDIT NAME popup (p. 3).

9 Erase All Events

Deletes the all events of current track. The message

“Erase all events in track” will appear.

F-button

[F1](No)

[F5](Yes)

Explanation

To cancel the operation.

To delete the events of current track.

• You can undo only once after executing Erase All Events.

10 View Filter

Displays the VIEW FILTER popup (p. 53).

11 Step Time

Displays the STEP TIME popup (p. 58).

12 Recording Parameter

Displays the RECORDING PARAMETER (MIDI) popup

(p. 16) or the RECORDING PARAMETER (AUDIO)

popup (p. 19).

• The RECORDING PARAMETER popup that appears will depend on the type of the current track.

13 Metronome

Displays the METRONOME popup (p. 22).

PATTERN

14 Pattern Sync

Displays the PATTERN SYNC screen (p. 94).

15 Drum Grid

Displays the DRUM GRID screen (p. 73).

S-93

MV-8800_r_e.book 94 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

PATTERN

PATTERN SYNC screen

Here you can make synchronization setting of patterns.

■ To access this screen

• [PATTERN] ➜ [MENU] ➜ select “Pattern Sync” ➜

[F5](Select)

Explanation of each area

Sync Mode

Specifies how synchronization will occur when an external device and the MV-8800 are operated in synchronization.

Value

Master

Slave-MIDI

(MIDI)

Slave-MIDI

(R-BUS)

Slave-MTC

(MIDI)

Slave-MTC

(R-BUS)

Remote

(MIDI)

Remote

(R-BUS)

Explanation

MV-8800 will use own internal clock and operate as a Master.

MV-8800 will receive MIDI clock data from MIDI

IN connector, and operate as a Slave.

MV-8800 will receive MIDI clock data from

R-BUS connector, and operate as a Slave.

MV-8800 will receive MTC (MIDI time code) data from MIDI IN connector, and operate as a Slave

MV-8800 will receive MTC data from R-BUS connector, and operate as a Slave.

MV-8800 will receive Start, Stop and Continue message from MIDI IN connector, and will be recotely controlled.

MV-8800 will receive Start, Stop and Continue message from R-BUS connector, and will be recotely controlled.

MIDI Clock Output

Specifies whether MIDI clock will be transmitted from

MIDI OUT A, MIDI OUT B, and R-BUS if the Sync Mode parameter is set to Master.

Parameters Value

OUT A

OUT B

R-BUS

Off (not transmitted) /

On (Transmitted) from MIDI OUT A

Off (not transmitted) /

On (Transmitted) from MIDI OUT B

Off (not transmitted) /

On (Transmitted) from R-BUS

MMC Mode

Specifies how operation will occur when MMC (MIDI

Machine Control) is used for remote control.

Value

Master

Slave

(MIDI)

Slave

(R-BUS)

Explanation

The MV-8800 will transmit MMC to control other connected devices

The MV-8800 will receive MMC from MIDI IN connector and be controlled by another connected device.

The MV-8800 will receive MMC from R-BUS connector and be controlled by another connected device.

MMC Output

Specifies whether MMC will be transmitted from MIDI

OUT A, MIDI OUT B, and R-BUS if the Sync Mode parameter is set to Master.

Parameters Value

OUT A

OUT B

R-BUS

Off (not transmitted) /

On (Transmitted) from MIDI OUT A

Off (not transmitted) /

On (Transmitted) from MIDI OUT B

Off (not transmitted) /

On (Transmitted) from R-BUS

MTC Frame Rate

Specifies the MTC frame rate. Make sure the same frame rate is set in both master and slave devices.

Value Explanation

30 30 frames per second

29.97ND

29.97 frames per second (non-drop)

29.97D

25

24

29.97 frames per second (drop)

25 frames per second

24 frames per second

S-94

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 95 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

MTC Error Level

This specifies the interval at which the MTC reception status is checked. This setting is valid if the Sync Mode is set to Slave-MTC (MIDI) or Slave-MTC (R-BUS).

Range: 0–5–10 (increasing this setting lengthens the time interval between checking)

• Synchronized operation will halt if the reception status check determines that there is a communication problem.

Increasing this setting may allow synchronized operation to continue even if slight problems occur with MTC reception.

MTC Offset Time

Specifies the time difference between the sequencer time and the MTC timing when the MV-8800 is

MTC-synchronized from an external device.

Range: 00h00m00s00f –23h59m59s##f

• The equation is as follows.

Setting = (MTC time) - (song time when MTC was received)

If this calculation would result in a negative value, it will be performed as:

Setting = (MTC time) + 24:00:00:00 - (song time when

MTC was received)

• ** will depend on the setting of the MTC Frame Rate parameter.

MTC Output

Specifies whether MTC will be transmitted from MIDI

OUT A, MIDI OUT B, and R-BUS if the Sync Mode parameter is set to Master.

Parameters Value

OUT A

Off (not transmitted) /

On (Transmitted) from MIDI OUT A

OUT B

R-BUS

Off (not transmitted) /

On (Transmitted) from MIDI OUT B

Off (not transmitted) /

On (Transmitted) from R-BUS

PATTERN

S-95

MV-8800_r_e.book 96 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

PATTERN

PATTERN LIST screen

Here you can assign or recall patterns.

■ To access this screen

• [PATTERN] ➜ [F1](Pattern List)

Explanation of each area

No. (Pattern number)

Indicates the assignment number of the pattern. You can register patterns 001–500.

Name

Indicates the name of the pattern.

Length

Indicates the length (number of measures) in each assigned pattern.

BPM

Indicates the tempo of each assigned pattern.

T.Sign (Time Signature)

Indicates the time signature of each assigned pattern.

Pad

These are the velocity pad numbers that play the patterns in the PATTERN PLAY screen. Patterns that are not assigned to a velocity pad are displayed as *-**

(***).

F-buttons

• [F1](Pattern Play)

Displays the PATTERN PLAY screen (p. 98).

• [F2](Pattern Prm)

Displays the PATTERN PARAMETER popup (p. 99).

• [F3](AssignToPad)

Displays the ASSIGN TO PAD popup (p. 100).

• [F4](Preview)

Auditions the pattern selected by the cursor while you hold down the button.

S-96

MV-8800 Screen Guide

• [F5] (Select)

Selects the pattern highlighted by the cursor, and

displays it in the PATTERN screen (p. 91).

• [MENU]

Displays the MENU popup.

Menu items

1 Pattern Name...

Displays the EDIT NAME popup (p. 3).

2 Copy Pattern...

Displays the COPY PATTERN popup (p. 97).

3 Initialize Pattern

Removes the pattern selected by the cursor from the pattern list. The message “Initialize sure?” will appear.

F-button Explanation

[F1](No) Cancels the operation.

[F5](Yes) Removes the pattern.

4 Automatic Assign To Pad...

Displays the AUTOMATIC ASSIGN TO PAD popup

(p. 108).

5 Save As SMF...

Displays the SAVE PATTERN AS SMF popup (p. 109).

MV-8800_r_e.book 97 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

PATTERN

COPY PATTERN popup

Here you can copy an assigned pattern to another assignment number.

■ To access this screen

• [PATTERN] ➜ [F1](Pattern List) select “Copy Pattern...”

➜ [MENU] ➜

➜ [F5](Select)

Explanation of each area

From

Indicates the assignment number of the pattern you want to copy.

To

Specifies the number of the copy-destination pattern.

F-button

• [F5](Yes)

Copies the pattern to the number specified by the To setting.

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-97

MV-8800_r_e.book 98 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

PATTERN

PATTERN PLAY screen

Here you can play the assigned patterns.

■ To access this screen

• [PATTERN] ➜ [F1](Pattern List) ➜

[F1](Pattern Play)

Explanation of each area

Cur: (Current Pattern)

Indicates the pattern number that is currently playing.

Next: (Next Pattern)

Specifies the pattern that will be played next after the currently playing pattern has finished playing.

Range: 001–500

BPM

Specifies the playback tempo of the pattern in units of

BPM (Beats Per Minute of playback).

Range: 5.00–300.00

Tap

Specifies whether the Tap function will be used.

Value

Off

On (

)

Explanation

The Tap function will not be used.

When you repeatedly strike [BPM/TAP] at the desired playback tempo, the pattern playback tempo will be set to the corresponding speed.

Tap Resolution

Specifies the note value corresponding to the interval at which you strike [BPM/TAP] when using the Tap function. The BPM (tempo) will be calculated according to the intervals at which you strike [BPM/TAP], taken as the note value you specify here.

Range: (120), (240), (480)

Use Pattern Tempo

Specifies whether the BPM parameter (pattern tempo) of

the PATTERN PARAMETER popup (p. 99) will be used.

The pattern tempo will be enabled if this setting is on, and the pattern playback will follow the tempo specified for each pattern.

The pattern tempo will be disabled if this is off, and the pattern playback will follow the setting of the BPM parameter.

Velocity Pads

This area shows the patterns that you can currently play by striking the velocity pads. Use the velocity pads to specify the pattern you want to play. When you strike a velocity pad to which a pattern is assigned, that pattern will be specified as the setting of the Next: parameter.

F-buttons

• [F1](Wait)

Patterns will be played in Wait mode. When the pattern indicated by Cur: has finished playing, playback will switch to the Next: pattern.

• [F2](Immediate)

Patterns will be played in Immediate mode. When you change the setting of the Next: parameter, the pattern will change immediately.

• [F5](Ptn ↔ APhrs)

Selects whether the velocity pads will play patterns or audio phrases.

PadBank indicates what the velocity pads will play.

S-98

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 99 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

PATTERN PARAMETER popup

Here you can specify the length, tempo, time signature, and other settings for the pattern.

■ To access this screen

• [PATTERN] ➜ [F1](Pattern List) ➜

[F2](Pattern Prm)

PATTERN

Explanation of each area

Pattern

Indicates the name of the selected pattern.

Length

Allows you to specify the length of the pattern.

Range: 001–999 (Meas)

BPM

Specifies the playback tempo of the pattern.

Range: 5.00–300.00

Time Signature

Allows you to specify the time signature.

Range: 1–32 / 2, 4, 8, 16

Mute Control Track

Specifies whether to enable the dedicated track that automatically performs mute operations (the Mute

Control track).

Range: Off, On

Pad

Indicates the velocity pad to which the selected pattern is assigned.

F-buttons

• [F1](Name)

Displays the EDIT NAME popup (p. 3). Allows you to

assign a name to the pattern.

• [F5](Close)

Closes the PATTERN PARAMETER popup (this popup).

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-99

MV-8800_r_e.book 100 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

PATTERN

ASSIGN TO PAD popup

Here you can assign patterns to velocity pads or cancel the assignments.

■ To access this screen

• [PATTERN] ➜ [F1](Pattern List) ➜

[F3](AssignToPad)

Explanation of each area

Pattern

Indicates the name of the selected pattern.

Velocity Pads

This area indicates how patterns are assigned to the velocity pads.

Status Explanation

A pattern is assigned to the velocity pad.

No pattern is assigned.

Pad

Specifies the number of the velocity pad to which you want to assign the pattern. If you specify *-**(***), the assignment will be cancelled.

Range: *-** (***), 1-01 (C)–6-16 (G 9)

F-button

• [F5](OK)

Assigns the pattern to the velocity pad number specified by the Pad setting.

S-100

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 101 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

PATTERN

PATTERN RECORDING PARAMETER (MIDI) popup

Here you can make settings that specify how performance data is recorded into a pattern.

■ To access this screen

• [PATTERN] ➜ select a MIDI track ➜ [REC ( )]

• [PATTERN] ➜ select a MIDI track ➜ [MENU] select “Recording Parameter” ➜ [F5](Select)

Explanation of each area

Rec Mode (Recording mode)

Specifies how recording will occur

Value

Overdub1

Overdub2

Replace

Explanation

Newly recorded data will be added to the previously-recorded data.

By using this in conjunction with loop recording, you can repeatedly overdub a specified region.

For example, you can use this method to record the individual instruments of a drum performance one by one, like this: bass drum

123 snare drum

hi-hat.

If you enter an identical note event at the same timing as a previously entered note event, the velocity of the existing event will be replaced by the new velocity.

Newly recorded data will replace the previously-recorded data. Use this when you want to re-record.

Count In

Specifies how recording will start.

Value

Off

1 Meas

2 Meas

Wait Note

Explanation

Recording will begin the instant you press

[PLAY ( )]. (There will be no count.)

Recording will begin after a one-measure count.

Recording will begin after a two-measure count.

Recording will begin the moment one of the following occurs.

A note message is received (you play a keyboard or other device connected to the

MIDI IN connector)

You strike a velocity pad

You press [PLAY ( )]

Pattern Length

Specifies the length of the pattern to be recorded.

Range: 1–999

Loop Rest

Specifies what will happen immediately after looping.

Value

Off

On

Explanation

Looping will continue without stopping recording.

Immediately after the loop, there will be a waiting time of one measure. When the waiting time of one measure has elapsed, recording will continue. This is valid if the Rec Mode parameter is set to

OverDub1 or OverDub2.

Auto Punch In / Auto Punch Out

You can specify two time locations at which recording will automatically start and stop (“auto punch”).

Parameter

Auto Punch In

Auto Punch Out

Value

0000-01-000–9999-**-***

0000-01-000–9999-**-***

• *-*** will change according to the number of beats specified

in “Time Signature” (p. 79).

• You cannot set Auto Punch In to a location after Auto

Punch Out.

Metronome Mode

Specifies when the metronome signal will be output.

Value

Off

Rec Only

Play&Rec

Always

Explanation

The metronome will not sound.

The metronome will sound only during recording.

The metronome will sound during playback and recording.

The metronome will always sound.

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-101

MV-8800_r_e.book 102 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

PATTERN

Input Quantize Type

You can apply quantization while you record, so that the corrected data is recorded on the sequencer track.

Value

Off

Grid

Shuffle

Explanation

Input quantization will not be used.

The data will be adjusted to the timing intervals specified by the Grid Quantize Resolution parameter.

Shuffle quantization will be used. The data will be adjusted forward or backward relative to the timing intervals specified by Shuffle Quantize Resolution, by the amount specified by Shuffle Quantize Rate.

This can give the beat a bouncy feel, such as

“shuffle” or “swing.”

Strength (Quantize strength)

Specifies the strength of synchronization applied to the notes specified by Grid Quantize Resolution or Shuffle

Quantize Resolution. Higher values will adjust the notes further toward the locations specified by the Grid

Quantize Resolution or Shuffle Quantize Resolution parameter.

Range: 0%– 100%

• A setting of 100 produces the strongest effect; a setting of

0 produces no adjustment at all.

Grid Resolution/Shuffle Resolution

Specifies the quantization timing. Select the shortest note value that occurs in the region you are quantizing.

Input Quantize

Type parameter

Value

Grid

Shuffle

(60), (80), (120) , (160), (240),

(320), (480)

(120) , (240)

Rate

When Type=Shuffle, this specifies how far away the

“backbeat” notes (relative to the Shuffle Quantize

Resolution setting) will be from the downbeats. You can create a sense of swing by shifting the timing of the backbeats. With a setting of 50%, the backbeats will be exactly between the preceding and following downbeats.

With a setting of 0%, the backbeats will be moved to the same timing as the preceding downbeat. With a setting of 100%, the backbeats will be moved to the same timing as the following downbeat.

Range: 0%– 66% –100%

F-buttons

• [F1](Rec Filter)

Displays the RECORDING FILTER popup (p. 18).

• [F3](Metronome)

Displays the EVENT LIST screen (p. 23).

• [F5](Close)

Closes the PATTERN RECORDNG PARAMETER

(MIDI) popup (this popup).

• The Shuffle Quantize Resolution parameter and Shuffle

Quantize Timing parameter settings are valid when Type is set to Shuffle.

S-102

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 103 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

PATTERN

PATTERN RECORDING PARAMETER (AUDIO) popup

Here you can make settings that specify how audio data is recorded into a pattern.

■ To access this screen

• [PATTERN] ➜ select a Audio track ➜ [REC ( )]

• [PATTERN] ➜ select a Audio track ➜ [MENU] select “Recording Parameter” ➜ [F5](Select)

Explanation of each area

Rec Mode

Specifies how recording will occur.

Value

Direct Rec

Resample

Mix

Event

Explanation

Record audio directly from the Input to the track

(2-channels).

Record the audio of the master out.

Record the playback timing of audio phrases triggered from the velocity pads.

Since only timing data will be recorded, this is a way to conserve the data size when recording the identical audio phrase on the track.

Level meter

Indicates the input level.

Sample Type

Specifies the number of input channels. This setting is valid if Rec Mode is set to anything other than Event.

Value

Stereo

Mono

Explanation

The audio will be recorded in stereo (2 channels).

The audio will be recorded in monaural (1 channel).

Count In

Specifies how recording will start.

Value

Off

1 Meas

2 Meas

Wait Note

Explanation

Recording will begin the instant you press

[PLAY ( )].(There will be no count.)

Recording will begin after a one-measure count.

Recording will begin after a two-measure count.

Recording will begin the moment one of the following occurs.

• A note message is received (you play a keyboard or other device connected to the

MIDI IN connector)

You strike a velocity pad

You press [PLAY ( )]

Pattern Length

Specifies the length of the pattern to be recorded.

Range: 1–999

Loop Rest

Specifies what will happen immediately after looping.

Value

Off

On

Explanation

Looping will continue without stopping recording.

Immediately after the loop, there will be a waiting time of one measure. When the waiting time of one measure has elapsed, recording will continue. This is valid if the

Rec Mode parameter is set to OverDub1 or OverDub2.

Auto Punch In/Auto Punch Out

You can specify two time locations at which recording will automatically start and stop (“auto punch”).

Parameter

Auto Punch In

Value

0000-01-000–9999-**-***

Auto Punch Out 0000-01-000–9999-**-***

*-*** will change according to the number of beats specified

in “Time Signature” (p. 79).

You cannot set Auto Punch In to a location after Auto

Punch Out.

Metronome Mode

Specifies when the metronome signal will be output.

Value

Off

Rec Only

Play&Rec

Always

Explanation

The metronome will not sound.

The metronome will sound only during recording.

The metronome will sound during playback and recording.

The metronome will always sound.

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-103

MV-8800_r_e.book 104 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

PATTERN

Input Quantize Type

You can apply quantization while you record into the sequencer when Rec Mode is “Event.”

Range: Off , (60), (80), (120), (160), (240),

(320), (480)

F-buttons

• [F1](Reset Peak)

Clears the indicators of the peak hold in the Level meters.

• [F3](Metronome)

Displays the METRONOME popup (p. 22).

• [F5](Close)

Closes the PATTERN RECORDNG PARAMETER

(AUDIO) popup (this popup).

S-104

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 105 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

PATTERN

COPY AS NEW PATTERN popup

Here you can copy a portion of the performance data from a song/pattern into the pattern list as a new pattern.

■ To access this screen

• Accesses the SELECT SEQUENCE EDIT

COMMAND popup (p. 34)

➜ select Copy As New

Pattern...” ➜ [F5](Select)

Explanation of each area

Name

Shows the pattern name selected by the cursor. If you’ve selected an empty pattern (Empty) for new assignment, a provisional pattern name of “PATTERN (pattern number)” will be automatically assigned.

No. (Pattern number)

Shows the pattern assignment number. You can assign patterns 001–500.

Pattern name

Shows the name of the pattern.

Length

Shows the length (number of measures) in each assigned pattern.

T.Sign (Time sign)

Shows the time signature of each assigned pattern.

F-buttons

• [F1](Name)

Displays the EDIT NAME popup (p. 3), allowing you to

name the pattern.

• [F4](Preview)

Auditions the pattern selected by the cursor while you hold down the button.

• [F5](Select)

Assigns the pattern to the pattern number selected by the cursor.

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-105

MV-8800_r_e.book 106 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

PATTERN

PASTE PATTERN popup

Here you can paste an assigned pattern into the current song or pattern.

■ To access this screen

• [SONG] or [PATTERN] ➜ [F5](Seq Edit) ➜

[MENU] ➜ select “Paste Pattern...” ➜ [F5](Select)

Explanation of each area

Position

Shows the time location (measure - beat - tick) at which the selected pattern will be pasted.

No. (Pattern number)

Shows the pattern assignment number. You can assign patterns 001–500.

Name

Shows the name of the pattern.

Length

Shows the length (number of measures) in each assigned pattern.

T.Sign (Time sign)

Shows the time signature of each assigned pattern.

F-buttons

• [F4](Preview)

Auditions the pattern selected by the cursor while you hold down the button.

• [F5](Select)

Displays the TRACK REMAP popup (p. 107).

S-106

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 107 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

PATTERN

TRACK REMAP popup

Here you can specify the tracks of the current song or pattern into which the pattern selected in the

PASTE PATTERN popup (p. 106) will be pasted.

■ To access this screen

• [SONG] or [PATTERN] ➜ [F5](Seq Edit) ➜

[MENU] ➜ select “Paste Pattern...” ➜ [F5](Select) ➜ select a pattern ➜ [F5](Select)

Explanation of each area

Tracks in the paste-source pattern

This area shows the track structure of the pattern you’ll be pasting. In the example shown in this illustration, the pattern consists of three tracks, all of them MIDI tracks.

Tracks in the paste destination

Here you can select the paste-destination tracks in the current song or pattern. If you select the same tracks, the performance data will be mixed when it is pasted.

F-button

• [F5](Execute)

Pastes the pattern selected in the PASTE PATTERN popup (p. 106) into the tracks you specify.

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-107

MV-8800_r_e.book 108 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

PATTERN

AUTOMATIC ASSIGN TO PAD popup

Here you can assign multiple patterns to the velocity pads in a single operation.

■ To access this screen

• [PATTERN] ➜ [F1](Pattern List) ➜ select “Automatic Assign to Pad...”

[MENU] ➜

➜ [F5](Select)

Explanation of each area

Velocity pads

This area shows how patterns are assigned to the velocity pads.

Status Explanation

A pattern is assigned to the velocity pad.

No pattern is assigned.

Pattern

Specifies the range of patterns you want to assign.

Pad

Specifies the number of the first velocity pad to which you want to assign patterns. Patterns will be assigned successively, starting with the velocity pad number you specify as the Pad setting.

Range: *-** (***), 1-01 (C -)–6-16 (G 9)

F-button

• [F5](OK)

Assigns the patterns to the pads, starting with the velocity pad number you specify as the Pad setting.

S-108

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 109 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

PATTERN

SAVE PATTERN AS SMF popup

Here you can save the pattern as a SMF (Standard MIDI File) Format 1 data.

■ To access this screen

• [PATTERN] ➜ [F1](Pattern List) select “Save As SMF...”

➜ [MENU] ➜

➜ [F5](Select)

Explanation of each area

Pattern number, Pattern name

Displays the number and name of the pattern which can be saved.

Fix Quantize

Indicates whether the Play Quantize settings of the MIDI track will be reflected in the data that is saved.

If you want to save the song in a condition that reflects the Play Quantize settings, press [F2](Fix Qtz) to turn it

On.

Current folder name

Displays the destination folder you want to save.

Folder levels below the root folder (the top level folder in the hard disk) are shown by a slash “/” symbol.

File list

Displays the name of the files and folders saved in the current folder.

Drive capacity

Displays the free space of the hard disk.

F-buttons

• [F2](Fix Qtz)

Switches the setting that specifies whether the Play

Quantize settings of the MIDI track will be reflected in the data that is saved.

• [F4](Make Folder)

Displays the EDIT NAME popup (p. 3), where you can

create a new folder inside the current folder.

• [F5](Save)

Saves the pattern as a SMF format 1 data.

Displays the EDIT NAME popup (p. 3), where you can

specify the file name of the saved SMF data.

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-109

MV-8800_r_e.book 110 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

PATTERN

PATTERN STEP REC screen

Here you can construct a song by arranging patterns in a pattern track.

■ To access this screen

• [SONG] ➜ with a pattern track as the current track ➜

[SHIFT] + [REC ( )]

Explanation of each area

Step Time

Specifies the note value of the notes you will input. If you choose the Pattern setting, the step time will equal the length of the entire pattern.

Range: (30), (40), (60), (80), (120),

(160), (240), (320), (480),

• You can change the step time by pressing [ (1)] – [ (9)]

(numeric keys).

Dot (dotted note)

This lets you add a dot to the note value specified by the

Step Time parameter.

Dot

None

1(.)

2(..)

Length relative to the specified Step Time value

1x (Step Time is used without change)

1.5x (1.5 times the Step Time)

1.75x (1.75 times the Step Time)

No. (track number and icon)

Shows the number of the tracks recorded in the song.

The icon at the right of the track number shows the type of track.

Icon Explanation

MIDI track

Audio track

Pattern track

• The line of the track number selected by the cursor is highlighted. This track is called the “current track.”

Track name

Shows the name assigned to each track.

Play List

The boxes show the existence of data recorded in each track.

A gray box is shown for data that contains no note events.

F-buttons

• [F1](Back Step)

Reverts the preceding input.

• [F3](Tie)

Connects (extends) the event at the current time to the next step.

• [F4](Put Pattern)

Displays the PUT PATTERN popup (p. 111).

• [F5](Rest)

Inputs a rest (silence).

• During step recording, you can press [REC ( )] to make the REC indicator (red) blink. In this state, pressing the pads will not record anything. This is a convenient way for you to check the sound produced by each pad.

S-110

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 111 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

PATTERN

PUT PATTERN popup

Here you can select the patterns to be placed in the pattern track.

■ To access this screen

• [SONG] ➜ with a pattern track as the current track

[SHIFT] + [REC ( )] ➜ [F4](Put Pattern)

Explanation of each area

Pattern

Select the pattern that you want to place in the pattern track.

Range: 001–500

Times

Specify the number of times the pattern will be successively placed.

Range: 1–999

F-buttons

• [F4](Preview)

Auditions the pattern selected by the Pattern parameter while you hold down the button.

• [F5](Execute)

Places the pattern selected by the Pattern parameter into the pattern track.

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-111

MV-8800_r_e.book 112 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

PATTERN

PATTERN EVENT PARAMETR popup

Here you can make detailed settings for the pattern event that exists at the current time location.

■ To access this screen

• [SONG] ➜ F5](Seq Edit) ➜ the current track ➜ [MENU] with a pattern track as

➜ select “Pattern Event

Parameter” ➜ [F5](Select)

Explanation of each area

Track number and track name

Shows the number and name of the pattern track.

Pattern

Selects a pattern. By changing this pattern you can replace the pattern at the current time with a different pattern.

Range: 001–500

Start

Specifies the point from which the selected pattern will play. By changing this time setting you can make the pattern play from a point in the middle of the pattern. If you want the pattern to play from the beginning, set this to 0001-01-000 (default value).

Range: 0001-01-000–(end time of the pattern)

Position

Shows the time location at which the selected pattern is placed. To change this time, use the MOVE PATTERN

EVENT popup (p. 113).

Duration

Shows the length that the selected pattern will actually play. To change this length, use the the MOVE

PATTERN EVENT popup (p. 113).

F-buttons

• [F1](Move)

Displays the MOVE PATTERN EVENT popup (p. 113).

• [F5](Close)

Closes the PATTERN EVENT PARAMETR popup (this popup).

S-112

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 113 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

PATTERN

MOVE PATTERN EVENT popup / MOVE AUDIO EVENT popup

Here you can change the position or length of the pattern event that exists at the current time location.

■ To access this screen

• [SONG] ➜ F5](Seq Edit) ➜ the current track

Parameter” ➜

➜ [MENU]

[F5](Select) with a pattern track as

➜ select “Pattern Event

[F1](Move)

• [SONG] or [PATTERN] ➜ [F5](Seq Edit) ➜ an audio track as the current track ➜ select

[MENU] ➜ select “Audio Event Parameter” ➜ [F5](Select) ➜

[F1](Move)

• This screen is for the MOVE PATTERN EVENT popup. A similar popup will also appear for MOVE AUDIO EVENT.

Explanation of each area

To

Moves the pattern existing at the current time location to a different time.

Range: 0001-01-000– (current time) –9999-**-***

Duration

Specifies the length that the selected pattern will actually play. By changing this length, you can make the pattern stop playing midway. If you want the pattern to play all the way to its end, set this to a value greater than the length of the selected pattern. This value is in units of

“beats - ticks.”

Range: 0-001–9999-***

F-button

• [F5](Execute)

Moves the pattern existing at the current time location.

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-113

MV-8800_r_e.book 114 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

INSTRUMENTS

Here you can make instrument-related settings.

INSTRUMENTS screen

Here you can make part settings (patch selection, mixer adjustments) for the instruments.

■ To access this screen

• [INSTRUMENTS]

Explanation of each area

Part number

This is the number of the location to which the patch is assigned. This is the number you will specify as the

Output Assign setting of the MIDI track.

Patch

This area lists the patch names.

Current part

The part selected by the cursor is called the “current part.” Its part number is highlighted.

M (Mute)

Specifies the mute status of each part.

Range: Off (can be played), On (will not play)

Levl (Level)

Adjusts the output volume of each part.

Range: 0– 100 –127

Pan

Sets the panning of each part.

Range: L63– 0 –R63

Cho (Delay/chorus send level)

Sends the audio of the part to the delay/chorus effect.

Range: 0 –127

Rev (Reverb send level)

Sends the audio of the part to the reverb effect.

Range: 0 –127

Output (Output Assign)

Specifies the output destination of the part audio.

Value

Partial

Explanation

The Output Assign parameter setting of the partials in the patch will be used.

Mix bus Mix

AUX1–AUX4

MLT1–MLT8

AUX bus

Multi output (mono)

MLT1/2–MLT7/8 Multi output (stereo)

VoRsv (Voice reserve)

Specifies the number of voices that will be reserved for each part if you attempt to play more than 32 voices of polyphony simultaneously.

Range: 0 –32

• The total value of this setting for all parts is limited to 32.

You can’t make settings that would exceed this total.

• The number of voices that can be played will depend not only on the number of notes being played, but also on the number of partials used by each patch and the number of samples that make up each partial. If you are playing one patch, the number of voices used can be calculated as follows.

(number of voices) = (number of partials that are sounding) x (total number of channels for sample SMT 1–4 that make up the partials)

• The MV-8800 has a maximum polyphony of 64 voices. Of these, 32 voices are allocated to all of the audio tracks, meaning that the voice reserve settings available for the parts will be 32. (This does not mean that the parts have a maximum total polyphony of 32 voices.) Since the Voice

Reserve parameter specifies “the number of voices guaranteed to be available under any condition,” you will be able to play a total of 64 notes using the parts if no audio tracks are playing.

S-114

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 115 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

F-buttons and menu

• [F1](Instruments)

Displays the INSTRUMENTS screen (this screen).

• [F2](MIDI Filter)

Displays the MIDI FILTER screen (p. 116).

• [F4](Library)

Displays the PATCH LIBRARY popup (p. 117).

• [F5](Patch Edit)

Displays the PATCH EDIT screen (p. 118).

• [MENU]

Displays the MENU popup.

Menu items

1 Patch Name

Displays the EDIT NAME popup (p. 3), where you can

edit the name of the current patch.

2 Save Patch

Displays the SAVE PATCH popup (p. 149).

3 Load Patch

Displays the LOAD PATCH screen (p. 150).

4 Copy Part

Displays the COPY PART popup (p. 151).

5 Initialize Part

A message of “Initialize Part ##. Are you sure?” (“##” shows the number of current part) will appear. This will delete the setting of the current part, restoring the default settings.

F-button

[F1](No)

[F5](Yes)

Explanation

To cancel without initializing.

To initialize the current part.

6 Delete Patch

Delete the patch assigned to the current part.

A confirmation message “Delete Patch on Part ##. Are you sure?” (“##” show the number of current part) will appear.

F-button

[F1](No)

Explanation

To cancel without deleting.

[F3](Assign Only) To delete the patch. The samples will remain.

[F5](Yes) To delete the patch and the samples used by that patch.

INSTRUMENTS

S-115

MV-8800_r_e.book 116 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

INSTRUMENTS

MIDI FILTER screen

Of the MIDI messages received by the part, you can specify the messages for which reception will be enabled.

■ To access this screen

• [INSTRUMENTS] ➜ [F2](MIDI Filter)

Explanation of each area

Part number

This is the number of the location to which the patch is assigned. This is the number you will specify as the

Output Assign setting of the MIDI track.

MIDI messages

Here you can specify the MIDI messages for which reception will be enabled. Reception is enabled for messages with a ✔ mark.

Mod

Off

On (

)

Vol

Off

On (

)

Pan

Off

On (

)

Exp

Off

On (

)

Hold

Off

On (

)

PC

Off

On (

)

Bank

Off

On (

)

Bend

Off

On (

)

Aft

Off

Program Change message reception

Not received.

Received.

Bank Select message reception

Not received.

Received.

Pitch Bender message reception

Not received.

Received.

Aftertouch message reception

Not received.

C (channel) Channel aftertouch will be received.

P (poly) Polyphonic aftertouch will be received.

Modulation message reception

Not received.

Received.

Volume message reception

Not received.

Received.

Pan message reception

Not received.

Received.

Expression message reception

Not received.

Received.

Hold 1 message reception

Not received.

Received.

S-116

MV-8800 Screen Guide

PhsL

Off

On (

)

Velocity

Curve

Off

1

Phase lock switch

Sounds will be played in the order in which note messages are received.

If simultaneous messages are received, their sound will be time-aligned.

* If the PhsL (Phase Lock) is on, the part will sound simultaneously after all the notes are ready to sound. This means that in some cases, some time may elapse from when a note message is received until it sounds.

Velocity curve setting. Selects the velocity curve by which velocity values from your MIDI keyboard etc. will be adjusted.

If you simply want to use the unmodified velocity response of your keyboard, turn this Off.

3

Keyboard playing strength

2

Keyboard playing strength

4

Keyboard playing strength

Keyboard playing strength

F-buttons

• [F1](Instruments)

Displays the INSTRUMENTS screen (p. 114).

• [F2](MIDI Filter)

Displays the MIDI FILTER screen (this screen).

• [F4](Library)

Displays the PATCH LIBRARY popup (p. 117).

• [F5](Patch Edit)

Displays the PATCH EDIT screen (p. 118).

• [MENU]

Displays the INSTRUMENTS MENU. Displayed menu

items are same as p. 115.

MV-8800_r_e.book 117 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

INSTRUMENTS

PATCH LIBRARY popup

Here you can select a patch from the patch library, and make it the current patch.

■ To access this screen

• [INSTRUMENTS] ➜ [F4](Library)

Explanation of each area

No. (Patch library number)

The patches in the library are numbered from U001–

U128.

Name

Displays the patch names and categories. The patch currently selected by the cursor is highlighted.

Category

This area shows the category you selected in the

SELECT CATEGORY popup (p. 4). Only the selected

category is shown in the list.

Preview

If this is on, the patch selected by the cursor will temporarily be assigned to the pads, allowing you to audition it.

F-buttons

• [F1](Write Here)

Displays the WRITE PATCH LIBRARY popup.

F-button

[F1](No)

[F5](Yes)

Explanation

To cancel without saving.

The patch of the current part will be saved to the cursor location within the list

• [F3](Category)

Displays the SELECT CATEGORY popup (p. 4).

Here you can limit the category of the patch that will appear in the patch library list.

• [F4](Preview)

Switches the value of patch preview on/off.

• [F5](Use This)

Assigns the patch selected by the cursor to the current part.

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-117

MV-8800_r_e.book 118 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

INSTRUMENTS

PATCH EDIT screen

Here you can edit the patch of the current part.

■ To access this screen

• [INSTRUMENTS] ➜ [F5](Patch Edit)

Explanation of each area

Current part, current patch name

Displays the currently selected part number and patch name.

Coarse (Coarse tune)

Adjusts the pitch of each part in steps of one semitone.

Range: -48– 0 –+48 (+/-4 octaves)

Fine (Fine tune)

Adjusts the pitch of each part in steps of one cent.

Range: -50– 0 –+50

• One cent = 1/100th of a semitone

Analog Feel (Analog feel depth)

Specifies the depth of 1/f modulation that is to be applied to the patch. (1/f modulation is a pleasant and naturally-occurring ratio of modulation that occurs in a babbling brook or rustling wind.) By adding this “1/f modulation,” you can simulate the natural instability characteristic of an analog synthesizer.

Range: 0 –127

Bend Range Down (Picth bend range down)

Specifies the amount by which the pitch of the patch will change (in semitones) when you operate the pitch bender downward.

Range: -48 (-4 octaves)– -2 –0

Bend Range Up (Pitch bend range up)

Specifies the amount by which the pitch of the patch will change (in semitones) when you operate the pitch bender upward.

Range: 0– +2 –+48 (+4 octaves)

Filter Cutoff Offset

Applies a relative adjustment to the cutoff frequency of the patch.

Range: -63– 0 –+63

Filter Resonance Offset

Applies a relative adjustment to the resonance

(emphasis in the region of the cutoff frequency) of the patch.

Range: -63– 0 –+63

• Raising this value excessively may cause oscillation and distortion.

Amplifier Attack Offset

Applies a relative adjustment to the amplifier attack time without changing the settings of the partials.

Range: -63– 0 –+63

Amplifier Release Offset

Applies a relative adjustment to the amplifier release time without changing the settings of the partials.

Range: -63– 0 –+63

Velocity Sens Offset (Velocity sensitivity offset)

Applies an adjustment to the velocity sensitivity of the entire patch while maintaining the velocity sensitivity of each partial as specified by the following parameters.

• Filter Velo Curve Sens (Filter Velocity Curve

Sensitivity) (p. 143)

• Level Velo Curve Sens (Level Velocity Curve

Sensitivity) (p. 145)

Range:-63– 0 –+63

• This setting is added to the velocity sensitivity values of each partial. This means that (for example) if the velocity sensitivity of a partial is already set to +63

(maximum), setting this parameter to a positive “+” value will cause no change in the sound.

S-118

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 119 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

Voice Priority

Specifies how notes will be prioritized when the maximum polyphony (64 voices) is exceeded.

Value

Last

Loud

(Loudest)

Explanation

The last-played voices will be given priority; voices will be successively turned off starting with the first-played of the currently sounding voices.

The highest-volume voices will be given priority; voices will be successively turned off starting with the lowest-volume of the currently sounding voices.

INSTRUMENTS

F-buttons and menu

• [F1](Control)

Displays the PATCH EDIT (CONTROL) screen (p. 120).

• [F2](Solo/Porta)

Displays the PATCH EDIT (SOLO/PORTAMENTO) screen (p. 122).

• [F3](Split)

Displays the PATCH EDIT (SPLIT) screen (p. 124).

• [F4](Library)

Displays the PATCH LIBRARY popup (p. 117).

• [F5](Partial Edit)

Displays the PARTIAL EDIT screen (p. 125).

• [MENU]

Displays the MENU popup.

Menu items

1 Patch Name

Displays the EDIT NAME popup (p. 3), where you can

edit the name of the current patch.

2 Save Patch

Displays the SAVE PATCH popup (p. 149).

3 Load Patch

Displays the LOAD PATCH screen (p. 150).

S-119

MV-8800_r_e.book 120 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

INSTRUMENTS

PATCH EDIT (CONTROL) screen

MIDI messages received by the part can be used to control various parameters of the partial, according to the settings you make here.

■ To access this screen

• [INSTRUMENTS] ➜ [F5](Patch Edit) ➜

[F1]( C ontrol)

Explanation of each area

Current part, current patch name

Displays the number and patch name of the currently selected part.

Control Change Number

Specifies the control change number that is used when you set SMT Control Select to Control Change. The specified control change can be used to control the pitch, filter, and amplifier sections of the sound source.

Range: 0 –119

SMT Control Select

Specifies the type of MIDI message that will be used to control SMT.

Value

Off

Bend

Aftertouch

Modulation

Control Change

Explanation

No control.

Control by pitch bend

Control by aftertouch

Control by modulation

Control by control change (the control change number is specified by the

Control Change No parameter)

• You can control SMT either by velocity or by the above

MIDI message. You cannot simultaneously use both velocity and the above MIDI messages. If you want to use velocity to control this, turn the SMT Velocity Control

parameter On in the PARTIAL EDIT (SMT) screen (p. 141).

Sens (SMT control sensitivity)

Sets the amount of the Matrix Control’s effect that is applied. If you wish to modify the selected parameter in a positive (+) direction – i.e., a higher value, toward the right, or faster etc. – from its current setting, select a positive (+) value. If you wish to modify the selected parameter in a negative (-) direction – i.e., a lower value, toward the left, or slower etc. – from its current setting, select a negative (-) value. When both positive and negative are selected, the changes are greater as the value increases. Set it to “0” if you don’t want this effect.

Value: -63– 0 –+63

Bend (Pitch bend)

Specifies the parameter that will be controlled when

Bend messages are received.

Aftertouch

Specifies the parameter that will be controlled when

Aftertouch messages are received.

Modulation

Specifies the parameter that will be controlled when

Modulation messages are received.

Control Change

Specifies the parameter that will be controlled when control change messages (the control change number is specified by Control Change Number) are received.

S-120

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 121 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

■ Patch parameters controlled when control data is received

Value

Pitch

Cutoff

Level

LFO Rate

LFO Depth

Pitch

LFO Depth

Filter

LFO Depth

Amplifier

Explanation

Specifies the amount of pitch change in semitone steps.

Range: -48– 0 –+48

MIDI message: Aftertouch,

Control Change

Control the filter cutoff frequency.

Range: -63– 0 –+63

MIDI message: Bend,

Aftertouch,

Control Change

Control the amplifier level.

Range: -63– 0 –+63

MIDI message: Bend,

Aftertouch,

Control Change

Control the LFO rate.

Range: -63– 0 –+63

MIDI message: Aftertouch,

Modulation,

Control Change

Control the pitch change (vibrato) produced by the LFO.

Range: -63–+63

Initial value: Aftertouch= +35

Modulation= +30

ControlChange= 0

MIDI message: Aftertouch,

Modulation,

Control Change

Control the change in filter cutoff frequency

(“growl”) produced by the LFO.

Range: -63– 0 –+63

MIDI message: Aftertouch,

Modulation,

Control Change

Control the change in amplifier level (tremolo) produced by the LFO.

Range: -63– 0 –+63

MIDI message: Aftertouch,

Modulation,

Control Change

INSTRUMENTS

F-buttons

• [F2](Solo/Porta)

Displays the PATCH EDIT (SOLO/PORTAMENTO) screen (p. 122).

• [F3](Split)

Displays the PATCH EDIT (SPLIT) screen (p. 124).

• [F4](Library)

Displays the PATCH LIBRARY popup (p. 117).

• [F5](Partial Edit)

Displays the PARTIAL EDIT screen (p. 125).

S-121

MV-8800_r_e.book 122 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

INSTRUMENTS

PATCH EDIT (SOLO/PORTAMENTO) screen

Here you can set polyphonic/monophonic, portamento of patch.

■ To access this screen

• [INSTRUMENTS] ➜ [F5](Patch Edit) ➜

[F2](Solo/Porta)

Explanation of each area

Current part, current patch name

Displays the currently selected part number and patch name.

Mono Mode

Specifies whether the patch will play polyphonically (Off) or monophonically (On). The “On” setting is effective when playing a solo instrument patch such as sax or flute.

Range

Off

On

Explanation

Two or more notes can be played simultaneously.

Only the last-played note will sound.

Legato Switch

With the Legato parameter “On,” pressing a key while continuing to press a previous key causes the note to change pitch to the pitch of the most recently pressed key, sounding all the while. This creates a smooth transition between notes, which is effective when you wish to simulate the hammering-on and pulling-off techniques used by a guitarist.

Values: Off , On

• Legato Switch is valid when the Mono Mode parameter is set to “On.”

Retrigger (Legato Retrigger)

The setting determines whether sounds are replayed

(On) or not (Off) when performing legato. Normally you will leave this parameter “On.” When “Off,” when one key is held down and another key is then pressed, only the pitch changes, without the attack of the latter key being played.

Values: Off , On

• The Legato Retrigger is valid when the Mono Mode parameter is set to “On” and the Legato Switch parameter is set to “On.”

• Let’s say you have the Legato Switch set to “On,” and the

Legato Retrigger set to “Off.” When you try to sound a legato (by pressing a higher key while a lower key is held down), the pitch may sometimes not be able to rise all the way to the intended pitch (stopping instead at an intermediate pitch). This can occur because the limit of pitch rise, as determined at the wave level, has been exceeded. Additionally, if differing upper pitch limits are used for the waves of a Patch that uses multiple tones, it may stop being heard in MONO. When making large pitch changes, set the Legato Retrigger to “On.”

• Set this to “Off” when performing wind and string phrases or when using modulation with the mono synth keyboard sound.

Portamento Switch

Specifies whether the portamento effect will be applied

(On) or not (Off).

Range: Off , On

• Portamento is an effect which smoothly changes the pitch from the first-played key to the next-played key.

• By applying portamento when the Mono Mode parameter is

“On,” you can simulate slide performance techniques on a violin or similar instrument.

S-122

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 123 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

Portamento Mode

Specifies the performance conditions for which portamento will be applied.

Value

Normal

Legato

Explanation

Portamento will always be applied.

Portamento will be applied only when you play legato (i.e., when you press the next key before releasing the previous key).

Portamento Type

Specifies the type of portamento effect.

Value

Rate

Time

Explanation

The time it takes will depend on the distance between the two pitches.

The time it takes will be constant, regardless of how far apart in pitch the notes are.

Portamento Start Pitch

When another key is pressed during a pitch change produced by portamento, a new pitch change will begin.

This setting specifies the pitch at which the change will begin.

Value

Pitch

Explanation

Starts a new portamento when another key is pressed while the pitch is changing.

Pitch

C5

Note

D4

C4

Time press D4 key press C5 key press C4 key

Portamento will begin anew from the pitch where the current change would end.

Pitch

C5

D4

C4

Time press C4 key press D4 key press C5 key

Portamento Time

When portamento is used, this specifies the time over which the pitch will change. Higher settings will cause the pitch change to the next note to take more time.

Range: 0– 20 –127

INSTRUMENTS

F-buttons

• [F1](Control)

Displays the PATCH EDIT (CONTROL) screen (p. 120).

• [F3](Split)

Displays the PATCH EDIT (SPLIT) screen (p. 124).

• [F4](Library)

Displays the PATCH LIBRARY popup (p. 117).

• [F5](Partial Edit)

Displays the PARTIAL EDIT screen (p. 125).

S-123

MV-8800_r_e.book 124 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

INSTRUMENTS

PATCH EDIT (SPLIT) screen

Here you can assign partials to specific key ranges (note numbers).

■ To access this screen

• [INSTRUMENTS] ➜ [F5](Patch Edit) ➜

[F3](Split)

Explanation of each area

Current part, current patch name

Displays the number and patch name of the currently selected part.

Pad

Specifies the velocity pad (note number) for the partial that you want to assign to a different note number. The specified partial will sound across the range from the

Lower Point parameter to the Upper Point parameter. If a sample is assigned to the selected velocity pad number, the sample name is displayed.

Current Lower Point/Upper Point

Displays the lowest note number and highest note number of the specified pad.

New Lower Point

Specifies the lowest note number that will use the sound specified by the Pad parameter.

New Upper Point

Specifies the highest note number that will use the sound specified by the Pad parameter.

• You cannot set the Lower Point above the Higher Point, nor the opposite.

Keyboard

The region between New Lower Point and New Upper point is shown in color (gray). Each of these keys (pads) point to the same partial. A dot or line is displayed above keys (pads) that are assigned to a partial.

F-buttons

• [F3](Set Chroma)

Assigns partials at semitone steps in the region specified by the New Lower Point parameter and New Upper Point parameter.

• [F5](Set)

Assigns a partial for the region specified by the New

Lower Point parameter and New Upper Point parameter.

S-124

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 125 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

INSTRUMENTS

PARTIAL EDIT screen

Here you can edit the partials.

■ To access this screen

• [INSTRUMENTS] ➜ [F5](Patch Edit) ➜

[F5](Partial Edit)

Explanation of each area

Note number, partial name

Display the note number and partial name that you want to edit.

• If the same partial is assigned to a range of note numbers, any edits you make on that partial will affect all of the note

numbers to which the partial is assigned. The PATCH EDIT

(SPLIT) screen (p. 124) shows how the partials are

assigned to notes.

Level (Partial level)

Sets the partial volume.

Range: 0– 127

Pan (Partial pan)

Sets the panning of the partial.

Range: L63– C –R63.

Output Assign (Partial output assign)

Specifies the output destination of the partial audio. This setting is valid if the Output Assign parameter is set to

Partial in the INSTRUMENTS screen (p. 114).

Value

Mix

AUX1–AUX4

MLT1–MLT8

Explanation

Mix bus

AUX bus

Multi output (mono)

MLT1/2–MLT7/8 Multi output (stereo)

DlyCho Send (Delay/Chorus send level)

Sends the partial audio to the delay/chorus effect.

Range: 0 –127

Rev Send (Reverb send level)

Sends the partial audio to the reverb effect.

Range: 0 –127

Assign Type

Specifies how notes will be processed when the identical note number is played twice (i.e., overlapping).

Value

Sngl

(=Single)

Mult

(=Multi)

Explanation

The first-played note will be turned off before the next-played note is sounded.

Multiple instances of the same note number will be allowed.

One Shot

When the One Shot parameter is On, the sound will play back until the end of the waveform (or the end of the envelope, whichever comes first).

SMT (Sample Mix Table)

This shows the structure of the samples that make up the partial selected in . In the example shown here, the partial consists of SMT1 and 2.

Excl Group (Exclusive Group)

Specifies how notes will be processed when a partial assigned to the same exclusive group number are played simultaneously.

When partials assigned to an exclusive group are played simultaneously (overlapping), the first-played note will be turned off before the next-played note is sounded.

Range: Off , 1–31

Coarse (Partial coarse tune)

Adjusts the pitch of the partial in steps of a semitone.

Range: -48– 0 +48 (+/-4 octaves)

Fine (Partial fine tune)

Adjusts the pitch of the partial in steps of one cent.

Range: -50– 0 –+50

• One cent = 1/100th of a semitone

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-125

MV-8800_r_e.book 126 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

INSTRUMENTS

Filter Type

Selects the type of filter.

Value

Off

LPF

BPF

HPF

Explanation

No filter will be used.

Low Pass Filter. This cuts the region above the cutoff frequency (Cutoff), making the sound more mellow.

Band Pass Filter. This passes only the region near the cutoff frequency (Cutoff), cutting the remainder of the sound. This type is useful for creating distinctive sounds.

High Pass Filter. This cuts the region below the cutoff frequency (Cutoff). This type is useful when creating percussion sounds that have distinctive high-frequency components.

Filter Cutoff

Specifies the cutoff frequency of the current partial.

Range: 0– 127

Filter Reso (Filter resonance)

Emphasizes the sound of the current partial in the region of the cutoff frequency.

Range: 0 –127

• Raising this value excessively may cause oscillation and distortion.

Filter A (Filter attack time)

Specifies the time from the beginning of the note until the specified cutoff frequency is reached. This corresponds to T1 in the diagram below.

Range: 0 –127

Filter R (Filter release time)

Specifies the time from when the note ends (key-off) until the filter returns to the basic cutoff frequency (the Filter

Cutoff parameter). This corresponds to T4 in the filter envelope diagram.

Range: 0 –127

Cutoff freqency

T1 T2 T3 T4

L0

L1

Key-on

L2

T: Time, L: Level

Filter envelope

L3

Key-off

L4

Time

Amplifier A (Amplifier attack time)

Specifies the time from when the note begins (key-on) until the volume reaches the L1 level. This corresponds to T1 in the amplifier envelope diagram.

Range: 0 –127

Amplifier D (Amplifier decay time)

Specifies the time over which the volume of the note changes to its sustain level following the attack. This corresponds to T3 in the amplifier envelope diagram.

Range: 0– 10 –127

Amplifier S (Amplifier sustain level)

Specifies the volume at which the sound will be sustained. This corresponds to L3 in the amplifier envelope diagram.

Range: 0– 10 –127

Amplifier R (Amplifier release time)

Specifies the time from when the note ends (key-off) until the sound disappears completely. This corresponds to

T4 in the amplifier envelope diagram.

Range: 0– 10 –127

Volume T1 T2 T3 T4

L1 L2

Key-on

T: Time, L: Level

L3

Amplifier envelope

Key-off

Time

S-126

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 127 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

INSTRUMENTS

LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator type)

Selects the waveform that the LFO will output.

Value

Sine

Tri

SawU

SawD

Squr

Rand

BenU

BenD

Explanation

Sine wave

Triangle wave

Sawtooth wave

Sawtooth wave (inverted)

Square wave

Random wave

The LFO will output a waveform that rises to the normal level and stays there

The LFO will output a waveform that falls to the normal level and stays there

• If you select “Bend Up” or “Bend Down,” you must set the

Key Sync parameter (PARTIAL EDIT (LFO) screen (p.

147)) to “On.” If this is “Off,” the LFO effect will not be

obtained.

LFO Rate

Specifies the rate (frequency) of the waveform produced by the LFO.

Range: 0– 102 –127, , , , , , , , , , ,

, , , , , , , , , , ,

LFO Depth Pitch

Specifies the amount by which the LFO will affect the pitch.

Range: -63– 0 –+63

LFO Depth Pan

Specifies the amount by which the LFO will affect the panning.

Range: -63– 0 –+63

LFO Depth Filter

Specifies the amount by which the LFO will affect the filter.

Range: -63– 0 –+63

LFO Depth Amp (LFO Depth Amplifier)

Specifies the amount by which the LFO will affect the volume.

Range: -63– 0 –+63

F-buttons and menu

• [F1](Sample Edit)

Displays the SAMPLE EDIT screen (p. 128).

• [F2](SMT)

Displays the PARTIAL EDIT (SMT) screen (p. 141).

• [F3](Filter)

Displays the PARTIAL EDIT (FILTER) screen (p. 143).

• [F4](Amplifier)

Displays the PARTIAL EDIT (AMPLIFIER) screen (p.

145).

• [F5](LFO) Low Frequency Oscillator

Displays the PARTIAL EDIT (LFO) screen (p. 147).

• [MENU]

Displays the MENU popup.

Menu item

1 Partial Name

Displays the EDIT NAME popup (p. 3), where you can

edit the name of the partial.

• The PARTIAL EDIT MENU will also appear when you press [MENU] in the following screens.

PARTIAL EDIT (SMT) screen (p. 141)

PARTIAL EDIT (FILTER) screen (p. 143)

PARTIAL EDIT (AMPLIFIER) screen (p. 145)

PARTIAL EDIT (LFO) screen (p. 147)

S-127

MV-8800_r_e.book 128 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

INSTRUMENTS

SAMPLE EDIT screen

Here you can edit the sample used by the partial.

■ To access this screen

• [INSTRUMENTS] ➜ [F5](Patch Edit) ➜

[F5](Partial Edit) ➜ [F1](Sample Edit)

• [INSTRUMENTS] ➜ [F5](Patch Edit) ➜

[F5](Partial Edit) ➜ [F2](SMT) ➜ [F2](Sample Edit)

Explanation of each area

Pad

Shows the currently edited velocity pad number and partial name.

SMT (Sample Mix Table)

Shows the assignments of the samples that make up the partial you’re editing.

In the example shown here, the partial consists of SMT1.

SMT Number (Sample Mix Table number)

Of the samples (SMT) that make up the currently-edited partial, this specifies the SMT number that you are actually editing. In the example shown here, you are editing SMT1 that make up the partial.

Zoom Level

This indicates the magnification of the waveform shown in the wave window.

is the horizontal (time axis) magnification, and is the vertical (level axis) magnification. You can change the zoom level by holding down [SHIFT] and pressing the cursor button of the direction that is colored solid black.

Start Point

The point at which playback will start. Set this to skip any unwanted portion of the waveform at the beginning of the sample, so that the sample will begin playing at the desired timing.

Loop Point

The point at which the repeated portion (the second and subsequent times) will begin playing. Set this if you want to the sample to loop from a point other than the Start

Point.

End Point

The point at which playback will end. Set this to avoid playing any unwanted portion at the end of the sample.

Wave window

Displays the sample (waveform) you are editing. When you edit parameters – , this area will show the setting of each point.

Loop Mode

Specifies how the sample will play.

Value

Forward

Explanation

The sample will play from the start point to the end point, and then repeatedly play from the loop point to the end point in the forward direction.

Start Point Loop Point End Point

One Shot The sample will play once from the start point to the end point.

Start Point Loop Point End Point

Alternate The sample will play from the start point to the end point, and then repeatedly play from the end point

loop start point

end point

... in a zig-zag fashion.

Start Point Loop Point End Point

S-128

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 129 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

Value

Rev One

Shot

Explanation

The sample will play once in the reverse direction from the end point to the start point.

Start Point Loop Point End Point

Reverse The sample will play from the end point to the start point, and then play repeatedly in the reverse direction from the loop start point to the start point.

Start Point Loop Point End Point

Loop Tune

Adjusts the pitch of the loop region in steps of one cent.

Range: -50– 0 –+50

• One cent = 1/100th of a semitone

INSTRUMENTS

F-buttons and menu

• [F1](Sample List)

Displays the SAMPLE LIST popup (p. 130).

• [F2](Sample Prm)

Displays the SAMPLE PARAMETER popup (p. 131).

• [F3](Length Lock)

Specifies whether the length between the playback points of the sample will be fixed.

If the indication “LENG LOCK” is shown at the left of the

Start Point, Loop Point, and End Point parameters, the length of the corresponding region will be locked. In this case, changing one value will affect the other value while maintaining the length of the region.

• [F4](Preview)

When you hold this button, auditions a currently edited sample.

• [F5](Command)

Displays the SELECT SAMPLE EDIT COMMAND popup

(p. 132).

• [MENU]

Displays the MENU popup.

Menu items

1 Save Sample As WAV

Displays the SAVE SAMPLE AS WAV popup (p. 140),

where you can save the sample to disk in WAV format.

2 Save Sample As AIFF

Displays the SAVE SAMPLE AS AIFF popup (p. 140),

where you can save the sample to disk in AIFF format.

S-129

MV-8800_r_e.book 130 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

INSTRUMENTS

SAMPLE LIST popup

In this popup you can choose from the samples that have been saved in the MV-8800.

■ To access this screen

• [INSTRUMENTS] ➜ [F5](Patch Edit) ➜

[F5](Partial Edit) ➜ [F1](Sample Edit) ➜

[F1](Sample List)

[INSTRUMENTS] ➜ [F5](Patch Edit) ➜

[F5](Partial Edit) ➜ [F2](SMT) ➜ [F1](Sample List)

[AUDIO PHRASE] ➜ [F5](Edit) ➜

[F1](Sample List) etc.

Explanation of each area

Wave window

Displays the waveform of the sample selected by the cursor in the Sample List.

Sample list

Lists the saved samples. The sample number, sample name, channels (Stereo/Mono), and sample size are displayed. Choose the desired sample from this list.

Category

Sorts the sample list by category. You will need to have previously specified a category for each sample in the

SAMPLE PARAMETER popup (p. 131).

F-buttons

• [F3](Category)

Displays the SELECT CATEGORY popup (p. 4), where

you can limit the category of samples that will appear in the sample list.

• [F4](Preview)

Auditions the currently-highlighted sample while you hold down the button.

• [F5](Select)

Selects (confirms) the currently-highlighted sample, and closes the popup.

S-130

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 131 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

INSTRUMENTS

SAMPLE PARAMETER popup

Here you can set various parameters for the samples.

■ To access this screen

• [INSTRUMENTS] ➜ [F5](Patch Edit) ➜

[F5](Partial Edit) ➜ [F1](Sample Edit) ➜

[F2](Sample Prm)

• [INSTRUMENTS] ➜ [F5](Patch Edit) ➜

[F5](Partial Edit) ➜ [F2](SMT) ➜ [F2](Sample Edit)

➜ [F2](Sample Prm)

• [AUDIO PHRASE] ➜ [F5](Edit) ➜

[F1](Sample List) ➜ [F2](Sample Param) etc.

Explanation of each area

Sample number

Displays the number of the selected sample.

Sample name

Displays the name of the selected sample.

Original Key

Specifies the original key of the sample. This is the note number that will play the sample at its recorded pitch.

F-buttons

• [F1](Name)

Displays the EDIT NAME popup (p. 3), where you can

edit the name of the sample.

• [F5](Close)

Closes the SAMPLE PARAMETER popup (this popup).

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-131

MV-8800_r_e.book 132 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

INSTRUMENTS

SELECT SAMPLE EDIT COMMAND popup

Here you can choose a sample edit command.

■ To access this screen

• [PROJECT] ➜ move the cursor to the lower row of icons ➜ [F3](SmplMgr) ➜ [F5](Command)

• [INSTRUMENTS] ➜ [F5](Patch Edit) ➜

[F5](Partial Edit) ➜ [F1](Sample Edit) ➜

[F5](Command)

• [AUDIO PHRASE] ➜ [F5](Edit) ➜ [F5](Command) etc.

Explanation of each area

1 Emphasis

Displays the EMPHASIS popup (p. 133), where you can

emphasize the high frequency region of a sample, or restore an emphasized sample to its original state.

2 Normalize

Displays the NORMALIZE popup (p. 134). Boost the

overall level of the sample without allowing it to exceed the maximum number of bits.

3 Time Stretch

Displays the TIME STRETCH popup (p. 135), where you

can extend or shorten the length (time) of the sample without changing its pitch.

4 Truncate

Displays the TRUNCATE popup (p. 136). Use the

Truncate operation to delete unwanted portions of a sample.

* This menu item cannot be selected when you open this

popup from the AUDIO EVENT PARAMETER popup (p. 28).

5 Set Mono

Displays the SET MONO popup (p. 137).

Here you can convert a stereo sample into a monaural sample.

6 Delete

Delete selected samples.

A confirmation message “Delete sample. Are you sure?” will appear.

F-button

[F1](No)

[F5](Yes)

Explanation

To cancel without deleting.

To delete selected samples.

* This menu item can be selected when you open this popup

from the SAMPLE MANAGER screen (p. 169).

7 Fade In

Displays the FADE IN popup (p. 138).

Here you can apply a Fade In effect to the sample

(causing the volume to gradually increase from zero between the beginning and the point you specify).

* This menu item can be selected when you open this popup

from the SAMPLE MANAGER screen (p. 169).

8 Fade Out

Displays the FADE OUT popup (p. 139).

Here you can apply a Fade Out effect to the sample

(causing the sample to gradually decrease between the point you specify and the end point).

* This menu item can be selected when you open this popup from the SAMPLE MANAGER screen.

F-buttons

• [F1]( ▲ ) / [F2]( ▼ )

These buttons move the cursor between commands shown in the popup.

• [F5](Select)

Confirms the command you chose, and moves to the corresponding execution screen.

S-132

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 133 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

INSTRUMENTS

EMPHASIS popup

This command lets you convert the sample into a format that emphasizes or de-emphasizes the high-frequency region.

■ To access this screen

• Accesses the SELECT SAMPLE EDIT COMMAND popup (p. 132)

➜ select “Emphasis” ➜ [F5](Select)

Explanation of each area

Type

Specifies the conversion mode.

Value

PreEmphasis

De-Emphasis

Explanation

Boosts the high-frequency region.

Attenuates the high-frequency region.

Replace

Specifies whether the data after conversion will overwrite the existing sample or be saved as a different sample.

Value

Off

On (

)

Explanation

The waveform data after conversion will be added as a different sample.

The converted data will overwrite the existing sample.

F-button

• [F5](Execute)

Executes the Emphasis command.

• The amount of time required to execute the emphasis.

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-133

MV-8800_r_e.book 134 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

INSTRUMENTS

NORMALIZE popup

This maximizes the volume of the sample as far as possible.

■ To access this screen

• Accesses the SELECT SAMPLE EDIT COMMAND popup (p. 132)

➜ select “Normalize” ➜ [F5](Select)

Explanation of each area

Replace

Specifies whether the data after conversion will overwrite the existing sample or be saved as a different sample.

Value

Off

On (

)

Explanation

The waveform data after conversion will be added as a different sample.

The converted data will overwrite the existing sample.

F-button

• [F5](Execute)

Executes the Normalize command.

S-134

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 135 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

INSTRUMENTS

TIME STRETCH popup

This command lets you modify the length or tempo of the sample.

■ To access this screen

• Accesses the SELECT SAMPLE EDIT COMMAND popup (p. 132)

➜ select “Time Stretch” ➜

[F5](Select)

Explanation of each area

Rate

Specifies the proportion (%) by which Time Stretch will modify the playback time.

Range: 75.0– 100.0

–125.0

Time

Specifies the playback time following the Time Stretch operation, in terms of minutes, seconds, and milliseconds.

• If length data (Rate, Time) has been assigned to the sample, editing the value of one parameter will change the value of the other parameter in tandem.

Type

Lower settings of this value will make the sound more suitable for faster phrases, and higher settings will make the sound more suitable for slower phrases.

Range

01

:

05

:

10

Explanation for faster phrases

:

(initial value)

: for slower phrases

Quality Adjust

Make fine adjustments to the tonal quality of the Time

Stretch.

Range 1 –10

Replace

Specifies whether the data after conversion will overwrite the existing sample or be saved as a different sample.

Value

Off

On (

)

Explanation

The waveform data after conversion will be added as a different sample.

The converted data will overwrite the existing sample.

F-button

• [F5](Execute)

Executes the Time Stretch command.

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-135

MV-8800_r_e.book 136 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

INSTRUMENTS

TRUNCATE popup

Use the Truncate operation to delete unwanted portions of a sample.

■ To access this screen

• Accesses the SELECT SAMPLE EDIT COMMAND popup (p. 132)

➜ select “Truncate” ➜ [F5](Select)

Explanation of each area

Sample

Shows the number, name, number of channels of currently editing sample.

Wave window

Displays the sample (waveform) you are editing.

Zoom Level

This indicates the magnification of the waveform shown in the wave window.

You can change the zoom level of both vertical (level) axis and horizontal (time) axis by holding down [SHIFT] and pressing the cursor button.

Start Point / End Point

This sets the Truncate Start Point and End Point.

The region between the Start Point and the End Point is not deleted.

Replace

Specifies whether the data after conversion will overwrite the existing sample or be saved as a different sample.

Value

Off

On (

)

Explanation

The waveform data after conversion will be added as a different sample.

The converted data will overwrite the existing sample.

F-button

• [F4](Preview)

While the button is held down, you can audition the sounds in the region between the Start Point and the

End Point.

• [F5](Execute)

Executes the Truncate command.

S-136

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 137 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

INSTRUMENTS

SET MONO popup

This operation converts a stereo sample to a monaural sample.

■ To access this screen

• Accesses the SELECT SAMPLE EDIT COMMAND popup (p. 132)

➜ select “Set Mono” ➜ [F5](Select)

Explanation of each area

Replace

Specifies whether the data after conversion will overwrite the existing sample or be saved as a different sample.

Value

Off

On (

)

Explanation

The waveform data after conversion will be added as a different sample.

The converted data will overwrite the existing sample.

F-button

• [F5](Execute)

Executes the Set Mono command.

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-137

MV-8800_r_e.book 138 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

INSTRUMENTS

FADE IN popup

This operation applies a fade-in to the sample, causing the volume to gradually increase from zero between the beginning and the point you specify.

■ To access this screen

• Accesses the SELECT SAMPLE EDIT COMMAND popup (p. 132)

➜ select “Fade In” ➜ [F5](Select)

Explanation of each area

Sample

Shows the number, name, number of channels of currently editing sample.

Wave window

Displays the sample (waveform) you are editing.

Zoom Level

This indicates the magnification of the waveform shown in the wave window.

You can change the zoom level of both vertical (level) axis and horizontal (time) axis by holding down [SHIFT] and pressing the cursor button.

End Point

Specifies the point at which the fade-in will end.

The volume will gradually increase from zero in the region between the Start Point of the sample and this point.

Replace

Specifies whether the data after conversion will overwrite the existing sample or be save as a different sample.

Value

Off

On (

)

Explanation

This waveform data after conversion will be added to the sample list as a different sample.

This converted data will overwrite the existing sample.

F-buttons

• [F4](Preview)

You can hold down this button to audition the region to which the fade-in effect will be applied.

• [F5](Execute)

Applies the fade-in effect to the region between the sample’s Start Point and the End Point.

S-138

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 139 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

INSTRUMENTS

FADE OUT popup

This operation applies a fade-out to the sample, causing the volume to gradually decrease between the point you specify and the end point.

■ To access this screen

• Accesses the SELECT SAMPLE EDIT COMMAND popup (p. 132)

➜ select “Fade Out” ➜ [F5](Select)

Explanation of each area

Sample

Shows the number, name, number of channels of currently editing sample.

Wave window

Displays the sample (waveform) you are editing.

Zoom Level

This indicates the magnification of the waveform shown in the wave window.

You can change the zoom level of both vertical (level) axis and horizontal (time) axis by holding down [SHIFT] and pressing the cursor button.

Start Point

Specifies the point at which the fade-out will begin.

The volume will gradually decrease from this point to the sample’s End Point.

Replace

Specifies whether the data after conversion will overwrite the existing sample or be save as a different sample.

Value

Off

On (

)

Explanation

This waveform data after conversion will be added to the sample list as a different sample.

This converted data will overwrite the existing sample.

F-buttons

• [F4](Preview)

You can hold down this button to audition the region to which the fade-out effect will be applied.

• [F5](Execute)

Applies the fade-out effect to the region between the

Start Point and the sample’s End Point.

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-139

MV-8800_r_e.book 140 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

INSTRUMENTS

SAVE SAMPLE AS WAV popup / SAVE SAMPLE AS AIFF popup

Here you can save the sample as a WAV-format or AIFF-format file.

■ To access this screen

• [INSTRUMENTS] ➜ [F5](Patch Edit) ➜

[F5](Partial Edit) ➜ [F1](Sample Edit) ➜

[MENU] ➜ select “Save Sample As WAV” or “Save

Sample As AIFF” ➜ [F5](Select)

• [AUDIO PHRASES] ➜ [F5](Edit) ➜ [MENU] ➜ select “Save Sample As WAV” or “Save Sample As

AIFF” ➜ [F5](Select)

Explanation of each area

Sample number, Sample name

Displays the number and name of the sample which can be saved.

Current folder name

Displays the destination folder you want to save.

Folder levels below the root folder (the top level folder in the hard disk) are shown by a slash “/” symbol.

File list

Displays the name of the files and folders saved in the current folder.

Drive capacity

Displays the free space of the hard disk.

F-buttons

• [F4](Make Folder)

Displays the EDIT NAME popup (p. 3), where you can

create a new folder inside the current folder.

• [F5](Save)

Saves the sample as a WAV-format or AIFF-format file.

Displays the EDIT NAME popup (p. 3), where you can

specify the name of a WAV-format or AIFF-format file.

S-140

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 141 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

INSTRUMENTS

PARTIAL EDIT (SMT) screen

Here you can edit the Sample Mix Table (SMT) used by the partial.

■ To access this screen

• [INSTRUMENTS] ➜ [F5](Patch Edit) ➜

[F5](Partial Edit) ➜ [F2](SMT)

Explanation of each area

Pad

Selects the pad number and partial name that you will edit.

SMT (Sample Mix Table)

Shows the sample usage for the partial you selected in

. In the example shown here, the partial uses SMT1 and 2.

Sample

Specifies the samples that make up the partial.

SMT Velocity Control

Value

Off

On

Explanation

All SMTs will sound.

Different SMTs will sound according to the velocity level of your playing.

Sw (Switch)

Specifies whether the SMT will be applied (On) or not

(Off).

Range: Off, On

Level (SMT level)

Specifies the level of each sample.

Range: 0– 127

Pan (SMT pan)

Specifies the panning of each sample.

Value

:

L32

:

C

R32

Rand

Key-

Explanation

:

The stereo position is fixed at the far left.

The stereo position is fixed at the center.

Key+

LFO-

LFO+

Alt

The stereo position is fixed at the far right.

The stereo position changes irregularly at random.

The higher up on the keyboard that you play, the further the sound is shifted to the right.

The higher the notes played on the keyboard, the further left the sound is shifted.

The LFO phase is reversed between LFO+ and

LFO-.

The sample pan is C (center), and the sound is panned left and right automatically with the LFO.

The depth of the pan movement is determined by

the LFO Depth Pan (p. 127) parameter.

The stereo position of sound is shifted hard left and hard right (i.e., L32, R32, L32, ...) each time a key is played.

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-141

MV-8800_r_e.book 142 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

INSTRUMENTS

C6

C5

C4

C3

C2

Pitch KF (Pitch Key Follow)

Specifies the amount of pitch change that occurs when you move one octave upward on the keyboard.

Range: -16–Rev–Off–Norm–+16

Actual Pitch

+16/8

+8/8 [Norm]

-8/8 [Rev]

0

-16/8

C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7

Keyboard pitch

• If you want the pitch to change +1 octave (as on a conventional keyboard), select “Norm.” With this setting, the C5 note number will produce the C5 pitch. If you want the pitch to change +2 octaves, select “+16”. With this setting, the C5 note number will produce the C6 pitch.

Conversely, if you want the pitch to fall as you play upward on the keyboard, select a negative (-) number. If you want the same pitch to be produced regardless of the key you play, select the “Off” setting.

• This setting is in units of 1/8 octave.

Coarse (SMT coarse tune)

Adjusts the pitch of the sample in steps of a semitone.

Range: -48– 0 –+48 (+/-4 octaves)

Fine (SMT fine une)

Adjusts the pitch of the sample in steps of one cent.

Range: -50– 0 –+50

• One cent = 1/100th of a semitone

Velocity Range Lower

Specifies the lower limit of the velocities that will sound the SMT (Sample Mix Table). Use this setting when you want to velocity-switch between SMTs.

Range: 1 –(Upper - FadeU - FadeL - 1)

Velocity Range FadeL

(Velocity Range Fade Width Lower)

Specifies how the volume will change when you play a velocity that falls from the specified Velocity Range

FadeL to the specified lower velocity limit. Higher settings of this value will make the volume decrease more gradually. If you don’t want any sound to be heard when you play velocities below the Lower setting, set this to “0”.

Range: 0 –(Upper - FadeU - Lower - 1)

Velocity Range Upper

Specifies the upper limit of the velocities that will sound the SMT (Sample Mix Table). Use this setting when you want to velocity-switch between SMTs.

Range: (total ranges except for the Upper setting) –

127

Velocity Range FadeU

(Velocity Range Fade Width Upper)

Specifies how the volume will change when you play a velocity that falls from the specified Velocity Range

FadeU to the specified upper velocity limit. Higher settings of this value will make the volume decrease more gradually. If you don’t want any sound to be heard when you play velocities over the Upper setting, set this to “0”.

Range: 0 –(Upper - FadeL - Lower)

Level

Velocity

Range L

FadeL FadeU

Range U

F-buttons

• [F1](Sample List)

Displays the SAMPLE LIST popup (p. 130). In this

popup, the SMT at the cursor location can be assigned to a different sample.

• [F2](Sample Edit)

Displays the SAMPLE EDIT screen (p. 128). In this

screen, you can adjust the playback region of the SMT sample at which the cursor is located.

S-142

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 143 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

INSTRUMENTS

PARTIAL EDIT (FILTER) screen

Here you can edit the filter of the partial.

■ To access this screen

• [INSTRUMENTS] ➜ [F5](Patch Edit) ➜

[F5](Partial Edit) ➜ [F3]( Filter )

Explanation of each area

Pad

Selects the pad number and partial name that you will edit.

SMT (Sample Mix Table)

Shows the sample usage for the partial you selected in

. In the example shown here, the partial uses SMT1 and 2.

Filter Type

Selects the type of filter.

Value Explanation

Off

LPF

No filter will be used.

Low Pass Filter. This cuts the region above the cutoff frequency (Cutoff), making the sound more mellow.

This is the most frequently used type of filter.

BPF

HPF

Band Pass Filter. This passes only the region near the cutoff frequency (Cutoff), cutting the remainder of the sound. This type is useful for creating distinctive sounds.

High Pass Filter. This cuts the region below the cutoff frequency (Cutoff). This type is useful when creating percussion sounds that have distinctive high-frequency components.

Filter Cutoff

Specifies the cutoff frequency of the current partial.

Range: 0– 127

Filter

Type

Effect on the Cutoff setting

LPF Lowering the cutoff frequency will diminish the higher overtones, making the sound more mellow. Raising this setting will brighten the sound.

BPF The cutoff frequency value will change the overtone structure of the sound.

HPF Raising the cutoff frequency will diminish the lower overtones, emphasizing the bright portion of the sound.

Filter Resonance

Emphasizes the sound of the current partial in the region of the cutoff frequency.

Range: 0 –127

• Raising this value excessively may cause oscillation and distortion.

Filter Velo Curve Type

(Filter Velocity Curve Type)

Selects one of the following four types of curve by which the velocity will affect the filter. If you don’t want velocity to affect the filter, select “1”.

Range: 1, 2 , 3, 4

1 2 3 4

Filter Velo Curve Sens

(Filter Velocity Curve Sensitivity)

Specifies the depth and polarity by which the velocity will affect the filter curve. Increasingly positive (+) settings will make the curve closer to the shape specified by Filter

Velo Curve Type. With a setting of 0, the curve will be the same as Filter Velo Curve Type=1. Negative (-) settings will invert the shape of the curve.

Range: -63– 0 –+63

Filter KF Point (Filter Key Follow Point)

Use this when you want the cutoff frequency to change according to the note number you play. The cutoff frequency will be at its base value for the key you specify as the KF Point.

Range: A0– C4 –G#8

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-143

MV-8800_r_e.book 144 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

INSTRUMENTS

Filter Cutoff KF (Filter Cutoff Key Follow)

Use this when you want the cutoff frequency to change according to the note number you play. With positive (+) settings of this parameter, the cutoff frequency will rise as you play keys above the specified KF Point. With negative (-) settings of this parameter, the cutoff frequency will become lower as you play keys above the specified KF Point. The example shown in the following diagram is when you play the C5 key with the KF Point set to C4.

Range: -63– 0 –+63

Actual cutoff frequency

+63

0 0

C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6

-63

C7

Keyboard pitch

Envelope Time KF (Envelope Time Key Follow)

Specifies how the envelope times (T1–T4) will be adjusted relative to the key follow point. Increasing this value will produce greater change. Positive (+) settings will shorten the envelope times as you play toward the right of the keyboard. Conversely, negative (-) settings will lengthen the envelope times.

Range: -63– 0 –+63

Envelope Depth Pitch

Adjusts the amount of pitch change. Increasing this value will produce greater change. Negative (-) settings will invert the direction of the change (i.e., the shape of the pitch envelope).

Range: -63– 0 –+63

Envelope Depth Filter

Adjusts the amount of filter change. Increasing this value will produce greater change. Negative (-) settings will invert the direction of the change (i.e., the shape of the filter envelope).

Range: -63– 0 –+63

Envelope Velocity Sens Filter

(Envelope Velocity Sensitivity Filter)

Specifies how velocity will affect the filter. Use positive

(+) settings if you want filtering to become stronger as you play higher velocities, or negative (-) settings if you want filtering to become weaker.

Range: -63– 0 –+63

Envelope Velocity Sens T1 (A)

(Envelope Velocity Sensitivity Attack Time)

Specifies how velocity will affect T1 of the filter envelope

(see the Filter Envelope diagram). Use positive (+) settings if you want T1 to be faster for stronger velocities, or negative (-) settings if you want it to be slower.

Range: -63– 0 –+63

Envelope Velocity Sens T4 (R)

(Envelope Velocity Sensitivity Release Time)

Specifies how velocity will affect T4 of the filter envelope

(see the Filter Envelope diagram). Use positive (+) settings if you want T4 to be faster for higher note-off velocities (i.e., releasing the key more quickly), or negative (-) settings if you want it to be slower.

Range: -630 –+63

Envelope T1 (A), T2, T3 (D), T4 (R)

(Envelope Times 1–4)

These specify the filter envelope times (T1–T4). Higher values lengthen the time until the next cutoff frequency is reached (e.g., T2 sets the time of the change from L1 to

L2).

Range: 0 –127

Envelope L1, L2, L3 (S), L4

(Envelope Levels 1–4)

These specify the filter envelope levels (L1–L4). Each parameter specifies the change in cutoff frequency relative to the setting of the Cutoff parameter.

Range: 0 –127

• The note-on level (L0) is linked with L4.

Cutoff freqency

T1 T2 T3 T4

L0

L1

Key-on

L2

T: Time, L: Level

Filter envelope

L3

Key-off

L4

Time

F-buttons

• [F1](Sample Edit)

Displays the SAMPLE EDIT screen (p. 128).

• [F2](SMT) Sample Mix Table

Displays the PARTIAL EDIT (SMT) screen (p. 141).

• [F4](Amplifier)

Displays the PARTIAL EDIT (AMPLIFIER) screen (p. 145).

• [F5](LFO) Low Frequency Oscillator

Displays the PARTIAL EDIT (LFO) screen (p. 147).

S-144

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 145 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

INSTRUMENTS

PARTIAL EDIT (AMPLIFIER) screen

Here you can edit the way in which the volume of the partial will change.

■ To access this screen

• [INSTRUMENTS] ➜ [F5](Patch Edit) ➜

[F5](Partial Edit) ➜ [F4](Amplifier)

Explanation of each area

Pad

Selects the pad number and partial name that you will edit.

SMT (Sample Mix Table)

Shows the sample usage for the partial you selected in

. In the example shown here, the partial uses SMT1 and 2.

Level Velo Curve Type

(Level Velocity Curve Type)

Selects one of the following four types of curve by which the velocity will affect the volume. If you don’t want velocity to affect the volume, select “1”.

Range: 1, 2 , 3, 4

1 2 3 4

Level Velo Curve Sens

(Level Velocity Curve Sensitivity)

Specifies the depth and polarity by which the velocity will affect the volume. Increasingly positive (+) settings will make the curve closer to the shape specified by Level

Velo Curve Type. With a setting of 0, the curve will be the same as Level Velo Curve Type=1. Negative (-) settings will invert the shape of the curve.

Range: -63– 0 –+63

Level KF Point (Level Key Follow Point)

Use this when you want the level to change according to the note number you play. The level will be at its base value for the key you specify as the KF Point.

Range: A0– C4 –G#8

Level KF (Level Key Follow)

Use this when you want the level to change according to the note number you play. With positive (+) settings of this parameter, the level will become louder as you play keys above the specified KF Point. With negative (-) settings of this parameter, the level will become quieter as you play keys above the specified KF Point. The example shown in the following diagram is when you play the C5 key with the KF Point set to C4.

Range: -63– 0 –+63

Actual level

+63

+63

0

-63

0

C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6

-63

C7

Keyboard pitch

Time KF (Envelope Time Key Follow)

Specifies how the envelope times (T1–T4) will be adjusted relative to the key follow point (C4). Increasing this value will produce greater change. Positive (+) settings will shorten the envelope times as you play toward the right of the keyboard. Conversely, negative (-) settings will length the envelope times.

Range: -63– 0 –+63

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-145

MV-8800_r_e.book 146 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

INSTRUMENTS

Envelope Velo Sens T1 (A)

(Envelope Velocity Sensitivity Attack Time)

Specifies how velocity will affect T1 of the amplifier envelope (see the Amplifier Envelope diagram). Use positive (+) settings if you want T1 to be faster for stronger velocities, or negative (-) settings if you want it to be slower.

Range: -63– 0 –+63

Envelope Velo Sens T4 (R)

(Envelope Velocity Sensitivity Release Time)

Specifies how velocity will affect T4 of the amplifier envelope (see the Amplifier Envelope diagram). Use positive (+) settings if you want T4 to be faster for higher note-off velocities (i.e., releasing the key more quickly), or negative (-) settings if you want it to be slower.

Range: -63– 0 -+63

Envelope T1 (A), T2, T3 (D), T4 (R)

(Envelope Times 1–4)

These specify the amplifier envelope times (T1–T4).

Higher values lengthen the time until the next level is reached (e.g., T2 sets the time of the change from L1 to

L2).

Range: 0 –127

Envelope L1, L2, L3 (S) (Envelope Levels 1–3)

These specify the amplifier envelope levels (L1–L3).

Each parameter specifies the change in level relative to

the setting of the Level parameter in the PARTIAL EDIT

(SMT) screen (p. 141).

Range: 0 -127

Volume T1 T2 T3 T4

F-buttons

• [F1](Sample Edit)

Displays the SAMPLE EDIT screen (p. 128).

• [F2](SMT) Sample Mix Table

Displays the PARTIAL EDIT (SMT) screen (p. 141).

• [F3](Filter)

Displays the PARTIAL EDIT (FILTER) screen (p. 143).

• [F5](LFO) Low Frequency Oscillator

Displays the PARTIAL EDIT (LFO) screen (p. 147).

L1 L2

Key-on

T: Time, L: Level

L3

Amplifier envelope

Key-off

Time

S-146

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 147 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

INSTRUMENTS

PARTIAL EDIT (LFO) screen

Here you can edit the modulation (cyclic change) of the partial.

■ To access this screen

• [INSTRUMENTS] ➜ [F5](Patch Edit) ➜

[F5](Partial Edit) ➜ [F5](LFO)

Explanation of each area

Pad

Selects the pad number and partial name that you will edit.

SMT (Sample Mix Table)

Shows the sample usage for the partial you selected in

. In the example shown here, the partial uses SMT1 and 2.

Wave Form

Selects the waveform that the LFO will output.

Value

Sine

Triangle

Saw Up

Saw Down

Square

Random

Bend Up

Bend Down

Explanation

Sine wave

Triangle wave

Sawtooth wave

Sawtooth wave (inverted)

Square wave

Random wave

The LFO will output a waveform that rises to the normal level and stays there

The LFO will output a waveform that falls to the normal level and stays there

• If you select “Bend Up” or “Bend Down,” you must set the

Key Sync parameter PARTIAL EDIT (LFO) screen (p. 147)

to “On.” If this is “Off,” the LFO effect will not be obtained.

Wave Rate

Specifies the rate (frequency) of the waveform produced by the LFO.

Range: 0– 102 –127, , , , , , , , , , ,

, , , , , , , , , , ,

Wave Detune (Wave Rate Detune)

This parameter creates slight differences in the LFO rate

(Wave Rate parameter) for each note-on. Higher settings of this parameter will produce greater change. If “Rate” is set to “note value,” this parameter is ignored.

Range: 0 –127

Wave Delay Time

Specifies the time from note-on (note-off) until the LFO effect will be applied (will continue).

Range:

0 –127

Set this appropriately as described in “To add modulation to the sound” (Owner’s Manual; p. 104).

Wave Delay KF (Wave Delay Key Follow)

Specifies how the Delay Time parameter will be adjusted according to the location of the key you play relative to the C4 key (middle C). Set this parameter to a positive

(+) setting if you want the LFO effect to apply sooner as you play upward on the keyboard, or to a negative (-) setting if you want the delay to become longer as you play upward. Higher settings will produce more change.

If you don’t want the keyboard location to affect the delay until the LFO effect is applied, set this to “0”.

Range: -63– 0 –+63

Time

+63

+63

0

-63

0

C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6

-63

C7

Keyboard

Pitch

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-147

MV-8800_r_e.book 148 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

INSTRUMENTS

Key Sync

Specifies whether the start of the LFO cycle will match the note-on timing (ON) or not (OFF).

Range: Off , On

Depth Pitch

Specifies the amount by which the LFO will affect the pitch.

Range: -63– 0 –+63

Depth Filter

Specifies the amount by which the LFO will affect the cutoff frequency.

Range: -63– 0 –+63

Depth Amplifier

Specifies the amount by which the LFO will affect the volume.

Range: -63– 0 –+63

Depth Pan

Specifies the amount by which the LFO will affect the panning.

Range: -63– 0 –+63

• Positive (+) and negative (-) values of these Depth settings will produce the opposite change in pitch or volume. For example if you specify a positive (+) Depth value for one partial and an identical but opposite negative (-) value for another partial, the two will be modulated in opposite directions. You can use this to exchange two different partials, or in conjunction with Pan to make the sound location move cyclically.

F-buttons

• [F1](Sample Edit)

Displays the SAMPLE EDIT screen (p. 128).

• [F2](SMT) Sample Mix Table

Displays the PARTIAL EDIT (SMT) screen (p. 141).

• [F3](Filter)

Displays the PARTIAL EDIT (FILTER) screen (p. 143).

• [F4](Amplifier)

Displays the PARTIAL EDIT (AMPLIFIER) screen (p.

145).

S-148

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 149 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SAVE PATCH popup

Here you can save patches as a file.

INSTRUMENTS

■ To access this screen

• [INSTRUMENTS] ➜ [MENU] ➜

➜ [F5](Select) select “Save Patch”

Explanation of each area

Patch name

Displays the name of the patch which can be saved.

Current folder name

Displays the destination folder you want to save.

Folder levels below the root folder (the top level folder in the hard disk) are shown by a slash “/” symbol.

File list

Displays the name of the files and folders saved in the current folder.

Drive capacity

Displays the free space of the hard disk.

F-buttons

• [F4](Make Folder)

Displays the EDIT NAME popup (p. 3), where you can

create a new folder inside the current folder.

• [F5](Save)

Saves the patch as a file (with .MV0 extension) to the hard disk.

Displays the EDIT NAME popup (p. 3), where you can

specify the name of a WAV-format or AIFF-format file.

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-149

MV-8800_r_e.book 150 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

INSTRUMENTS

LOAD PATCH screen

Here you can load patch data from the disk, and use it as a patch in the current project.

■ To access this screen

• [INSTRUMENTS] ➜ [MENU] ➜

➜ [F5](Select) select “Load Patch”

Explanation of each area

Current drive

Shows the currently selected drive with its icon.

Current folder name

Displays the name of the currently selected folder. Folder levels below the root (the top level of the folder structure) are shown by a slash “/” symbol.

Cursor Icon

The cursor icon will change shape to indicate whether you can press the cursor right or left button to change the displayed folder.

Cursor icon

Explanation

You can move the cursor up/down.

You can move the cursor up/down. If this indication is displayed, the cursor is located at a folder (highlighted). Press the right cursor key to view the contents of the folder (i.e., to switch folders).

You can move the cursor up/down. If this indication is displayed, you can press the left cursor button to return to the parent folder (i.e., to switch folders).

Wave Memory

Displays the remaining amount of wave memory.

File list

Here you can select the patch that you want to load.

F-buttons and menu

• [F1](Select Drive)

Displays the SELECT DRIVE popup (p. 6), where you

can switch the drive from which to select patches.

• [F3](Mark On/Off)

Marks or unmarks a file.

• [F4](Preview)

Displays the IMPORT PREVIEW popup.

The message “Reading patch for preview..” will appear, and the patch will begin loading. When all data has been loaded, the IMPORT PREVIEW popup will show the name of the patch that was loaded. You can use the velocity pads (or other means) to audition and try out the patch.

For details, refer to “Auditioning or previewing before you import” (Owner’s Manual; p. 74).

• [F5](Load)

Displays the ASSIGN TO PART / LIBRARY popup (p.

224).

• [MENU]

Displays the MENU popup.

Menu item

1 All Mark

Marks or unmarks all patch files shown in the file list.

S-150

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 151 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

INSTRUMENTS

COPY PART popup

Here you can copy the settings of the current part to another part.

■ To access this screen

• [INSTRUMENTS] ➜ [MENU] ➜ select “Copy Part” ➜

[F5](Select)

Explanation of each area

To Part

Specifies the copy-destination of the current part settings.

Range: 1–16

• You can’t set this to be the number of the current part itself

(i.e., the copy-source itself).

F-button

• [F5](Execute)

Copies the settings of the current part to the specified part.

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-151

MV-8800_r_e.book 152 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

AUDIO PHRASES

Here you can manage audio phrases.

AUDIO PHRASES (PAD) screen

This screen shows the audio phrases that you can play from the velocity pads.

■ To access this screen

• [AUDIO PHRASES]

Explanation of each area

Pad Bank

Specifies the pad bank number. The pads of the selected pad bank are shown in (“Velocity Pads”).

Velocity Pads

This area shows information for each pad. The displayed pads correspond to the top panel VELOCITY PADS. The pad selected by the cursor is highlighted.

• You can also select a pad by striking the desired

VELOCITY PAD on the top panel.

Pad numbers

These are the numbers of each pad. They correspond to the top panel VELOCITY PADS.

E.Grp (Exclusive group)

This allows you to specify, for multiple audio phrases, that only one of them can play at once.

When audio phrases assigned to the same group are played simultaneously (i.e., overlapping), the first-played phrase will be turned off before the next-played one is sounded.

Range: Off , 1–31

Category name

This is part of the name of the audio phrase (“Category,” p.70). You can assign a category to each audio phrase so that it will be easier to find when needed.

Audio phrase name

This is the name assigned to each audio phrase.

Pad play mode

Indicates how the audio phrase will play. This setting is

made in the AUDIO PHRASE EDIT screen (p. 155).

S-152

MV-8800 Screen Guide

Value Explanation

Gate Press pad ➜ sound begins

Release pad ➜ sound stops

Trigger Press pad

sound begins (and continues even when you release the pad)

Press pad once again

sound stops

Drum Press pad ➜ sound begins (and continues even when you release the pad)

Sound stops automatically at the end point of the phrase

F-buttons and menu

• [F1](Pad)

Displays the AUDIO PHRASES (PAD) screen (this

screen).

• [F2](List)

Displays the AUDIO PHRASES (LIST) screen (p. 153).

• [F5](Edit)

Displays the AUDIO PHRASE EDIT screen (p. 155).

• [MENU]

Displays the MENU popup.

Menu items

1 Audio Phrase Name

Displays the EDIT NAME popup (p. 3), which you can

assign a name to the audio phrase.

2 Save Audio Phrase Bank

Displays the SAVE AUDIO PHRASE BANK popup (p.

154), where you can save the audio phrases in the

current bank to the hard disk as a file.

MV-8800_r_e.book 153 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

AUDIO PHRASES

AUDIO PHRASES (LIST) screen

This screen lists information on the audio phrases assigned to the pads.

■ To access this screen

• [AUDIO PHRASES] ➜ [F2](List)

Explanation of each area

Pad numbers

These are the numbers of each pad. They correspond to the top panel VELOCITY PADS. The pad selected by the cursor is highlighted.

• You can also select a pad by striking the desired

VELOCITY PAD on the top panel.

Category name

This is part of the name of the audio phrase (“Category,” p.70). You can assign a category to each audio phrase so that it will be easier to find when needed.

Audio phrase name

This is the name assigned to each audio phrase.

Level (Audio phrase level)

Specifies the playback level of the audio phrase.

Range: 0– 127

Play Mode (Pad play mode)

Specifies how the audio phrase will play.

Value

Gate

Trigger

Drum

Explanation

Press pad ➜ sound begins

Release pad ➜ sound stops

Press pad

sound begins (and continues even when you release the pad)

Press pad once again

sound stops

Press pad ➜ sound begins (and continues even when you release the pad)

Sound stops automatically at the end point of the phrase

Velocity

Specifies whether velocity will affect the volume when you use the velocity pads to play audio phrases.

Range: Off , On

Excl.Grp (Exclusive group)

This allows you to specify, for multiple audio phrases, that only one of them can play at once.

When audio phrases assigned to the same group are played simultaneously (i.e., overlapping), the first-played phrase will be turned off before the next-played one is sounded.

Range: Off , 1–31

F-buttons and menu

• [F1](Pad)

Displays the AUDIO PHRASES (PAD) screen (p. 152)

(this screen).

• [F2](List)

Displays the AUDIO PHRASES (LIST) screen (this

screen).

• [F5](Edit)

Displays the AUDIO PHRASE EDIT screen (p. 155).

• [MENU]

Displays the MENU popup.

Displayed menu items are same as the AUDIO

PHRASES (PAD) screen (p. 152).

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-153

MV-8800_r_e.book 154 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

AUDIO PHRASES

SAVE AUDIO PHRASE BANK popup

Here you can save audio phrases in the current bank as a file.

■ To access this screen

• [AUDIO PHRASES] ➜ [MENU] ➜ select “Save

Audio Phrase Bank” ➜ [F5](Select)

Explanation of each area

Bank number, Bank name

Displays the number and name of the current audio phrase bank which can be saved.

Current folder name

Displays the destination folder you want to save.

Folder levels below the root folder (the top level folder in the hard disk) are shown by a slash “/” symbol.

File list

Displays the name of the files and folders saved in the current folder.

Drive capacity

Displays the free space of the hard disk.

F-buttons

• [F4](Make Folder)

Displays the EDIT NAME popup (p. 3) where you can

create a new folder inside the current folder.

• [F5](Save)

Saves the audio phrases in the current bank as a file to the hard disk.

Displays the EDIT NAME popup (p. 3), where you can

specify the name of a WAV-format or AIFF-format file.

S-154

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 155 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

AUDIO PHRASES

AUDIO PHRASE EDIT screen

Here you can make settings for the audio phrase assigned to each pad.

■ To access this screen

• [AUDIO PHRASES] ➜ select the audio phrase you want to edit ➜ [F5](Edit)

Explanation of each area

Pad (Pad number)

Displays the pad number and audio phrase name that you want to edit.

Audio Phrase BPM (Audio Phrase Tempo)

Displays the tempo at which the audio phrase will play.

The value displayed here is calculated from the BPM

Base Note setting and the number of beats in the loop region.

Sample

Shows the number, name, and number of channels for the sample used by the audio phrase.

Zoom level

Indicates the ratio at which the waveform shown in the wave window is being magnified or shrunk.

Wave window

Displays the audio phrase (waveform) that you are editing.

Beat line

This line is shown at each beat. The space between lines is one note.

Pad Play

Specifies how the audio phrase will play.

Value

Gate

Trigger

Drum

Explanation

Press pad

sound begins

Release pad

sound stops

Press pad

sound begins (and continues even when you release the pad)

Press pad once again

sound stops

Press pad

sound begins (and continues even when you release the pad)

Sound stops automatically at the end point of the phrase

Loop Mode

Specifies how the specified loop region will be repeated.

Value

Off

Start-End

Loop-End

Explanation

Looping will not occur.

The region between the Start Point and the End

Point will play repeatedly.

The region between the Loop Point and the End

Point will play repeatedly.

• If Pad Play is set to Drum, the Loop Point and Loop Mode settings will be ignored.

BPM Base Note

Specifies the length of the currently-edited audio phrase as a number of beats at the specified note value. The playback tempo is determined according to this data.

The tempo is indicated by Audio Phrase BPM.

Range: x1– x4 –x65535

Start Point

The point at which playback will start. Set this to skip any unwanted portion of the waveform at the beginning of the sample, so that the sample will begin playing at the desired timing.

Loop Point

Specifies the point at which the playback will begin repeating (i.e., for the second and subsequent plays).

Set this if you want to the sample to loop from a point other than the Start Point.

End Point

Specifies the point at which playback will end. Set this to avoid playing any unwanted portion of the waveform at the end of the sample.

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-155

MV-8800_r_e.book 156 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

AUDIO PHRASES

Level

Specifies the volume of the audio phrase.

Range: 0– 127

Velocity Control

Specifies whether velocity will affect the volume when you use the velocity pads to play audio phrases.

Coarse Tune

Adjusts the pitch of the audio phrase in steps of a semitone.

Range: -48– 0 –+48 (+/-4 octaves)

Fine Tune

Adjusts the pitch of the audio phrase in steps of one cent.

Range: -50– 0 –+50

• One cent = 1/100th of a semitone

Reverse

Makes the audio phrase play backward (from the End

Point toward the Start Point).

Range: Off , On

• If Reverse is On and Loop Mode is set to Loop-End, the loop region will loop backward between the Loop Point and the Start Point.

BPM Sync (Tempo Sync)

If this parameter is On, the tempo will be calculated according to the playback time from the Start Point to the

End Point and the note value (Base Note) and number of notes in that region, so that the sequencer and the audio phrase will play in synchronization.

Range: Off, On

Stretch Type

If the BPM Sync parameter is On, this setting adjusts the audio quality with which the sample is stretched or shrunk (Time Stretch). The ideal setting will depend on the type of audio material. If you choose Auto, the appropriate setting will be automatically assigned based on the length of the sound and the BPM.

Range: Auto , 1–10

Excl Group (Exclusive group)

Specifies how audio phrases assigned to the same exclusive group will be handled when they are played simultaneously. When audio phrases assigned to the same group are played simultaneously (i.e., overlapping), the first-played phrase will be turned off before the next-played one is sounded.

Range: Off , 1–31

F-buttons and menu

• [F1](Sample List)

Displays the SAMPLE LIST popup (p. 130).

• [F2](Sample Edit)

Displays the AUDIO PHARASE SAMPLE EDIT screen

(p. 157).

In this screen you can focus on editing the playback region of the sample used by the audio phrase.

• [F3](Length Lock)

Specifies whether the length between the playback points of the sample will be fixed.

If the indication “LENG LOCK” is shown at the left of the

Start Point, Loop Point, and End Point parameters, the length of the corresponding region will be locked. In this case, changing one value will affect the other value while maintaining the length of the region.

• If Reverse is On, the time difference between Start Point and the Loop Point will be fixed.

• [F4] (Chop)

Displays the CHOP popup (p. 159).

• [F5] (Command)

Displays the SELECT SAMPLE EDIT COMMAND popup

(p. 132).

• [MENU]

Displays the MENU popup.

Menu items

1 Audio Phrase Name

Displays the EDIT NAME popup (p. 3), where you can

assign a name to the audio phrase.

2 Save Sample As WAV

Displays the SAVE SAMPLE AS WAV popup (p. 140),

where you can save the audio phrase to disk in WAV format.

3 Save Sample As AIFF

Displays the SAVE SAMPLE AS AIFF popup (p. 140),

where you can save the audio phrase to disk in AIFF format.

S-156

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 157 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

AUDIO PHRASES

AUDIO PHARASE SAMPLE EDIT screen

In this screen you can edit the playback points while viewing a waveform display that is larger than that in the AUDIO PHRASE EDIT screen.

■ To access this screen

• [AUDIO PHRASES] ➜ select the audio phrase you want to edit ➜ [F5](Edit) ➜ [F2](Sample Edit)

Explanation of each area

Sample

Indicates the sample number and sample name that you are editing.

Zoom level

Indicates the ratio at which the waveform shown in the wave window is being magnified or shrunk.

Wave window

Shows the audio phrase (waveform) that you are editing.

Start Point

The point at which playback will start. Set this to skip any unwanted portion of the waveform at the beginning of the sample, so that the sample will begin playing at the desired timing.

Loop Point

Specifies the point at which the playback will begin repeating (i.e., for the second and subsequent plays).

Set this if you want to the sample to loop from a point other than the Start Point.

End Point

Specifies the point at which playback will end. Set this to avoid playing any unwanted portion of the waveform at the end of the sample.

BPM Base Note

Specifies the length of the currently-edited audio phrase as a number of beats at the specified note value. The playback tempo is determined according to this data.

The tempo is indicated by Audio Phrase BPM.

Range: x1– x4 –x65535

Loop Mode

Specifies how the specified loop region will be repeated.

Value

Off

Start-End

Loop-End

Explanation

Looping will not occur.

The region between the Start Point and the End

Point will play repeatedly.

The region between the Loop Point and the End

Point will play repeatedly.

Reverse

Makes the audio phrase play backward (from the End

Point toward the Start Point).

Range: Off , On

• If Reverse is On and Loop Mode is set to Loop-End, the loop region will loop backward between the Loop Point and the Start Point.

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-157

MV-8800_r_e.book 158 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

AUDIO PHRASES

F-buttons

• [F1](Sample List)

Displays the SAMPLE LIST popup (p. 130).

• [F2](Sample Prm)

Displays the SAMPLE PARAMETER popup (p. 131).

• [F3](Length Lock)

Specifies whether the length between the playback points of the sample will be fixed.

If the indication “LENG LOCK” is shown at the left of the

Start Point, Loop Point, and End Point parameters, the length of the corresponding region will be locked. In this case, changing one value will affect the other value while maintaining the length of the region.

• If Reverse is On, the time difference between Start Point and the Loop Point will be fixed.

• [F4](Preview)

When you hold this button, auditions a currently edited sample.

• [F5](Command)

Displays the SELECT SAMPLE EDIT COMMAND popup

(p. 132).

• [MENU]

Displays the MENU popup.

Menu items

1 Save Sample As WAV

Displays the SAVE SAMPLE AS WAV (p. 140), where

you can save the audio phrase to disk in WAV format.

2 Save Sample As AIFF

Displays the SAVE SAMPLE AS AIFF popup (p. 140),

where you can save the audio phrase to disk in AIFF format.

S-158

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 159 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

AUDIO PHRASES

CHOP popup

Here you can divide an audio phrase at desired locations and assign each portion to a pad (to create a patch). You can divide the phrase into as many as ninety-six portions.

■ To access this screen

• [AUDIO PHRASES] ➜ select the audio phrase you want to edit ➜ [F5](Edit) ➜ [F4](Chop)

• [SAMPLING] ➜ turn off “Auto Divide parameter” ➜

[F5](Start) ➜ sampling...

➜ [F5](Stop) ➜

[F3](Quick Assign) ➜ [F1](Chop)

• [IMPORT] ➜ select the wave file you want to load ➜

[F5](Import) ➜ [F3](Quick Assign) ➜ [F1](Chop)

Explanation of each area

Sample

Indicates the sample number and sample name that you are editing.

Zoom level

Indicates the ratio at which the waveform shown in the wave window is being magnified or shrunk.

Wave window

Shows the sample (waveform) that you are editing.

Pad

The divided waveform is assigned to the velocity pads.

You can strike the velocity pads to audition the divided waveform.

No. (number)

This indicates the number of the waveform that was divided by the Chop operation.

Chop Point

Indicates the position of each divided audio phrase selected by No.

Current Point (Dividing line)

Specifies the location at which the sample will be divided. Set this value to divide the sample at the desired point. The dividing line shown in the wave window will move according to the value you specify as the Current

Address.

F-buttons

• [F1](Add Point)

Adds a dividing point. Its location will be the Current

Address.

• You can specify up to 95 dividing points (96 divisions).

• [F2](Clear Point)

Deletes a chop point. The point selected in No. will be deleted.

• You cannot do this if no dividing locations are specified, nor can you delete point number 1.

• [F3](Auto Chop)

The AUTO CHOP popup (p. 160) will appear.

• [F4](Preview)

You can audition the waveform selected in No. by holding down this button.

• [F5](Execute)

Divides the sample at the dividing points you specified,

and then displays the CHOP QUICK ASSIGN popup (p.

161).

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-159

MV-8800_r_e.book 160 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

AUDIO PHRASES

AUTO CHOP popup

Here you can automatically specify dividing point for a sample.

■ To access this screen

• [AUDIO PHRASES] ➜ select the audio phrase you want to edit ➜ [F5](Edit) ➜ [F4](Chop) ➜

[F3](Auto Chop)

• [SAMPLING] ➜ turn off “Auto Divide parameter” ➜

[F5](Start) ➜ sampling... ➜

[F3](Quick Assign) ➜

[F5](Stop) ➜

[F1](Chop) ➜

[F3](Auto Chop)

• [IMPORT] ➜ select the wave file you want to load

[F5](Import) ➜ [F3](Quick Assign) ➜ [F1](Chop)

➜ [F3](Auto Chop)

Explanation of each area

Chop Type

Specifies the conditions by which the sample will be automatically divided.

Value

Level

Beat

Explanation

Divide according to volume.

Divide according to beats based on the

sequencer tempo (p. 79).

Divide into the specified number of equal regions.

Divide X

Level

Specifies the level at which the sample will be divided when Chop Type=Level. Lower settings will cause the sample to be divided more finely.

Range: 1– 6 –10

Beat

Specifies the number of beats by which the sample will be divided when Chop Type=Beat.

Range: (60), (80), (120), (160), (240),

(320), (480), (640), (960),

(1920), (3840)

Times

Specifies the number of regions into which the sample will be divided when Chop Type=Divide X.

Range: 2–16

F-button

• [F5](Execute)

Start specifying the point automatically. Closes the

AUTO CHOP popup.

S-160

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 161 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

AUDIO PHRASES

CHOP QUICK ASSIGN popup

Here you can assign each of the sample divided by Chop to their own pads as partials.

■ To access this screen

• [AUDIO PHRASES] ➜ select the audio phrase you want to edit ➜ [F5](Edit) ➜ [F4](Chop) ➜

[F5](AsgnToPatch)

• [SAMPLING] ➜ turn off “Auto Divide parameter” ➜

[F5](Start) ➜ sampling... ➜

[F3](Quick Assign) ➜

[F5](Stop) ➜

[F1](Chop) ➜

[F5](AsgnToPatch)

• [IMPORT] ➜ select the wave file you want to load

[F5](Import) ➜ [F3](Quick Assign) ➜ [F1](Chop)

➜ [F5](AsgnToPatch)

Explanation of each area

Velocity Pad

Indicates the state of the pads in the current pad bank.

State Explanation

A partial is assigned to the pad.

No assignment.

A partial is assigned to the velocity pad shown in the frame.

Part

Selects the instrument number to which the divided sample will be assigned.

Range: 1 –16

Assign To

Selects the velocity pad to which the partial is assigned.

The keyboard assignment region is also shown here.

Range: 1-01 (A 0) –6-16 (G#8)

Partial name

Indicates the name of the assigned partial.

• The last four characters are automatically assigned as

“Cp**” (** is each different number).

F-button

• [F5](Execute)

Assigns the partial to the velocity pad you specified.

• When making automatic assignments, a confirmation message will appear if a pad to which a sample is already assigned would be overwritten.

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-161

MV-8800_r_e.book 162 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

PROJECT

Here you can manage projects and make project settings.

PROJECT MENU screen

This menu screen lets you select project-related items.

■ To access this screen

• [PROJECT]

Explanation of each area

RENAME PROJ (Rename project)

Displays the EDIT NAME popup (p. 3) where you can

assign a name to the project.

SET PROJ PROTECTION

(Set project protection)

Displays the SET PROJECT PROTECTION screen (p.

163).

LOAD PROJ (Load project)

Displays the LOAD PROJECT screen (p. 164).

SAVE PROJ (Save current project)

Displays the SAVE PROJECT popup.

SAVE AS NEW PROJ (Save as new project)

Displays SAVE AS NEW PROJECT popup (p. 165).

CREATE NEW PROJ (Create new project)

Displays the CREATE NEW PROJECT screen (p. 166).

DELETE PROJ (Delete project)

Displays the DELETE PROJECT screen (p. 168).

SAMPLE MANAGER

Displays the SAMPLE MANAGER screen (p. 169).

BACKUP TO CD (Backup current project to CD)

Displays BACKUP PROJECT TO CD screen (p. 170).

RECOVER FROM CD (Recover project from CD)

Displays RECOVER PROJECT FROM CD popup (p.

171).

F-buttons

The function of the F-buttons will depend on the location of the cursor.

■ When the cursor is in the upper row

• [F1](Name)

Displays the EDIT NAME popup (p. 3).

• [F2](Protect)

Displays the SET PROJECT PROTECTION screen (p.

163).

• [F3](Load)

Displays the LOAD PROJECT screen (p. 164).

• [F4](Save)

Displays the SAVE PROJECT popup.

• [F5](SaveAs)

Displays SAVE AS NEW PROJECT popup (p. 165).

When the cursor is in the lower row

• [F1](Create)

Displays the CREATE NEW PROJECT screen (p. 166).

• [F2](Delete)

Displays the DELETE PROJECT screen (p. 168).

• [F3](SmplMgr)

Displays the SAMPLE MANAGER screen (p. 169).

• [F4](Backup)

Displays BACKUP PROJECT TO CD screen (p. 170).

• [F5](Recover)

Displays RECOVER PROJECT FROM CD popup (p. 171).

S-162

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 163 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

PROJECT

SET PROJECT PROTECTION screen

Here you can protect a project saved on disk from being overwritten or deleted.

■ To access this screen

• [PROJECT] ➜ icons ➜ move the cursor to the upper row of

[F2](Protect)

Explanation of each area

Project List

Displays the protect status of the project. Projects with a lock symbol are protected.

Name

Displays the project name at the cursor in project list.

Wave Size

Shows the wave size (the amount of sample data) for the project at the cursor location.

F-buttons

• [F4](Protect On)

Protects the project at the cursor location.

• [F5](Protect Off)

Defeats the protect setting for the project at the cursor location.

• A protected project cannot be overwritten or deleted.

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-163

MV-8800_r_e.book 164 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

PROJECT

LOAD PROJECT screen

Here you can load a project.

■ To access this screen

• [PROJECT] ➜ move the cursor to the upper row of icons ➜ [F3](Load)

Explanation of each area

Project list

This area lists the saved projects. The project selected by the cursor is highlighted.

Name

This area shows the names of the saved projects.

Wave Size

Shows the wave size (the amount of sample data) for the project at the cursor location.

F-button

• [F5](Execute)

Loads the project selected by the cursor.

S-164

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 165 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

PROJECT

SAVE AS NEW PROJECT popup

Here you can save the current project under a different project name.

■ To access this screen

• [PROJECT] ➜ move the cursor to the upper row of icons ➜ [F5](SaveAs)

Explanation of each area

Project Name

Specify a new project name.

F-buttons

• [F1](History)

Displays the HISTORY popup. You can recall (and re-input) up to the ten most recent names you input in the EDIT NAME popup since turning on the power.

Selects the name at the cursor in the history list then press [ENTER].

• [F2](Insert Space)

Inserts a space at the cursor location.

• [F3](Delete)

Deletes the character at the cursor location. Characters at the right of the cursor will be moved forward to fill the gap.

• [F4](A

➜ a/a

A)

Switches the character at the cursor location between uppercase and lowercase.

• [F5](OK)

The project will be saved.

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-165

MV-8800_r_e.book 166 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

PROJECT

CREATE NEW PROJECT screen

Here you can create a new project.

■ To access this screen

• [PROJECT] ➜ icons ➜ move the cursor to the lower row of

[F1](Create)

Explanation of each area

Copy From Source Project

You can copy samples or various parameters from an existing project to the newly created project.

Use [F4](Select Proj) to select the project that contains the samples or parameters you want to copy, and add a check mark ( ✔ ) to the items you want to copy.

You can choose to copy the following items.

Options Explanation

Current Song Instruments instruments and samples of current song

Current Song Effects

Audio Phrases

Patterns

Patch effects settings of current song audio phrases and samples patterns patch library and samples

MFX

MIDI Clip

Delay/Chorus

Reverb

Mastering Toolkit

MFX library

MIDI clip library

Delay/Chorus library

Reverb library

Mastering Toolkit library

F-buttons

• [F4](Select Proj)

Displays the SELECT SOURCE PROJECT popup (p.

167).

• [F5](Execute)

Creates the project.

S-166

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 167 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

PROJECT

SELECT SOURCE PROJECT popup

Here you can select a project from which to copy samples or parameters when creating a new project.

■ To access this screen

• [PROJECT] ➜ move the cursor to the lower row of icons ➜ [F1](Create) ➜ [F4](Select Proj)

Explanation of each area

Project list

Displays the list of the projects saved on the hard disk.

F-button

• [F5](Select)

Selects the project selected by the cursor as the copy-source project.

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-167

MV-8800_r_e.book 168 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

PROJECT

DELETE PROJECT screen

Here you can delete an unwanted project.

■ To access this screen

• [PROJECT] ➜ move the cursor to the lower row of icons ➜ [F2](Delete)

Explanation of each area

Project list

This area lists the saved projects. The project selected by the cursor is highlighted.

Name

This is the name of the saved project.

Wave Size

Shows the wave size (the amount of sample data) for the project at the cursor location.

F-button

• [F5](Execute)

Deletes the project selected by the cursor.

S-168

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 169 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

PROJECT

SAMPLE MANAGER screen

Here you can manage the samples used by the current project.

■ To access this screen

• [PROJECT] ➜ move the cursor to the lower row of icons ➜ [F3](SmplMgr)

Explanation of each area

Wave Window

Displays the waveform of the sample number that’s selected in the sample list.

No. (number)

This is a unique number assigned to each saved sample.

Name

Shows the name of the sample.

Wave Size

Shows the number of channels in the sample (monaural or stereo).

Org Key (Original Key)

Shows the original key specified for each sample.

Size

Shows the size of the sample.

Sample List

The samples used by the project are listed here. The waveform of the highlighted sample is shown in the wave window.

Category

This shows the category that was selected in the

SELECT CATEGORY popup (p. 4). Only the selected

category will be shown in the list.

F-buttons

• [F1](Quick Assign)

Displays the Select Quick Assign message (p. 213).

• [F2](Sample Prm)

Displays the SAMPLE PARAMETER popup (p. 131).

• [F3](Mark On/Off)

Marks or unmarks the sample.

• [F4](Preview)

Auditions the currently highlighted sample while you hold down the button.

• [F5](Command)

Displays the SELECT SAMPLE EDIT COMMAND popup

(p. 132).

• [MENU]

Displays the MENU popup.

Menu items

1 Optimize

Deletes the unused samples.

2 All Mark

Marks or unmarks all samples.

3 Category...

Displays the SELECT CATEGORY popup (p. 4).

4 Save Sample As WAV

Displays the SAVE SAMPLE AS WAV popup (p. 140),

where you can save the sample to disk in WAV format.

5 Save Sample As AIFF

Displays the SAVE SAMPLE AS AIFF popup (p. 140),

where you can save the sample to disk in AIFF format.

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-169

MV-8800_r_e.book 170 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

PROJECT

BACKUP PROJECT TO CD screen

Here you can backup the current project to a CD-R/RW disc.

■ To access this screen

• [PROJECT] ➜ move the cursor to the lower row of icons ➜ [F4](Backup)

Explanation of each area

Project list

This area lists the saved projects. The project selected by the cursor is highlighted.

Name

This area shows the names of the project selected by the cursor.

Wave Size

Shows the wave size (the amount of sample data) for the project at the cursor location.

F-button

• [F5](Execute)

Backs-up the project selected by the cursor.

S-170

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 171 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

PROJECT

RECOVER PROJECT FROM CD popup

Here you can recover (restore) a backed-up project from CD into the MV-8800 with the name you specify.

■ To access this screen

• [PROJECT] ➜ move the cursor to the upper row of icons ➜ [F5](Recover)

Explanation of each area

New Project on Hard disk

Specify a new project name when recovering backed-up data to the hard disk.

F-buttons

• [F1](History)

Displays the HISTORY popup. You can recall (and re-input) up to the ten most recent names you input in the EDIT NAME popup since turning on the power.

Selects the name at the cursor in the history list then press [F5](OK).

• [F2](Insert Space)

Inserts a space at the cursor location.

• [F3](Delete)

Deletes the character at the cursor location. Characters at the right of the cursor will be moved forward to fill the gap.

• [F4](A

➜ a/a

A)

Switches the character at the cursor location between uppercase and lowercase.

• [F5](Execute)

The project that was backed up to CD will be written back to the hard disk.

After you’ve recovered the project back to the hard disk,

you can use the LOAD PROJECT screen (p. 164) to

make that project the current project.

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-171

MV-8800_r_e.book 172 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SYSTEM

Here you can make system settings for the MV-8800.

SYSTEM MENU screen

This is the menu screen from which you can make MV-8800 system settings.

■ To access this screen

• [SYSTEM]

Explanation of each area

GLOBAL

Displays the GLOBAL screen (p. 173).

PAD/PANEL

Displays the PAD screen (p. 174) or PANEL screen (p.

175).

MIDI

Displays the MIDI screen (p. 177).

V-LINK

Displays the V-LINK screen (p. 179).

SYSTEM INFO

Displays the SYSTEM INFORMATION screen (p. 181).

SLIDER

Displays the ASSIGNABLE SLIDER screen (p. 182).

R-BUS

Displays the R-BUS screen (p. 183).

DISPLAY/MOUSE

Displays the DISPLAY/MOUSE screen (p. 184).

PIX JAM

Displays the PIX JAM screen (p. 185).

F-buttons

• The function of the F-buttons will depend on the location of the cursor.

When the cursor is in the upper row

• [F1](Global)

Displays the GLOBAL screen (p. 173).

• [F2](Pad/Panel)

Displays the PAD screen (p. 174).

• [F3](MIDI)

Displays the MIDI screen (p. 177).

• [F4](V-LINK)

Displays the V-LINK screen (p. 179).

• [F5](SysInfo)

Displays the SYSTEM INFORMATION screen (p. 181).

When the cursor is in the upper row

• [F1](Slider)

Displays the ASSIGNABLE SLIDER screen (p. 182).

• [F2](R-BUS)

Displays the R-BUS screen (p. 183).

• [F3](Disp/Mouse)

Displays the DISPLAY/MOUSE screen (p. 184).

• [F4](Pix Jam)

Displays the PIX JAM screen (p. 185).

S-172

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 173 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SYSTEM

GLOBAL screen

Here you can make settings for the overall system of the MV-8800.

■ To access this screen

• [SYSTEM] ➜ move the cursor to the upper row of icons ➜ [F1](Global)

Explanation of each area

Input Select

Selects the input source for sampling or recording.

Value

Analog

Sampling source

Analog input jack (stereo)

Analog(L+R) ANALOG INPUT jack (Lch and Rch mixed to monaural)

Analog(L) ANALOG INPUT jack (Lch only, monaural)

Sampler Output Gain

Adjusts the level (volume) at which the sample will play.

Range: -12, -9 , -6, -3, 0 dB

Digital Output Select

Selects the audio signal that will be output from the

DIGITAL output jack.

Value

Master

Output signal

The same signal as the Master output will be output.

:

MLT1/2 The multi output bus 1/2 signal will be output.

:

MLT7/8 The multi output bus 7/8 signal will be output.

Digital Out Copy Protect

Allows you to prohibit subsequent digital copying from media that you digitally recorded from the MV-8800 onto a digitally-connected MD recorder or similar device.

Value Explanation

Off The digital output jack will output a signal without copy-protect flags.

On The digital output jack will output a signal with copy-protect flags. It will not be possible to copy this data from the recorded media via a digital connection onto an MD or DAT.

Master Tune

Adjusts the overall tuning of the MV-8800. The displayed value is the frequency of the A4 key (middle A).

Range: 415.3– 440.0

–466.2

• If an audio event whose BPM Sync parameter is Off has been recorded on an audio track, adjusting the Master

Tune parameter will cause the playback timing to drift.

Preview Length

Specifies the playing time for Preview Playback (PREVIEW

[TO ( )] / [FROM( )]) in steps of 0.1 seconds.

Range: 0.1– 1.0

–10.0 sec

HD Format Protect

Protects the hard disk from being formatted. When the power is turned on, this setting will automatically be On.

Value Explanation

Off It will be possible to format the hard disk. Turn this parameter Off if you want to format the hard disk.

On It will not be possible to format the hard disk. When the power is turned on, this setting will be On.

Power Up Mode

Selects the mode in which the sequencer will be at power-up.

Value

Song

Pattern

Explanation

At power-up, the sequencer will be in Song mode.

(The SONG screen will appear.)

At power-up, the sequencer will be in Pattern mode.

(The PATTERN screen will appear.)

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-173

MV-8800_r_e.book 174 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SYSTEM

PAD screen

Here you can make settings for the velocity pads.

■ To access this screen

• [SYSTEM] ➜ icons ➜

move the cursor to the upper row of

[F2](Pad/Panel)

Explanation of each area

Pad Sens (Pad Sensitivity)

Specifies the sensitivity of the top panel velocity pads.

Value

Light

Medium heavy

Explanation

Even a relatively light touch will produce high velocities.

Mid-way between the Light and Heavy settings.

You will need to strike the pad fairly strongly in order to produce high velocities. This means that it will be easier to express small differences when playing lower velocities.

Pad Trigger Threshold

Specifies that the pads will respond only to strikes that are stronger than a certain level. For example if striking one pad causes a different pad to sound as well, you can adjust this setting to prevent false triggering caused by vibration picked up by the other pad. Lower threshold

(i.e., higher sensitivity) settings allow the pads to respond to weaker strikes.

Range: 0 –15

Fixed Velocity Level

Specifies the velocity level at which the pads will be fixed if the top panel [FIXED VELOCITY] is turned on.

Range: 1– 127

Pad Aftertouch Type

Switches the aftertouch mode of the velocity pads. You can select either “Channel Aftertouch” which applies the effect to the entire part, or “Polyphonic Aftertouch” which applies individually to each velocity pad.

Value

Channel

Poly

Explanation

Channel aftertouch will be transmitted.

Polyphonic aftertouch will be transmitted.

Pad Aftertouch Sens

Specifies the aftertouch sensitivity. Lowering this setting will lower the sensitivity, meaning that you will need to press harder to produce an aftertouch effect. With a setting of Off, aftertouch will not be transmitted.

Range: Off , 1–7

Pad Roll Interval

Specifies the spacing of the roll when you use the pads to play a roll.

Range: (30), (40), (60) , (80), (120),

(160), (240), (320), (480), (640),

(960)

F-buttons

• [F1](Pad)

Displays the PAD screen (this screen).

• [F2](Panel)

Displays the PANEL screen (p. 175).

S-174

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 175 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SYSTEM

PANEL screen

Here you can make settings for the top panel buttons, knobs, and sliders.

■ To access this screen

• [SYSTEM] ➜ icons ➜

move the cursor to the upper row of

[F2](Pad/Panel) ➜ [F2](Panel)

Explanation of each area

Shift Lock

Specifies how the Shift button will operate.

Value Explanation

Off The Shift button will be On and the [SHIFT] indicator will light only while you hold down [SHIFT].

On The Shift button will turn On when you press [SHIFT], and will remain On until you press [SHIFT] again.

Once The Shift button will turn On when you press [SHIFT], and will turn Off when you execute a function.

Foot Switch

Specifies the function of a separately sold foot switch

(e.g., DP-2, BOSS FS-5U).

Value

Play/Stop

Damper

Punch I/O

Explanation

Play and Stop will alternately occur each time you press the foot switch.

The foot switch will function as the damper pedal of a piano; it will transmit control change number

64 (Hold).

The foot switch will switch between Recording and Playback during manual punch-in recording.

Tap Tempo The tempo will be specified by the interval at which you press the foot switch.

* Turn the Tap Tempo parameter On.

Marker Set The foot switch will function as [MARKER SET].

A marker will be recorded each time you press the foot switch.

Marker Next The foot switch will function as [SHIFT] + STEP

[ ](MARKER). The current time location will move to the next marker.

Marker Prev The foot switch will function as [SHIFT] + STEP

[ ](MARKER). The current time location will move to the previous marker.

Event Next The foot switch will function as [SHIFT] + MEAS

[ ](EVENT). The current time location will move to the next event.

Value Explanation

Event Prev The foot switch will function as [SHIFT] + MEAS

[ ](EVENT). The current time location will move to the previous event.

Foot Switch Polarity

Switches the polarity of the foot switch.

Value

Standard

Reverse

Explanation

Select this setting when using a Roland foot switch (without a polarity switch).

Select this setting if the foot switch operates in the opposite way from what you expect when pressed or released.

Slider Mode / Knob Mode

As you switch screens or perform various operations, the positions of the top panel sliders and knobs may no longer match the actual values of the parameters they are controlling. This setting specifies how the sliders or knobs will operate in such cases.

Value

Null

Jump

Relative

Explanation

The value will not change until the slider/knob position matches the actual value. In order to control the value, you must first move the slider/knob to the actual value.

When you operate a slider/knob, the parameter will immediately change to the corresponding value.

Moving the slider/knob will increase or decrease the value relative to the current value.

Tap Tempo

Specifies the Tap Tempo function of the [BPM/TAP] button.

Value

Off

On

Explanation

The Tap Tempo function will not be used.

The tempo will be set by the interval at which you press [BPM/TAP].

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-175

MV-8800_r_e.book 176 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SYSTEM

Tap Resolution

Specifies the beat interval by which the tempo will be set when you use the Tap Tempo function.

Value

(120)

(240)

(480)

Explanation

Press [BPM/TAP] at 16th notes of the tempo you want to set.

Press [BPM/TAP] at eighth notes of the tempo you want to set.

Press [BPM/TAP] at quarter notes of the tempo you want to set.

F-buttons

• [F1](Pad)

Displays the PAD screen (p. 174).

• [F2](Panel)

Displays the PANEL screen (this screen).

S-176

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 177 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

MIDI screen

Here you can make MIDI settings.

SYSTEM

■ To access this screen

• [SYSTEM] ➜ move the cursor to the upper row of icons ➜ [F3](MIDI)

Explanation of each area

Device ID

This is a number used to distinguish between multiple

MV-8800 units connected to the same MIDI line. In order to transmit and receive system exclusive messages, the two units must be set to the same device ID.

Range: 1 –32

• The MV-8800 does not transmit exclusive messages.

However it does transmit MTC (MIDI Time Code) and MMC

(MIDI Machine Control).

Tx Active Sensing (Transmit Active Sensing)

Specifies whether Active Sensing messages will be transmitted on the MIDI line. This allows a receiving device to check the connection state.

Value

Off

On

Explanation

Active Sensing will not be transmitted.

Active Sensing will be transmitted.

Multi Timbre Sampler Mode

This setting specifies whether the MV-8800’s sound generator will be played by the internal sequencer or by messages received from MIDI IN.

Value

Off

On

Explanation

Performance data from the velocity pads and MIDI

IN is sent to the sequencer section.

Performance data from the velocity pads is sent from MIDI OUT. Performance data from MIDI IN is sent directly to the instrument section.

Pad Tx Channel (Pad Transmit Channel)

Specifies the MIDI connector and channel on which performance data from the velocity pads will be transmitted when Multi Timbre Sample Mode is On.

Value

A-1

:

A-16

B-1

:

B-16

R-1

:

R-16

Explanation

Messages will be transmitted from MIDI connector

A on channel 1.

:

Messages will be transmitted from MIDI connector

A on channel 16.

:

Messages will be transmitted from MIDI connector

B on channel 1.

Messages will be transmitted from MIDI connector

B on channel 16.

Messages will be transmitted from R-BUS connector on channel 1.

:

Messages will be transmitted from R-BUS connector on channel 16.

Audio Phrase Rx Channel

You can play audio phrases by receiving MIDI note messages from an external MIDI device. Here you can specify the MIDI channel on which MIDI note messages will be received.

Value

Off

1–16

Explanation

MIDI note messages will not play audio phrases.

MIDI note messages on the specified MIDI channel will play audio phrases.

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-177

MV-8800_r_e.book 178 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SYSTEM

MFX Rx Channel

You can control MFX parameters (such as playing the analog modeling bass) by receiving MIDI messages from an external MIDI device.

This specifies the MIDI channel on which MIDI messages will be received.

Value Explanation

Off

1–16

MIDI messages will not be received to control MFX.

MIDI messages can be received to control MFX.

● The following MIDI messages can be received to control the results shown.

MIDI message

Control change

(numbers 16–18)

Result

Control the MFX parameter assigned to the C1–C3 knobs

● The following messages are valid if the analog modeling bass algorithm is selected.

MIDI message

Note-on/off

Control change (number 1)

Pitch bend

Result

Start/stop the note

Modulation

Pitch bend

* If you set the MFX Rx Channel and the Audio Phrase Rx

Channel to the same MIDI channel number, the MFX Rx

Channel setting will be invalid.

S-178

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 179 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SYSTEM

V-LINK screen

Here you can make setting for using V-LINK to perform music and video together.

■ To access this screen

• [SYSTEM] ➜ move the cursor to the upper row of icons ➜ [F4](V-LINK)

• [SHIFT] + [V-LINK]

Explanation of each area

Control Channel

Specifies the MIDI connector and channel used to control the video clips, color Cb/Cr, brightness, and video effect switching on a connected V-LINK device.

Range: A-1–A-16, B-1– B-16 , R-1–R-16

Slider1–8

Here you can specify the video effect on your V-LINK device that will be controlled by sliders 1–8.

Parameters prefixed by “MD:” are MD-P1 parameters.

Range:

Off, Disolve Time, Color Cb Ctrl, Color Cr Ctrl,

Brightness Ctrl, VFX1 Ctrl, VFX2 Ctrl, VFX3 Ctrl, VFX4,

Ctrl, Fade Ctrl, MD:ColorEQ Fore, MD:ColorEQ Back,

MD:Speed Knob, MD:Total Fader, MD:Cross Fader,

MD:Assign Knob, MD:Visual Knob, MD:Total Select,

MD:FX Select, MD:Play Pos, MD:LoopStartPos,

MD:LoopEndPos, MD:LayerModeSel

Local Switch

Specifies whether instruments, audio phrases, or patterns will also be played at the same time as V-LINK clip change messages when you press a velocity pad.

Value

Off

On

Explanation

You won’t be able to play instruments, audio phrases, or patterns. Nor will you be able to record your performance on a track.

You will be able to play instruments, audio phrases, and patterns. You will also be able to record your performance on a track.

F-buttons

• [F1](Master)

Displays the V-LINK screen (this screen).

• [F2](Slave)

Displays the V-LINK (SLAVE) screen (p. 180).

• [F4](Reset Clip)

Turn off the video clips (solid black).

• [F5](Reset All)

The effect applied to the image will be reset, and brightness, color distance, etc. will all return to the default value.

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-179

MV-8800_r_e.book 180 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SYSTEM

V-LINK (SLAVE) screen

Here you can make settings so that an external V-LINK compatible device (the V-LINK master) can output an image from the MV-8800’s VGA OUT connector.

■ To access this screen

• [SYSTEM] ➜ move the cursor to the upper row of icons ➜ [F4](V-LINK) ➜ [F2](Slave)

• [SHIFT] + [V-LINK] ➜ [F2](Slave)

Explanation of each area

Rx Select

Specifies the connector at which V-LINK ON messages from an external V-LINK device (the V-LINK master) will be received.

Range: Off , MIDI, R-BUS

Rx Sw

This is an on/off switch for V-LINK slave functionality.

Normally, this will be switched automatically in response to V-LINK ON messages and V-LINK OFF messages sent from an external V-LINK device.

Range: Off , On

Rx Channel

Specifies the MIDI channel on which V-LINK messages will be received.

Range: 1 –16, Off

Note Mode

Specifies whether images can also be switched by incoming note messages.

Range: Off , On

• The table below shows the relationship between the note messages that can be received and the images that are switched.

Note Message

–20 (–G#0)

21 (A 0)

22 (A#0)

:

36 (C 2)

37 (C#2)

38 (D 2)

:

52 (E 3)

:

127

Velocity pad number to which an image is assigned

No switch will occur.

1

2

:

16

1

2

:

16

:

11

F-buttons

• [F1](Master)

Displays the V-LINK screen (p. 179).

• [F2](Slave)

Displays the V-LINK(SLAVE) screen (this screen).

• [F5](V-LINK Rx Sw)

Turns the Rx Sw parameter on/off.

S-180

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 181 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SYSTEM

SYSTEM INFORMATION screen

Here you can check the state of the MV-8800’s system.

■ To access this screen

• [SYSTEM] ➜ move the cursor to the upper row of icons ➜ [F5](SysInfo)

Explanation of each area

Version

Indicates the MV-8800’s software version.

DIMM (Memory module) Size

Indicates the amount of memory installed in the

MV-8800.

• When shipped from the factory, a 128 MB DIMM is installed.

• The DIMM holds wave data and event data.

Wave Memory

Indicates the amount of wave data stored in the DIMM, both numerically and as a graph.

Free capacity

F-buttons

• [F1](DIMM Diag)

Diagnoses the installed memory module.

For details, refer to “Testing the installed memory”

(Owner’s Manual; p.321).

• [F3](Initialize)

Restores all the MV-8800’s system parameters to their factory-set state. A confirmation message “Initialize all system parameters, OK?” will appear.

Button

[F1](No)

[F5](Yes)

[EXIT]

Explanation

To cancel without initializing.

To initialize the parameters. When you execute Initialize, all system parameters will be initialized to their factory-set state.

To cancel without initializing.

used unused

Sequence Memory

Indicates the amount of data currently in memory, both numerically and as a graph.

Free capacity used unused

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-181

MV-8800_r_e.book 182 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SYSTEM

ASSIGNABLE SLIDER screen

Here you can make settings for transmitting control change messages from the top panel sliders.

■ To access this screen

• [SYSTEM] ➜ move the cursor to the lower row of icons ➜ [F1](Slider)

• [SHIFT] + [ASSIGNABLE SLIDER]

• When you press [ASSIGNABLE SLIDER] to make the indicator light, the sliders will be in ASSIGNABLE SLIDER mode (they will transmit control changes).

Explanation of each area

Control Number

Specifies the control number assigned to each slider.

When the [ASSIGNABLE SLIDER] indicator is lit, operating the sliders will transmit the MIDI control change messages that are assigned.

Slider

Slider 1

Slider 2

Slider 3

Slider 4

Slider 5

Slider 6

Slider 7

Slider 8

Range

0– 7 (Volume)–119

0– 10 (Panpot)–119

0– 91 (Reverb Send Level)–119

0– 93 (Chorus Send Level)–119

0– 74 (Cutoff Frequencey)–119

0– 71 (Resonance)–119

0– 73 (Attack Time)–119

0– 72 (Release Time)–119

S-182

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 183 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SYSTEM

R-BUS screen

In this screen you can make R-BUS settings.

■ To access this screen

• [SYSTEM] ➜ move the cursor to the lower row of icons ➜ [F2](R-BUS)

Explanation of each area

Word Clock

Specifies the word clock that the MV-8800 will use when an external device and the MV-8800 are connected via

R-BUS to transfer digital audio.

Value

Internal

External

Explanation

The MV-8800 will operate using its own internal clock.

The MV-8800 will operate using the clock supplied from the external device connected to R-BUS.

Message Type

Specifies the type of messages used to communicate between R-BUS devices when the MV-8800 is connected to an external device via R-BUS.

R-BUS device

VS series unit (or other device) with an

R-BUS connector

MV-8800

DIF-AT24

Value Explanation

R-BUS Choose this setting if you want to use R-BUS to transfer digital audio and to synchronize operation with an

R-BUS device using MMC or

MTC.

MIDI Choose this setting if you’ve connected a DIF-AT24 (sold separately) and want to use the MIDI IN/OUT connectors of the DIF-AT24, or if you’ve connected two MV-8800 units to each other.

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-183

MV-8800_r_e.book 184 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SYSTEM

DISPLAY/MOUSE screen

In this screen you can make settings for the display (internal and external) and mouse.

■ To access this screen

• [SYSTEM] ➜ move the cursor to the lower row of icons ➜ [F3](Disp/Mouse)

Explanation of each area

Color Theme

This lets you choose the color theme shown on the external display. Choose the color theme that suits your taste. You can separately choose color themes for Song mode and Pattern mode.

Value

Blue (default setting for Song mode), Mint, Purple, Grass,

Violet (default setting for Pattern mode), Chocolate, Slate,

Orchid, Tan, Magenta, MossGreen, Copper

Screen Saver Type

Specifies the type of screen saver.

Range: 1 –6

Time (Screen Saver Time)

Set the time (minutes) until the screen saver begins working.

If this is Off, the screen saver will not appear.

Range: Off, 1– 5 –60Min

VGA Refresh Rate

Specifies the vertical scanning frequency transmitted to your external display.

Range: 60 , 67, 72, 75 Hz

• If you specify a refresh rate not supported by your external display, the screen will ripple and you risk damaging the external display.

• Depending on the settings for H Position and V Position, the image shown in the external display may be distorted. If your external display has the ability to adjust the position of the image, you should first make adjustments on your external display.

H Position / V Position

Adjust the position of the image shown on a connected external display.

Refresh Rate

60

67

72

75

H Position

-3– 0 –4

-5– 0 –5

-5– 0 –5

-5– 0 –5

Value

V Position

-14– 0 –14

-21– 0 –22

-18– 0 –19

-8– 0 –9

Mouse Pointer Speed

Specifies the movement sensitivity of the mouse pointer.

Range: 1 (slow)– 5 –9 (fast)

F-buttons

• [F4](Preview)

Previews the operation of the screen saver you’ve specified for Screen Saver Type ( ).

To stop the preview, press any button or move the mouse slightly.

• [F5](LCD ↔ VGA)

Switches the MV-8800’s operating screen (LCD/VGA).

S-184

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 185 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SYSTEM

PIX JAM screen

Here you can output images from VGA OUT in synchronization with your performance on the velocity pads.

■ To access this screen

• [SYSTEM] ➜ move the cursor to the lower row of icons ➜ [F4](Pix Jam)

Explanation of each area

Velocity Pads

This area shows how images are assigned to the velocity pads. The image assigned to each velocity pad is shown as a thumbnail.

F-button

• [F5](Pix Assign)

Displays the PIX ASSIGN screen (p. 186).

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-185

MV-8800_r_e.book 186 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SYSTEM

PIX ASSIGN screen

Here you can assign the desired images to the velocity pads.

■ To access this screen

• [SYSTEM] ➜ move the cursor to the lower row of icons ➜ [F4](Pix Jam) ➜ [F5](Pix Assign)

Explanation of each area

Current Drive

Shows the currently selected drive with its icon.

Thumbnail

This is a thumbnail of the image selected in the PIX JAM screen (p. 185).

Velocity Pads

This area show the velocity pad numbers selected in the

PIX JAM screen (p. 185). Strike a velocity pad to switch

the pad you’re editing.

File List

Here you can select the image that you want to assign to the velocity pad.

F-buttons

• [F1](Select Drive)

Displays the SELECT DRIVE popup (p. 6), where you

can switch the drive from which to select patches.

• [F2](Clear)

Clears the assignment of the image to the selected velocity pad. The message “Assign Clear. Are you sure?” will appear.

A confirmation message of “Assign Clear. Are you sure?” will appear.

Explanation

[F1](No) Cancels the Clear operation.

[F5](Yes) Clears the image assignment.

• [F3](Exchange)

Displays the PIX EXCHANGE popup / PIX COPY popup

(p. 187).

• [F4](Copy)

Displays the PIX EXCHANGE popup / PIX COPY popup

(p. 187).

• [F5](Assign)

Assigns the selected image to the velocity pad.

S-186

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 187 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SYSTEM

PIX EXCHANGE popup / PIX COPY popup

Here you can exchange or copy image assignments between velocity pads.

■ To access this screen

• PIX EXCHANGE

[SYSTEM] ➜ move the cursor to the lower row of icons ➜ [F4](Pix Jam) ➜ [F5](Pix Assign) ➜

[F3](Exchange)

• PIX COPY

[SYSTEM] ➜ move the cursor to the lower row of icons ➜ [F4](Pix Jam) ➜ [F5](Pix Assign) ➜

[F4](Copy)

Explanation of each area

From / To

Use the From parameter and To parameter to specify the numbers of the velocity pads whose image assignments you want to exchange.

From / To

Use the From parameter to specify the velocity pad containing the copy-source image assignment, and the

To parameter to specify the copy-destination velocity pad.

F-button

• [F5](Execute)

Executes the Pix Exchange or Pix Copy operation.

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-187

MV-8800_r_e.book 188 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

DISK/USB

Here you can make settings for the MV-8800’s disk and for USB.

DISK/USB MENU screen

This is the menu screen for disk-related operation.

■ To access this screen

• [DISK/USB]

Explanation of each area

FILE UTILITY

Displays the FILE UTILITY screen (p. 189).

DISK UTILITY

Displays the DISK UTILITY screen (p. 193).

USB

Displays the USB screen (p. 194).

CD PLAYER

Displays the CD PLAYER screen (p. 195).

F-buttons

• [F1](File Utility)

Displays the FILE UTILITY screen (p. 189).

• [F2](Disk Utility)

Displays the DISK UTILITY screen (p. 193).

• [F3](USB)

Displays the USB screen (p. 194).

• [F4](CD Player)

Displays the CD PLAYER screen (p. 195).

S-188

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 189 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

FILE UTILITY screen

Here you can manage files by copying, moving, or deleting them.

■ To access this screen

• [DISK/USB] ➜ [F1](File Utility)

DISK/USB

Explanation of each area

Current drive

Shows the currently selected drive with its icon.

Icon Explanation

Hard disk drive

CD-ROM, Audio CD drive

• CD-ROM format and AUDIO CD format will depend on the type of media inserted in the CD-R/RW drive.

Current drive capacity

Displays the total capacity and free space of the current drive.

Cursor buttons

The cursor buttons that can be operated in the file list are highlighted.

Cursor icon Explanation

You can move the cursor up/down.

You can move the cursor up/down. If this indication is displayed, the cursor is located at a folder (highlighted). Press the right cursor key to view the contents of the folder

(i.e., to switch folders).

You can move the cursor up/down. If this indication is displayed, you can press the left cursor button to return to the parent folder

(i.e., to switch folders).

Current folder

Displays the name of the currently selected folder.

Name

Displays the name of the saved file. One of the following icons is displayed in front of the file name to indicate the type of file.

Icon Explanation

Waveform data (e.g., WAV file)

Sequence data (e.g., MID file)

Sub-folder

MV-8800 file

Unknown file type

Ext (Extension)

This is a part of the filename, used to indicate the type of file.

Example extension

.WAV

.MID

Explanation

Waveform data (e.g., Windows wave file)

MIDI sequence data (e.g., SMF)

Size

Displays the size of the file.

File list

Lists the files saved. The file selected by the cursor is highlighted.

Sub-folder

This is an area in which files can be stored together. You can use this to organize files by category or purpose. To see the contents of a sub-folder, move the cursor to the sub-folder and press CURSOR [ ].

To return from a sub-folder to the previous folder, press

CURSOR [ ].

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-189

MV-8800_r_e.book 190 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

DISK/USB

F-buttons

• [F1](Select Drive)

Displays the SELECT DRIVE popup (p. 6), where you

can switch the current drive.

• [F3](Rename)

Displays the EDIT NAME popup (p. 3), where you can

edit the name of the file or folder at which the cursor is located.

• [F4](Make Folder)

Displays the EDIT NAME popup (p. 3), where you can

create a new folder inside the current folder.

• [F5](Command)

Displays the SELECT FILE COMMAND popup (p. 191).

S-190

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 191 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

DISK/USB

SELECT FILE COMMAND popup

Here you can select commands for managing files.

■ To access this screen

• [DISK/USB] ➜ [F1](File Utility) ➜ select a file or folder ➜ [F5](Command)

Explanation of each area

1 Copy

Displays the SELECT DESTINATION popup (p. 192),

where you can select the copy-destination folder.

2 Move

Displays the SELECT DESTINATION popup (p. 192),

where you can select the move-destination folder.

3 Delete

Deletes the file or folder.

• There is no way for you to recover deleted data (unless you have previously made a backup of it). Roland accepts no responsibility for the recovery of lost data, nor for any damages that may result from such loss.

• When you delete a folder, a confirmation message will appear if that folder contains any files. If you want to delete all files and folders that are in that folder, press [F5](Yes). If you decide to cancel without deleting, press [F1](No).

F-button

• [F5](Select)

Executes the command selected in the SELECT

COMMAND menu.

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-191

MV-8800_r_e.book 192 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

DISK/USB

SELECT DESTINATION popup

Here you can specify the folder to which the file will be copied or moved.

■ To access this screen

• [DISK/USB] ➜ [F1](File Utility) ➜ select a file or folder) ➜ [F5](Command)

➜ [F5](Select)

➜ select “Copy” or “Move”

Explanation of each area

Current drive

Shows the currently selected drive with its icon.

Current drive capacity

Displays the total capacity and free space of the current drive.

Cursor buttons

The cursor buttons that can be operated in the file list are highlighted.

Cursor icon

Explanation

You can move the cursor up/down.

You can move the cursor up/down. If this indication is displayed, the cursor is located at a folder

(highlighted). Press the right cursor key to view the contents of the folder (i.e., to switch folders).

You can move the cursor up/down. If this indication is displayed, you can press the left cursor button to return to the parent folder (i.e., to switch folders).

Current folder

Displays the name of the currently selected folder. Folder levels below the root (the top level of the folder structure) are shown by a slash “/” symbol.

Name

Displays the name of the saved file. One of the following icons is displayed in front of the file name to indicate the type of file.

Icon Explanation

Waveform data (e.g., WAV file)

Sequence data (e.g., MID file)

Sub-folder

MV-8800 file

Unknown file type

S-192

MV-8800 Screen Guide

Ext (Extension)

This is a part of the filename, used to indicate the type of file.

File list

Lists the files saved in the current drive. The file selected by the cursor is highlighted.

Sub-folder

This is an area in which files can be stored together.

Select the sub-folder to which you want to copy or move the file. To see the contents of a sub-folder, move the cursor to the sub-folder and press CURSOR [ ].

To return from a sub-folder to the previous folder, press

CURSOR [ ].

F-buttons

• [F1](Select Drive)

Displays the SELECT DRIVE popup (p. 6), where you

can switch the copy- or move-destination drive.

• [F3](Make Folder)

Displays the EDIT NAME popup (p. 3), where you can

create a new folder inside the current folder.

• [F5](Execute)

Copies or moves the file to the specified folder.

MV-8800_r_e.book 193 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

DISK UTILITY screen

Here you can check the disk and perform maintenance.

■ To access this screen

• [DISK/USB] ➜ [F2](Disk Utility)

DISK/USB

Explanation of each screen

Drive list

Lists the drives of the MV-8800. The drive selected by the cursor is highlighted.

Icon Explanation

Hard disk drive

CD-ROM (CD-R/RW drive)

Volume Label

This is the name assigned to the drive.

Drive capacity

Displays the free space of the drive.

F-buttons

• [F3](Format)

Formats the disk.

If you are formatting (erasing) a CD-RW disc, the message “Erase CD-RW” will appear.

F-button Explanation

[F1](No) To cancel without erasing.

[F3](Yes (Quick)) The CD-RW disc will be erased quickly.

[F5](Yes (Full)) The CD-RW disc will be erased completely.

• [F5](Volume Label)

Displays the EDIT NAME popup (p. 3), where you can

assign a name to the disk.

• [F5](VolumeLabel) is displayed if the current drive is the hard disk.

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-193

MV-8800_r_e.book 194 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

DISK/USB

USB screen

This switches the MV-8800 to USB-connection mode, which lets you transfer data between the internal hard disk and your computer.

■ To access this screen

• [DISK/USB] ➜ [F3](USB)

Explanation of each area

Communication status

Graphically indicates the connection status between the

MV-8800 and your computer.

Status Explanation

Disconnected

F-button

• [F5](Connect) / (Disconnect)

If the MV-8800 is not communicating with your computer, this will indicate Connect; press [F5](Connect) to initiate the connection. If the MV-8800 is already communicating with your computer, this will indicate Disconnect; press

[F5](Disconnect) to stop communication.

Connected

• You must connect or disconnect the USB cable while the MV-8800 is powered-off. Never connect or disconnect the USB cable or turn the power off while you are in USB mode. Doing so may damage data or cause malfunctions.

• The MV-8800 can communicate via USB with Windows

Me/2000/XP or later, Mac OS 9.0.4 or later, and Mac OS X

10.2 or later. Also, depending on the type of computer you are using, this may not work correctly even if your computer uses one of the above operating systems.

S-194

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 195 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

CD PLAYER screen

Here you can play back an audio CD.

■ To access this screen

• [DISK/USB] ➜ [F4](CD Player)

DISK/USB

Explanation of each area

Track

Indicates the currently-playing track.

Time

Indicates the elapsed time of the currently-playing track.

• You can press [F1](Display) to switch the time display format. The screen indicates the displayed format as well as the time. The default setting is “Track Time.”

Display format

Track Time

Screen display

Total Time

Track Remain

Total Remain

Displays the current time within the track that is playing.

Displays the total time from the beginning of the CD to the current time location.

Displays the time remaining until the end of the currently-playing track.

Displays the time remaining until the end of the CD.

Track list

Indicates the playing time of each track.

Track Time

Shows track information for the CD. The track selected by the cursor is highlighted. A symbol is shown for the currently-playing track.

F-buttons

• [F1](Display)

Switches the time display format.

• [F2](Reset Peak)

Clears the indicators of the peak hold in the Level meters.

• [F5](Eject)

Press this button to open the CD-R/RW disc tray.

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-195

MV-8800_r_e.book 196 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

MASTERING

Here you can mix down your completed song to a two-track master, and create an audio CD.

MIXDOWN / MASTERING MENU screen

This menu screen lets you switch to Mixdown mode, or select items such as mastering or creating an audio CD.

■ To access this screen

• [MASTERING]

Explanation of each area

MIXDOWN MODE

Turns mixdown mode on/off. A confirmation message will appear.

Button

[F1](No)

[EXIT]

[F5](Yes)

Explanation

If you decide not to enter mixdown mode, press [F1](No) or [EXIT].

To enter mixdown mode, press [F5](Yes). This will indicate On when mixdown mode is Off, and Off when mixdown mode is On.

■ When Mixdown mode is On...

Each screen will indicate “ ✻✻ Mixdown Mode ✻✻ “.

The mixdown mode button will light in the VGA screen.

MASTERING

Displays the SELECT MASTERING SOURCE popup

(p. 198).

CREATE AUDIO CD

Displays the CUE SHEET screen (p. 206).

AUDIO FILE LIST

Displays the AUDIO FILE LIST screen (p. 208).

F-buttons

• [F1](Mixdown)

Turns mixdown mode on/off. A confirmation message will appear.

• [F2](Mastering)

Displays the SELECT MASTERING SOURCE popup

(p. 198).

• [F3](Create CD)

Displays the CUE SHEET screen (p. 206).

• [F4](Audio List)

Displays the AUDIO FILE LIST screen (p. 208).

S-196

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 197 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

MASTERING

LISTEN AUDIO FILE popup

Here you can listen to the result immediately after mixing-down or mastering.

■ To access this screen

• [MASTERING] ➜ [F2](Mastering) ➜ select a file ➜

[F1](Listen)

• [MASTERING] ➜ [F4](Audio List) ➜ select a file ➜

[F1](Listen)

Explanation of each area

Level meter

Indicates the playback level of the audio data (WAV file).

Current time

Indicates the current playback time of the audio data

(WAV file).

Progress bar

Indicates the current playback location of the audio data

(WAV file).

F-button

• [F5](Close)

Stops playback of the audio data (WAV file) and closes

the LISTEN AUDIO FILE popup (this popup).

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-197

MV-8800_r_e.book 198 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

MASTERING

SELECT MASTERING SOURCE popup / SELECT AUDIO FILE popup

Here you can select the audio data (WAV file) to be mastered, or select the audio data (WAV file) that you’re using to make an audio CD.

■ To access this screen

• SELECT MASTERING SOURCE

[MASTERING] ➜ [F2](Mastering)

• SELECT AUDIO FILE

[MASTERING] ➜ [F3](Create CD) ➜ [F1](Insert)

Explanation of each area

Name

Displays the names of the mixed-down or mastered files.

Ext (Extension)

This is part of the filename, and is used to indicate the type of file. The mastering file list shows files with a

.WAV extension.

Time

Indicates the length (playback time) of each audio file.

Audio file list

Displays the stereo audio files that have been mixed-down or mastered. The file at the cursor location is highlighted.

F-buttons

• [F1](Listen)

Displays the LISTEN AUDIO FILE popup (p. 197).

• [F5](Execute)

Selects a file.

S-198

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 199 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

MASTERING

MASTERING screen

Here you can use the mastering tool kit to master an audio file (WAV file).

■ To access this screen

• [MASTERING] ➜ [F2](Mastering) ➜ select a file ➜

[F5](Execute)

Explanation of each area

Mastering Tool Kit

Makes settings for the mastering effects.

• In this screen you can set the Compressor parameters of the mastering tool kit. To set the other parameters of the mastering tool kit (e.g., the Expander and Equalizer

parameters), use the MASTERING TOOL KIT EDIT screen

(p. 202).

Mastering status

Indicates whether the mastering toolkit is off or on. Use

[F3](MTK On/Off) to switch this.

Frequency band division

The mastering tool kit’s Compressor lets you process the high, mid, and low-frequency regions separately.

Band

High

Mid

Low

Explanation

Parameters for the high-frequency band compressor

Parameters for the mid-frequency band compressor

Parameters for the low-frequency band compressor

Attack

This is the Attack Time parameter of the compressor. It specifies the time from when the volume exceeds the value of the Threshold parameter until compression begins.

Range: 0–100 ms

You can use the C1 knob to adjust this.

Since long settings for the Attack parameter may cause distortion, 6 dB of headroom is provided at the output. As necessary, you can adjust the Level parameter of the Mixer block.

Release

This is the Release Time parameter of the compressor. It specifies the time from when the volume falls below the value of the Threshold parameter until compression is not longer applied.

Range: 50–5000 ms

• You can use the C2 knob to adjust this.

Level

Specifies the output level of the compressor.

Range: -80–6 dB

• You can use the C3 knob to adjust this.

Threshold

Specifies the volume at which the compressor will begin to apply.

Range: -24–0 dB

Ratio

Specifies the compression ratio (source signal:output signal) applied by the compressor. This is the proportion by which the output will be reduced when the input level exceeds the value of the Threshold parameter.

Range: 1:1.00–1:16.0, 1:INF

GR (Gain Reduction meter)

Indicates the amount by which the compressor is compressing the level.

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-199

MV-8800_r_e.book 200 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

MASTERING

High Split / Low Split

Specifies the frequency at which the source signal is divided into frequency bands. High Split is the frequency at which the mid- and high-frequency bands are divided.

Low Split is the frequency at which the low- and mid-frequency bands are divided.

Parameter

High Split

Low Split

Range

1.6–16.0 kHz

20–800 Hz

In (Input level meter)

Indicates the level of the source signal being input to the compressor.

Out (Output level meter)

Indicates the output level from the compressor.

F-buttons

• [F2](MTK Library)

Displays the MASTERING TOOL KIT LIBRARY popup

(p. 201).

• [F3](Reset Peak)

Clears the indicators of the peak hold in the Level meters.

• [F4](MTK On/Off)

This is the main switch for the mastering tool kit. Area

(Mastering status) indicates the status of this switch.

• [F5](MTK Edit)

Displays the MASTERING TOOL KIT EDIT screen (p.

202).

S-200

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 201 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

MASTERING

MASTERING TOOL KIT LIBRARY popup

Here you can save and recall settings for the mastering tool kit.

■ To access this screen

• [MASTERING] ➜ [F2](Mastering) ➜ select a file

[F5](Execute) ➜ [F2](MTK Library)

Explanation of each area

Library list

This area lists the mastering tool kit settings that are saved in the library. The mastering tool kit name at the cursor location is highlighted.

No.

Library

U01–U50 User library (rewritable)

P01–P21 Preset library (read only)

Library Preview

Indicates the status of the Preview function. If this is on, the library item selected by the cursor is temporarily enabled. In this case you can press [PLAY ( )]. to audition your audio using the mastering tool kit settings at the cursor location.

F-buttons

• [F1](Write Here)

Saves the current mastering tool kit settings at the cursor location in the library list. Displays the confirmation message.

F-button Explanation

[F1](No) Cancels the operation.

[F5](Yes) Adds the current mastering tool kit settings to the library.

• If you save onto a location that already contains settings, the previous data will be overwritten.

• [F4](Preview)

Turns the library view on/off.

• [F5](Use This)

Recalls the mastering tool kit that is saved at the cursor location in the library list. The current mastering tool kit settings will change.

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-201

MV-8800_r_e.book 202 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

MASTERING

MASTERING TOOL KIT EDIT screen

Here you can edit all the parameters of the mastering tool kit.

■ To access this screen

• [MASTERING] ➜ [F2](Mastering) ➜ select a file

[F5](Execute) ➜ [F5](MTK Edit)

Explanation of each area

Mastering Tool Kit

Here you can make settings for the mastering effects.

Effect block

Shows the internal structure (blocks) of the mastering tool kit. The block you are currently editing is shown by the cursor. Use [F1](Block ▲ ) or [F2](Block ▼ ) to move between blocks.

Block name (EQ)

Indicates the name of the currently selected effect block.

Switches

Indicates the operating status of the currently selected effect block. Use [F5](Sw On/Off) to switch this.

Range: Off, On

Output Level Meter

These indicate the overall volume after the signal has passed through the mastering tool kit.

Control knob

You can assign specific effect parameters to these knobs and control them. The assignments are made in the

KNOB ASSIGN popup (p. 234).

Input EQ

Here you can adjust the tonal character.

G (Gain)

Specifies the amount of boost/cut for each band

(Low/Low-Mid/Hi-Mid/High).

Range: -12–12 dB

S-202

MV-8800 Screen Guide

F (Frequency)

Specifies the center frequency at which each band

(Low/Low-Mid/Hi-Mid/High) will be boosted or cut.

Parameter

Low

Low-Mid

Hi-Mid

High

Range

20–2000 Hz

20–8000 Hz

20–8000 Hz

1.4–20.0 kHz

Q

Specifies the sharpness of the frequency response curve for each band (Low/Low-Mid/Hi-Mid/High).

Range: 0.3–16.0

Type

Specifies the type of equalizer for the Low band and

High band.

Parameter

Shelving

Peaking

Value

Shelving type

Peaking type

• The Q parameter has no effect for bands whose Type is set to Shelving.

Input Gain

Adjusts the overall volume before the signal passes through the equalizer.

Range: -24–12 dB

Output Gain

Adjusts the overall volume after the signal has passed through the equalizer.

Range: -24–12 dB

MV-8800_r_e.book 203 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

Bass Cut Filter

Here you can remove unwanted low-frequency components such as pop noise.

MASTERING

Input

This divides the source signal into low, mid, and high-frequency bands.

Frequency

Specifies the frequency below which unwanted low-frequency components will be cut.

Range: Thru, 20–2000 Hz

Enhancer

This adds sparkle to the sound.

Sensitivity

Specifies degree of the enhancer effect desired.

Range: 0–100

Frequency

Specifies the frequency at which the enhancer begins to apply.

Range: 1.00–10.0 kHz

Mix Level

Adjusts the volume of the enhancer sound.

Range: -24–12 dB

Input Gain

Adjusts the volume before the signal enters the expander or compressor.

Range: -24–12 dB

Detect Time

Delays the source signal that enters the expander or compressor.

Range: 0–10 ms

• With a conventional compressor, there is a brief lag from when the above-threshold level is detected until it is suppressed. However, in this algorithm the input sound is used only for detecting the level, and the actual processing and output is performed on a signal that is delayed by a suitable amount, thus avoiding this problem. The parameter Detect Time specifies the delay time used for this purpose. Using this parameter will produce a time difference between the input and output of the audio signal, so you must exercise caution if you’re using this for any purpose other than mastering (e.g., as a channel insert).

Low Split / High Split

Specifies the frequencies at which the source signal is divided into frequency bands. Low Split is the frequency at which the low and mid-frequency bands are divided.

High Split is the frequency at which the mid and high-frequency bands are divided.

Parameter

Low Split

High Split

Range

20–800 Hz

1.6–16.0 kHz

S-203

MV-8800_r_e.book 204 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

MASTERING

Expander

This expands the dynamic range at a specified ratio.

Compressor

This reduces the output level when the input level exceeds a specified value.

Frequency Band Division

You can apply the expander independently to the high, mid, and low-frequency bands.

Band

High

Mid

Low

Explanation

Parameters for the high-frequency band expander

Parameters for the mid-frequency band expander

Parameters for the low-frequency band expander

Threshold

Specifies the volume at which the expander starts to apply.

Range: -80–0 dB

Ratio

Specifies the proportion (source signal: output signal) by which the expander will expand the dynamic range. This is the proportion by which the output will be reduced when the input level falls below the value of the

Threshold parameter.

Range: 1:1.00–1:16.0, 1:INF

Attack

This is the Attack Time parameter for the expander. It specifies the time from when the volume falls below the value of the Threshold parameter until the expander starts to apply.

Range: 0–100 ms

Release

This is the Release Time parameter for the expander. It specifies the time from when the volume exceeds the value of the Threshold parameter until the expander stops being applied.

Range: 50–5000 ms

Frequency Band Division

You can apply the compressor independently to the high, mid, and low-frequency bands.

Band Explanation

High Parameters for the high-frequency band compressor

Mid

Low

Parameters for the mid-frequency band compressor

Parameters for the low-frequency band compressor

Threshold

Specifies the volume at which the compressor starts to apply.

Range: -24–0 dB

Ratio

Specifies the compression ratio (source signal:output signal) of the compressor. This is the proportion by which the output will be reduced when the input level exceeds the value of the Threshold parameter.

Range: 1:1.00–1:16.0, 1:INF

Attack

This is the Attack Time parameter for the compressor. It specifies the time from when the volume exceeds the value of the Threshold parameter until compression begins.

Range: 0–100 ms

Release

This is the Release Time parameter for the compressor.

It specifies the time from when the volume falls below the value of the Threshold parameter until compression stops.

Range: 50–5000 ms

S-204

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 205 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

Output Mixer

This adjusts the volume of each frequency band.

MASTERING

Output

Here you can make overall output settings.

Level

Adjust the level of each frequency band (Low/Mid/High) after it passes through the expander and compressor.

Range: -80–6 dB

Limiter

This reduces high input levels to keep the signal from distorting.

Threshold

Specifies the volume at which the limiter begins to apply.

Range: -24–0 dB

Attack

Specifies the time from when the input level exceeds the value of the Threshold parameter until the limiter begins to apply.

Range: 0–100 ms

Release

Specifies the time from when the input level falls below the value of the Threshold parameter until the limiter no longer applies.

Range: 50–5000 ms

Soft Clip

Reduces the distortion that can occur when the expander or compressor are applied to an extreme degree.

Range: Off, On

Dither

Smoothes the transition where the sound disappears.

Range: Off, 24–8 bit

F-buttons and menu

• [F1](Block

)

Moves the cursor in the effect block upward.

• [F2](Block

)

Moves the cursor in the effect block downward.

• [F3](Reset Peak)

Clears the indicators of the peak hold in the Level meters.

• [F4](MTK On/Off)

This is the main switch for the mastering tool kit. The On or Off indication is shown at the right of the mastering tool kit name.

• [F5](Sw On/Off)

Switches the current block. The On or Off indication is shown at the right of the block name.

• [MENU]

Displays the MENU popup.

Menu items

1 Knob Assign

Displays the KNOB ASSIGN popup (p. 234).

2 MTK Library

Displays the MASTERING TOOL KIT LIBRARY popup

(p. 201).

3 Edit MTK Name

Displays the EDIT NAME popup (p. 3).

S-205

MV-8800_r_e.book 206 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

MASTERING

CUE SHEET screen

Here you can specify the song order in which the audio files will be written to the CD-R/RW disc.

■ To access this screen

• [MASTERING] ➜ [F3](Create CD)

Explanation of each area

Cue sheet

This lists the song order of the audio files that you will write to the CD-R/RW disc.

Name

Displays the names of the audio files that will be written to the CD-R/RW disc.

Ext (Extension)

This is part of the filename, and is used to indicate the type of file. The CUE SHEET shows files with a .WAV extension.

Time

Indicates the absolute time from the beginning of the

CD-R/RW disc that will be written.

Length

Indicates the length of each audio file.

PreGap

Indicates the time between songs.

Volume of the total audio files

Indicates the size of the audio file that you will write to the CD-R/RW disc.

F-buttons and menu

• [F1](Insert)

Displays the SELECT AUDIO FILE popup (p. 198),

where you can select an audio file that you want to write to CD and add it to the cue sheet at the cursor location.

Songs following the cursor location will be moved back.

S-206

MV-8800 Screen Guide

• [F2](Delete)

Deletes (removes) an unwanted audio file from the cue sheet. The file highlighted by the cursor will be deleted from the cue sheet.

A confirmation message of “Delete file from Cue Sheet.

Are you sure?” will appear.

F-button

[F1](No)

[F5](Yes)

Explanation

To cancel without deleting.

Deletes the audio data (WAV file) from the cue sheet.

• Deleting a file from the cue sheet does not delete the file itself from the hard disk.

• [F3](Move ▲ )

Exchanges the file highlighted by the cursor in the cue sheet with the file above it.

• [F4](Move ▼ )

Exchanges the file highlighted by the cursor in the cue sheet with the file below it.

• [F5] (Write CD)

Starts the writing operation to CD. A confirmation message of “Write CD. Are you sure?” will appear.

F-button

[F1](No)

[F5](Yes)

Explanation

To cancel without writing.

To start the writing operation to CD-R/RW disc.

• [MENU]

Displays the MENU popup.

Menu item

1 Gap Time

Displays the GAP TIME popup (p. 207).

MV-8800_r_e.book 207 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

MASTERING

GAP TIME popup

Here you can specify the default amount of space between the songs that will be recorded to the audio

CD.

■ To access this screen

• [MASTERING] ➜ [F3](Create CD) ➜ [MENU] ➜ select “Gap Time” ➜ [F5](Select)

Explanation of each area

Gap Time

Specifies the length of the gap that will be left between songs when writing the audio CD.

Range: 0– 2 –4 sec

F-buttons

• [F4](SetAll)

The all files will set the specified gap time.

• [F5](Set)

The file highlighted by the cursor will set the specified gap time.

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-207

MV-8800_r_e.book 208 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

MASTERING

AUDIO FILE LIST screen

Here you can audition, rename or delete audio file.

■ To access this screen

• [MASTERING] ➜ [F4](Audio List)

Explanation of each area

Name

Displays the names of the audio files (mixed-down or mastered file).

Ext (Extension)

This is part of the filename, and is used to indicate the type of file. The AUDIO FILE LIST shows files with a

.WAV extension.

Time

Indicates the length (playback time) of each audio file.

Audio file list

Displays the audio files that have been mixed-down or mastered. The file at the cursor location is highlighted.

F-buttons

• [F1](Listen)

Displays the LISTEN AUDIO FILE popup (p. 197).

• [F3](Name)

Displays the EDIT NAME popup (p. 3) where you can

assign a name to the audio file.

• [F5](Delete)

The file highlighted by the cursor will be deleted. A confirmation message “Delete File. Are you sure?” will appear.

F-button

[F1](No)

[F5](Yes)

Explanation

To cancel without deleting.

To delete the file.

• You cannot use Undo (Owner’s Manual; p.166) to recover a deleted audio file.

S-208

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 209 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SAMPLING

Here you can capture audio data by “sampling” it.

SAMPLING screen / RE-SAMPLING screen

Here you can perform sampling or re-sampling.

■ To access this screen

• Sampling

[SAMPLING]

• Re-sampling

[SAMPLING] ➜ [F2](Re-Sampling)

Explanation of each area

Level meter

Indicates the level of the audio input signal. When sampling, adjust this level so that the meter moves in the region of -12–0 dB.

• The sound will distort if the display reaches 0 dB (clip indicator lit).

Sample Type

Specifies the number of channels that will be sampled.

Value

Stereo

Mono

Explanation

Stereo (two channels)

Monaural (one channel)

Input Select

Specifies the input source for sampling.

Value Sampling source

Analog Analog input jack (stereo)

Analog(L+R) ANALOG INPUT jack (Lch and Rch mixed to monaural)

Analog(L) ANALOG INPUT jack (Lch only, monaural)

Start Trigger

Specifies how sampling will begin.

Value Explanation

Manual Sampling will be started manually.

Level Sampling will be triggered by the input level.

Pad

Play

Sampling will begin when you strike a pad.

Sampling will begin when you play back the sequencer.

Level

Specifies the signal level that will initiate sampling if the

Start Trigger parameter is set to Level.

Range: 1– 6

• The Level setting is used only when Start Trigger = Level.

Pre Sample Time

Specifies how much time prior to the actual start of sampling will be captured in the sample when Start

Trigger is set to Level.

Range: 0 , 20, 40, 80, 160, 320, 640, 1000 ms

Routing

Indicates the sampled source.

Value

ANALOG

MIX BUS

Explanation

Analog input (MIC/LINE or PHONO) when Re-Sampling

• To Re-Sampling, press [F2](Re-Sampling).

Stop Trigger

Specifies how sampling will stop.

Value

Manual

Beat

Time

Explanation

Sampling will be stopped manually.

Sampling will stop after the number of beats specified by the Length parameter.

Sampling will stop after the time specified by the Length parameter.

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-209

MV-8800_r_e.book 210 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SAMPLING

Beat

Specifies the time (in units of beats) after which sampling will stop if the Stop Trigger parameter is set to Beat.

Range: 1– 8 –20000

• The Beat setting is used only when Stop Trigger=Beat or

Time.

Time

Specifies the time (in units of minutes/seconds) after which sampling will stop if the Stop Trigger parameter is set to Time.

Range: 00m02s –100m00s

• The Time setting is used only when Stop Trigger= Beat or

Time.

• The maximum value for Length depends on the remaining amount of sampling memory.

Auto Divide

The Auto Divide function detects regions of silence within the sample, and divides the sample into several samples at these points.

Range: Off , On

Auto Emphasis

Automatically pre-emphasis processes after sampling.

Range: Off , On

Auto Normalize

Automatically normalizes the level after sampling.

Range: Off , On

Gap Time

When Auto Divide=On, this parameter specifies the length of the silent regions that will be detected.

Range: 0.5

, 1.0, 1.5, 2.0 sec

• The Gap Time setting is used only when Auto Divide=On.

Wave Memory

Indicates the amount of wave data stored in the DIMM, both numerically and as a graph.

F-buttons

• [F1](Sampling)

Samples an external audio source. The SAMPLING screen will appear.

• [F2](Re-Sampling)

Samples an internal audio source. The RESAMPLING screen will appear.

• [F3](Reset Peak)

Clears the indicators of the peak hold in the Level meters.

• [F5](Start)

Starts sampling.

If Start Trigger=Manual, sampling will begin immediately.

Otherwise, sampling will begin according to the conditions specified by the Start Trigger setting.

When Start Trigger = Level/Play/Pad

• [F1] (Cancel)

Cancels the sampling operation.

• [F5](Start)

Manually starts sampling. A message of Now Sampling... will appear.

● When Start Trigger=Manual, or during sampling

• [F1] (Cancel)

Cancels the sampling operation.

• [F5](Stop)

Stops sampling. The RESULT popup (p. 211) will then

appear.

S-210

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 211 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SAMPLING

RESULT popup

This displays the results of sampling and importing. Here you can edit the sample, and assign it to an audio phrase or patch.

■ To access this screen

• [SAMPLING] ➜ [F1](Sampling) or

[F2](Re-Sampling) ➜ [F5](Start) (start sampling) ➜

[F5](Stop) (stop sampling)

• [IMPORT] ➜ select a file ➜ [F5](Import)

Explanation of each area

Sample Name

Indicates the name of the sample.

Channel

Displays the number of channel of the sample

(Mono/Stereo).

Zoom Level

Indicates the magnification ratio at which the waveform in the wave window is displayed.

Wave window

Displays the sampled waveform.

Start Point / End Point

Specify the points at which the sample will start playing and stop playing. The Start Point - End Point region is highlighted.

BPM Base Note

Draws measure and beat lines on the displayed sample.

Range: x 0– x 4 –x 65535

• BPM Base Note parameter is valid when you select

[F3](AsgnToAPhrs) in the “Select Quick Assign” message.

Truncate

Deletes the portions of the sample before the Start Point and after the End Point.

Range: Off , On ( ✔ )

• If you save with Truncate turned Off, the sample will be saved without these portions being deleted.

Normalize

Raises the overall level of the sample without allowing the maximum level to be exceeded.

Range: Off , On ( ✔ )

• Normalizing will extend the dynamic range (the difference between the minimum and maximum levels). This will help improve the precision of waveform editing.

Original Key

Specifies the reference pitch (key). When you play the note number specified by the Original Key parameter, the sample will sound at the same pitch as that when it was sampled.

Range: 0(C)– 60(C 4) –127(G 9)

Loop

Specifies whether loop playback will occur when previewing the sample. If this parameter is On when you assign the sample to a partial or audio phrase, this parameter will be used as the loop playback setting.

Value

Off

On

Explanation

The sample will play from the Start Point to the End

Point.

The sample will play repeatedly from the Start

Point to the End Point.

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-211

MV-8800_r_e.book 212 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SAMPLING

F-buttons

• [F1](Retry)

Discard the displayed sample. The message “Retry sure?” will appear.

F-button Explanation

[F1](No) Cancels the retry operation.

[F5](Yes) Discards the sample and closes the RESULT popup.

• [F2](Name)

Displays the EDIT NAME popup (p. 3), where you can

edit the sample name.

• [F3](Quick Assign)

Displays the Select Quick Assign message (p. 213).

• [F4](Preview)

The currently highlighted sample will be auditioned while you hold down the button.

• [F5](OK)

Closes the RESULT popup (this popup). The sample will be added to the sample list.

S-212

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 213 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SAMPLING

Select Quick Assign message

Here you can assign a sample to a patch or an audio phrase.

■ To access this screen

• [SAMPLING] ➜ [F1](Sampling) ➜

[F5](Start)

[F5](Stop)

(start sampling)

(stop sampling)

➜ [F3](Quick Assign)

• [IMPORT] ➜ select a file ➜ [F5](Import) ➜

[F3](Quick Assign)

• [PROJECT] ➜ the cursor located in the lower row of icons ➜ [F3](SmplMgr) ➜ [F1](Quick Assign) etc.

F-buttons

• [F1](Chop)

Displays the CHOP popup (p. 159).

• [F3](AsgnToAphrs)

Displays the AUDIO PHRASE QUICK ASSIGN popup (p.

214). The sample will be assigned as an audio phrase.

• [F5](AsgnToPatch)

Displays the PATCH QUICK ASSIGN popup (p. 216).

The sample will be assigned as a partial.

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-213

MV-8800_r_e.book 214 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SAMPLING

AUDIO PHRASE QUICK ASSIGN popup

Here you can assign a sample to an audio phrase.

■ To access this screen

• [SAMPLING] ➜ [F1](Sampling) ➜

[F5](Start)

[F5](Stop)

(start sampling)

(stop sampling)

➜ [F3](Quick Assign) ➜

[F3](AsgnToAPhrs) etc.

Explanation of each area

Assign To

Selects the audio phrase to which the sample will be assigned.

Range: 1-1 –32-16

• You can also specify a pad by striking it directly.

Velocity Pads

Indicates the state of the velocity pads in the current pad bank.

Indicate Status

An audio phrase is assigned to the pad.

Nothing is assigned.

An audio phrase will assign to the enclosed pad.

F-buttons

• [F4](Preview)

To hear auditioning, hold down [F4](Preview).

• [F5](Execute)

Assigns the sample to the specified audio phrase.

• When assigning samples, a confirmation message will appear if a pad to which a sample is already assigned would be overwritten.

Wave window

Displays the sampled data (waveform).

Sample Name

Displays the name of the sample.

Channel

Displays the number of channel of the sample

(Mono/Stereo).

S-214

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 215 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SAMPLING

AUDIO PHRASE QUICK ASSIGN (MULTIPLE) popup

Here you can assign multiple samples to an audio phrases.

■ To access this screen

• [SAMPLING] ➜ [F1](Sampling) ➜

Divide parameter to On ➜ sampling) ➜ [F5](Stop)

Set the Auto

[F5](Start) (start

(stop sampling) ➜

[F3](Quick Assign) ➜ [F3](AsgnToAPhrs) etc.

Explanation of each area

Assign To

Selects the audio phrase to which the sample will be assigned.

Range: 1-1 –32-16

• You can also specify a pad by striking it directly.

Velocity Pads

Indicates the state of the velocity pads in the current pad bank.

Indicate Status

An audio phrase is assigned to the pad.

Nothing is assigned.

An audio phrase will assign to the enclosed pad.

F-button

• [F5](Execute)

Consecutively assigns the samples as audio phrases, starting with the specified velocity pad number.

• When assigning samples, a confirmation message will appear if a pad to which a sample is already assigned would be overwritten.

Sample Name

Displays the name of the sample.

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-215

MV-8800_r_e.book 216 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SAMPLING

PATCH QUICK ASSIGN popup

Here you can assign the sampled data to a patch.

■ To access this screen

• [SAMPLING] ➜ [F2](Re-sampling) ➜

[F5](Start)

[F5](Stop)

(start sampling)

(stop sampling)

➜ [F3](Quick Assign) ➜

[F5](AsgnToPatch)

Explanation of each area

Part

Specifies the instrument part to which you want to assign the sampled data.

Range: 1 –16

Assign To

If the Make Keyboard parameter is checked, this selects the pads (note numbers) to which the sample data will be assigned. The value at the left specifies the lowest note, and the value at the right specifies the highest note. The center value specifies the original key.

Range: 1-1 (A0)–( lowest vacant note number) –

6-16 (G#8)

• You can also specify the assignments by striking a pad directly. If you strike a pad to which a sound is already assigned, that sound will play.

Velocity Pads

Indicates the state of the pads in the current pad bank.

Indicate Status

A partial is assigned to the pad.

Nothing is assigned.

A partial will assign to the enclosed pad.

Make Keyboard

Check this if you want to assign the sample in a pitched scale (using key follow).

Value

Off

On (

)

Explanation

Assign as a drum set type (non-pitched).

Assign as a keyboard type. The pitch will change according to the note number.

• If you add a check (

) to Make Keyboard so that the sample is assigned to multiple velocity pads, these velocity pads will recall and play the same partial. This means that if you edit the partial parameters, your editing will affect the sound of all velocity pads that are using that partial. You

can use the PATCH EDIT (SPLIT) screen (p. 124) to check

the velocity pads to which the partial is assigned.

Wave window

Displays the sampled data (waveform) you are editing.

Sample Name

Displays the name of the sample.

Channel

Displays the number of channel of the sample

(Mono/Stereo).

S-216

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 217 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

Keyboard

Indicates how the note numbers are used.

original key (C 4)

SAMPLING

F-buttons

• [F4](Preview)

Auditions the sample you are assigning.

• [F5](Execute)

Assigns the sample to the specified partial.

• When assigning samples, a confirmation message will appear if a pad to which a sample is already assigned would be overwritten.

Region of used note numbers

Samples will be assigned

Region of used note numbers

S-217

MV-8800_r_e.book 218 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SAMPLING

PATCH QUICK ASSIGN (MULTIPLE) popup

Here you can assign multiple samples to a patch.

■ To access this screen

• [SAMPLING] ➜ [F1](Sampling) ➜

Divide parameter to On sampling) ➜ [F5](Stop)

[F3](Quick Assign) ➜

Set the Auto

[F5](Start) (start

(stop sampling) ➜

[F5](AsgnToPatch) etc.

Explanation of each area

Part

Specifies the instrument part to which you want to assign the sampled data.

Range: 1 –16

Assign To

Selects the partial (note number) of the instrument part selected by Part to which the sample will be assigned.

Range: 1-1 (A0)–( lowest vacant note number) –

6-16 (G#8)

• You can also specify the assignments by striking a pad directly. If you strike a pad to which a sound is already assigned, that sound will play.

Velocity Pads

Indicates the state of the pads in the current pad bank.

Indicate Status

A partial is assigned to the pad.

Nothing is assigned.

A partial will assign to the enclosed pad.

Keyboard

Indicates how the note numbers are used.

Region of used note numbers

Samples will be assigned

Region of used note numbers

F-button

• [F5](Execute)

Assigns samples consecutively, starting with the specified partial.

• When assigning samples, a confirmation message will appear if a pad to which a sample is already assigned would be overwritten.

Sample Name

Displays the name of the sample.

S-218

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 219 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

IMPORT

Here you can load various types of music data file from the disk drives and use them on the MV-8800.

IMPORT screen

Here you can select the music data file that you want to load.

■ To access this screen

• [IMPORT]

Explanation of each area

Current drive

Displays the currently selected drive with its icon.

Icon Explanation

Hard disk drive

CD-ROM drive or Audio CD drive

Current folder name

Displays the name of the currently selected folder. The symbol “/” separates the root (top level of the folder) and the name of the folder.

Cursor Icon

The cursor icon will change shape to indicate whether you can press the cursor right or left button to change the displayed folder.

Cursor icon Explanation

You can move the cursor up/down.

You can move the cursor up/down. If this indication is displayed, the cursor is located at a folder (highlighted). Press the right cursor key to view the contents of the folder

(i.e., to switch folders).

You can move the cursor up/down. If this indication is displayed, you can press the left cursor button to return to the parent folder

(i.e., to switch folders).

File list

Lists the files saved in the current drive. The highlighted file is selected by the cursor.

Name

Displays the name of the file. The icon shown in front of the filename indicates the type of file.

Icon Explanation

Wave data (e.g., WAV file)

Sequence data (e.g., MID file)

Folder

MV-8800 file

Unknown file type

Ext (Extension)

This is part of the filename, and is used to indicate the type of file.

Size

Indicates the size of the file.

Wave Memory

Indicates the DIMM memory size that is available for sampling or recording.

The remaining amount is indicated in units of MB.

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-219

MV-8800_r_e.book 220 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

IMPORT

Sequence Memory

Indicates the memory size that is available for recording performance data for a song or pattern.

The remaining amount is indicated as the unused percentage (units of %).

used free

• Approximately 10 MB of the installed memory is used by the system. This means that even when wave memory contains no wave data, the remaining wave memory display will be approximately 10 MB less than the installed amount.

Folder

A folder is an area in which files can be stored together.

You can use folders to organize files by genre or purpose. To see the contents of a folder, move the cursor to the folder and press CURSOR [ ].

To move from a folder back to the “parent” level, press

CURSOR [ ].

Import Option

Indicates the status of the Option functions when importing.

You have the following two options when importing.

Emphasis

The audio file will be imported with the high-frequency range boosted.

Auto Divide

When importing the audio file, it will be divided into separate samples at locations of silence.

• To switch the import option setting, press [MENU], choose

“Import Options” (p. 220).

View Type

Indicates how the file list display is being restricted.

View Type

All

Sample

Patch

Song

Pix

Explanation

All files are shown.

Only files that can be imported as samples are shown.

Only files that can be imported as patches are shown.

Only files that can be imported as song or pattern performance data are shown.

Only files that can be imported as images are shown.

F-buttons and menu

• [F1](Select Drive)

Displays the SELECT DRIVE popup (p. 6), letting you

switch the drive from which to select files.

• [F2](View)

Display the VIEW FILE TYPE popup (p. 221)

• [F3](Mark On/Off)

Adds or removes a mark from the file.

• [F4](Preview)

Lets you audition the wave file selected by the cursor in the file list. Press [F4](Stop) to stop auditioning.

• [F5](Import)

Imports the selected file.

• [MENU]

Displays the MENU popup.

Menu items

1 Import Options

Displays the IMPORT OPTIONS popup (p. 222), letting

you make option settings for importing audio files.

2 All Mark

Adds or removes marks from all files.

S-220

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 221 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

VIEW FILE TYPE popup

Here you can restrict the types of files shown in the file list.

■ To access this screen

• [IMPORT] ➜ [F2](View)

IMPORT

Explanation of each area

Type

Restricts the types of files shown in the file list.

Value Explanation

All All files are shown.

Sample The following files are shown.

Patch

Song

Pix

• WAV files

• AIFF files

• AKAI MPC2000/2000XL sound files (.SND)

• AKAI S1000 sample files (.A1S)

• AKAI S3000 sample files (.A3S)

The following files are shown.

• AKAI MPC2000/2000XL program files (.PGM)

• AKAI S1000 program files (.A1P)

• AKAI S3000 program files (.A3P)

• MV-8800 patches (.MV0)

Standard MIDI files (.MID) are shown.

The following files are shown.

• JPG files(.JPG)

• Bitmap files (.BMP)

F-button

• [F5](Set)

Closes the VIEW FILE TYPE popup and shows the selected types of files in the file list.

• Roland S-700 series data (samples, partials, patches) are shown regardless of how the Type parameter is set.

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-221

MV-8800_r_e.book 222 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

IMPORT

IMPORT OPTIONS popup

Here you can specify how emphasis and auto divide are handled when music data files are imported.

■ To access this screen

• [IMPORT] ➜ [MENU] ➜ select “Import Options” ➜

[F5](Select)

Explanation of each area

Auto Divide

The Auto Divide function detects regions of silence during sampling, and divides the sample into several samples at these points.

Gap Time

When Auto Divide=On, this parameter specifies the length of the silent regions that will be detected.

Range: 0.5

, 1.0, 1.5, 2.0 sec

Pre Emphasis

Specifies whether emphasis processing will be applied when you import a music data file.

Display

Off

On

Explanation

Emphasis processing will not be applied to the imported data.

Emphasis processing will be applied to the imported data.

F-button

• [F1](Close)

Closes the IMPORT OPTIONS popup (this popup).

S-222

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 223 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

IMPORT

ASSIGN TO PARTIAL popup

Here you can assign the S-700 series partial data to a pacth.

■ To access this screen

• [IMPORT] ➜ select a S-700 series partial data ➜

[F5](Import)

Explanation of each area

Part

Specifies the instrument part to which you want to assign the partial data.

Range: 1 –16

Assign To

Specifies the note number within the instrument part selected by Part Number to which the partial data will be assigned. The value at the left specifies the lowest note, and the value at the right specifies the highest note. The center value specifies the original key.

Range: 1-01 (A0)–(lowest vacant note number)

– 6-16 (G#8)

• You can also specify the assignments by striking a velocity pad directly. If you strike a pad to which a sound is already assigned, that sound will play.

• If a range of pads (note numbers) are assigned, they will play the same partial. This means that if you edit the partial parameters, your editing will affect the sound of all pads

that use that partial. The PATCH EDIT (SPLIT) screen (p.

124) shows how partials are assigned to the velocity pads.

Velocity Pads

Indicates the status of the velocity pads in the current pad bank.

Indicate Status

A partial is assigned to the pad.

Nothing is assigned.

A partial will assign to the enclosed pad.

Partial Name

Displays the partial name you want to import.

Keyboard

Indicates how the note numbers are used.

Region of used note numbers

Samples will be assigned

Region of used note numbers

F-button

• [F5](Execute)

Assigns the partial.

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-223

MV-8800_r_e.book 224 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

IMPORT

ASSIGN TO PART / LIBRARY popup

When importing a patch file, you can specify whether the patch will be imported as an entire part or imported into the library.

■ To access this screen

• [IMPORT] ➜ select a patch file ➜ [F5](Import)

Explanation of each area

Part

Specifies the part into which the patch will be imported.

Range: Off (not imported), 1–16

Library

Specifies the library number into which the patch will be imported.

Range: Off (not imported), 1–128

Patch Name

Displays the name of the patch selected in the IMPORT screen (p. 219) for importing.

F-buttons

• [F3](With Delete)

If there is already a patch in the part number specified by the Part parameter or in the library number specified by the Library parameter, that patch and the samples it uses will be deleted (Delete Patch) before the patch is imported.

For details on what Delete Patch does, refer to “Deleting the patch” (Owner’s Manual; p. 101).

• [F5](Execute)

Imports the patch to the specified location, and closes

the ASSIGN TO PART / LIBRARY popup (this popup).

S-224

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 225 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

SET TIME popup

Here you can import a specified region of audio from an audio CD.

■ To access this screen

• [IMPORT] ➜ select an audio CD track ➜

[F5](Import)

IMPORT

Explanation of each area

Current time

Indicates the current time of the track to be imported.

Track time

Indicates the total length of the track to be imported.

Current time location

Indicates the location within the track that corresponds to the time shown in Current Time.

In Time

Specifies the starting time from which to begin importing the specified track. (The units are minutes:seconds).

Out Time

Specifies the ending time at which to stop importing the specified track. (The units are minutes:seconds).

F-buttons

• [F1](Set In Time)

While auditioning the CD, sets the In Time as the current playback location of the CD track.

• [F2](Set Out Time)

While auditioning the CD, sets the Out Time as the current playback location of the CD track.

• [F3](Play)

Auditions the region from In Time to Out Time.

• [F4](Stop)

Stops auditioning.

• [F5](Execute)

Imports the region from In Time to Out Time, and opens

the RESULT popup (p. 211).

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-225

MV-8800_r_e.book 226 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

IMPORT

PIX QUICK ASSIGN popup

Here you can assign imported image files to velocity pads.

■ To access this screen

• [IMPORT] ➜ select an image file ➜ [F5](Import)

Explanation of each area

Assign To

Specifies the velocity pad to which the imported image will be assigned.

Range: 1–16

File name

Shows the file name of the image to be imported.

Velocity pads

This area shows the usage status of the velocity pads.

Indicate Status

An image is assigned to the velocity pad.

Nothing is assigned.

An image will be assigned to the velocity pad shown with a border.

F-button

• [F5](Execute)

Assigns the image to the velocity pad specified by the

Assign To parameter.

S-226

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 227 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

IMPORT

AUDIO PHRASE BANK QUICK ASSIGN popup

Here you can assign the audio phrases to velocity pads by 1 bank.

■ To access this screen

• [IMPORT] ➜ select an Audio Phrase Bank file ➜

[F5](Import)

Explanation of each area

Assign To

Specify the bank number to which the imported audio phrases will be assigned.

Range: 1–32

Velocity pads

Shows the usage status of the velocity pads of the selected pad bank.

Indicate Status

An Audio Phrase is assigned to the velocity pad.

Nothing is assigned.

Audio phrase bank name

Show the name of the audio phrase bank to be imported.

F-button

• [F5](Execute)

Assigns the audio phrases to the velocity pads of the bank specified by the Assign To parameter.

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-227

MV-8800_r_e.book 228 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

IMPORT

EFFECTS ASSIGN TO LIBRARY popup

Here you can assign imported effect settings to the effect library.

■ To access this screen

• [IMPORT] ➜ select a effects file ➜ [F5](Import)

• The popup name will depend on the file that you are importing.

Effects type Popup name

MFX

Dly/Cho

Reverb

MFX ASSIGN TO LIBRARY

DELAY/CHORUS ASSIGN TO LIBRARY

EVERB ASSIGN TO LIBRARY

Explanation of each area

Library

Specifies the library number into which the effect setting will be imported.

Effect Value

MFX U001–U100

Dly/Cho U01–U50

Reverb U01–U50

Name of effects setting

Displays the name of the effects file selected in the

IMPORT screen (p. 219).

F-button

• [F5](Execute)

Imports the effect setting to the specified location, and closes the EFFECTS ASSIGN TO LIBRARY popup.

S-228

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 229 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

EFFECTS

Here you can make settings for the built-in MFX (multi-effect), delay/chorus, and reverb.

EFFECTS screen

In this effects screen you can check the state of the multi-effect, delay/chorus, and reverb.

■ To access this screen

• [EFFECTS]

Explanation of each area

Cursor

The effect section (MFX, delay/chorus, reverb) at which the cursor is located is highlighted. The highlighted effect section is called the “current effect.”

Effect section

Indicates the type of effect.

Display

MFX

Dly/Cho

Reverb

Explanation

Multi-effect

Delay/Chorus

Reverb

Algorithm icon

The effect algorithm used by each effect section is indicated by the icon shown.

Routing

Specifies where the MFX will be placed within the mixer.

Value

Off

Input

AUX1–4

Master

Explanation

MFX is not used.

Input bus

AUX 1–4 bus

Master out bus

• You can select the Routing parameter only for MFX.

Control parameter

Indicates the names of the parameters controlled by the control knobs. Three parameters are displayed; from the left they correspond to the C1, C2, and C3 knobs.

Control knobs

Use these knobs to control major parameters of the effect algorithm used by each effect section.

• There are three knobs for each section; they correspond to knobs C1–C3 of the top panel.

To operate these knobs, use the cursor (up/down) to move the highlighted area to the appropriate effect section.

The Knob Assign function (p. 234) lets you freely assign an

effect parameter to each knob.

Effect patch name

Indicates the name of the effects patch.

Effect Algorithm

Indicates the name of the algorithm used by each effect.

Effect switch

Switches the status of each effect section.

Value

Off

On

Explanation

The effect is not used.

The effect is enabled.

F-buttons

• [F3](Library)

Displays the EFFECT LIBRARY popup (p. 230).

• [F4](FX On/Off)

Switches the status of the current effect.

• [F5](Edit)

Displays the EFFECTS EDIT screen (p. 231).

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-229

MV-8800_r_e.book 230 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

EFFECTS

EFFECTS LIBRARY popup

Here you can save and recall effect settings.

■ To access this screen

• [EFFECTS] ➜ select the current effect ➜

[F3](Library)

• The popup name will depend on the current effect.

Current effect Popup name

MFX

Dly/Cho

Reverb

MFX LIBRARY

DELAY/CHORUS LIBRARY

REVERB LIBRARY

Explanation of each area

No. (effect library number)

The effect library consists of a Preset area containing factory-set settings and a User area for you to store/recall your own settings.

Effect

MFX

Dly/Cho

Reverb

U (User) area

U001–U100

U001–U050

U001–U050

P (Preset) area

P001–P034

P001–P002

P001–P004

• The Preset area is read-only; you cannot write settings into the Preset area.

Name

Displays the name of the effect settings.

Algorithm

Displays the used effect algorithm.

Scroll bar

Indicates the approximate portion of the list that is visible.

Library Preview

This will indicate “On” while you are previewing the effect.

F-buttons

• [F1](Write Here)

Saves the current effect settings to the cursor location within the library list. Displays the confirmation message.

F-button

[F1](No)

[F5](Yes)

Explanation

Cancels the operation.

Saves the effect settings.

• [F4](Preview)

Temporarily enables the effect selected by the cursor, letting you preview the result. The display will indicate

“Library Preview On” while you are previewing the effect.

• [F5](Use This)

Specifies the effect setting parameters selected by the cursor as the current effect.

• To discard the selection you made in the popup and return to the previous screen, press [EXIT].

S-230

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 231 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

EFFECTS EDIT screen

Here you can make detailed edits to the multi-effect, delay/chorus effect, or reverb effect.

■ To access this screen

• [EFFECTS] ➜ [F5](Edit)

EFFECTS

Explanation of each area

Effect section

Indicates the name of the effect section you are editing.

Display

MFX EDIT

DELAY/CHORUS EDIT

REVERB EDIT

Explanation

Multi-effect Edit screen

Delay/Chorus Edit screen

Reverb Edit screen

Effect patch name

Indicates the name of the currently-recalled effect settings.

Effect algorithm name

Indicates the name of the currently-used effect algorithm.

For more about the effect patch name and effect algorithm name, refer to “Preset Patches and Algorithm List”

(Appendices; p. 14).

Algorithm icon

The displayed icon indicates the currently-used effect algorithm.

Effect switch

Indicates the status of the current effect

Value

Off

On

Explanation

The effect is bypassed (not used).

The effect is enabled.

Control knobs

Use these knobs to control major parameters of the current effect.

• There are several knobs for each effect block, and indications of C1–C3 are displayed for some of these.

These knobs correspond to the C1–C3 knobs of the top panel.

The Knob Assign function (p. 234) lets you freely assign an

effect parameter to each knob.

Effect blocks

These are the individual effects that make up each effect algorithm. To make settings in a particular effect block, use [F1](Block ▲ ) or [F2](Block ▼ ) to select that block.

The tab area of the effect block shows the individual effects that make up the effect patch. For details, refer to “Effect

Block” (Appendices; p. 16).

Switch parameter

This indicates the status of each effect block (individual effect).

Value

Off

On

Explanation

The effect block is not used.

The effect block is enabled.

Effect block parameters

This area displays the parameters of each effect block.

For details on the displayed parameters, refer to “Effect

Block” (Appendices; p. 16).

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-231

MV-8800_r_e.book 232 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

EFFECTS

F-buttons and menu

• [F1](Block ▲ ) / [F2](Block ▼ )

These switch the displayed effect block.

• [F3](Knob Assign)

Displays the KNOB ASSIGN popup (p. 234).

• [F4](FX On/Off)

Switches the current effect off (bypassed) or on.

• [F5](SW On/Off)

Switches the effect block off (bypassed) or on.

• [MENU]

Displays the MENU popup.

Menu items

● MFX EDIT screen

1 MFX Library

Displays the MFX LIBRARY popup (p. 230).

2 Edit MFX Name

Displays the EDIT MFX NAME popup (p. 3)

3 Save MFX

Displays the SAVE MFX popup (p. 233)

● DELAY/CHORUS EDIT screen

1 Dly/Cho Library

Displays the Dly/Cho LIBRARY popup (p. 230).

2 Edit Dly/Cho Name

Displays the EDIT Dly/Cho NAME popup (p. 3)

3 Save Dly/Cho

Displays the SAVE Dly/Cho popup (p. 233)

● REVERB EDIT screen

1 Reverb Library

Displays the REVERB LIBRARY popup (p. 230).

2 Edit Reverb Name

Displays the EDIT REVERB NAME popup (p. 3)

3 Save Reverb

Displays the SAVE REVERB popup (p. 233)

S-232

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 233 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

EFFECTS

SAVE EFFECTS popup

Here you can save multi-effect, delay/chorus, and reverb effect settings to the hard disk as a file.

■ To access this screen

• [EFFECTS] ➜ [F5](Edit) ➜ [MENU] ➜ select “Save

MFX”, “Save Dly/Cho”, or “Save Reverb” ➜

[F5](Select)

• The popup name will depend on the current effect.

Current effect Popup name

MFX

Dly/Cho

Reverb

SAVE MFX

SAVE DELAY/CHORUS

SAVE REVERB

Explanation of each area

Effect setting name

Displays the name of the effect setting which can be saved.

Current folder name

Displays the destination folder you want to save.

Folder levels below the root folder (the top level folder in the hard disk) are shown by a slash “/” symbol.

File list

Displays the name of the files and folders saved in the current folder.

Drive capacity

Displays the free space of the hard disk.

■ F-buttons

• [F4](Make Folder)

Displays the EDIT NAME popup (p. 3), where you can

create a new folder inside the current folder.

• [F5](Save)

Saves the effect setting as a file to the hard disk.

Displays the EDIT NAME popup (p. 3), where you can

specify the name of a WAV-format or AIFF-format file.

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-233

MV-8800_r_e.book 234 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

EFFECTS

KNOB ASSIGN popup

Here you can assign effect parameters to the control knobs (C1–C3). This lets you use the knobs to edit parameters directly.

■ To access this screen

• [EFFECTS] ➜ select an current effect

[F5](Edit) ➜

➜ use the cursor to select the effect parameter you want to assign to a knob ➜

[F3](Knob Assign)

• [MASTERING] ➜ [F2](Mastering) ➜ select the audio data (WAV file) that you want to master ➜

[F5](MTK Edit) ➜ [F5](Sw On/Off) ➜ [MENU] select “Knob Assign” ➜ [F5](Select)

Explanation of each area

New parameter

Shows the parameter that you will be assigning.

Parameter

Displays the names of the effect parameters assigned to

C1, C2, and C3.

F-buttons

• [F1](C1) / [F2](C2) / [F3](C3)

These assign the effect parameter at the cursor to the corresponding knob.

• [F5](Cancel)

Closes the KNOB ASSIGN popup.

S-234

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 235 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

MIXER

Here you can adjust the volume and panning of each audio track and instrument part.

MIXER (AUDIO TRACK) screen

This is the audio track mixer screen, where you can set the level, pan, and output assign.

■ To access this screen

• [MIXER] ➜ [F1](Audio Track)

Explanation of each area

Name

Displays the name of the audio track.

• The first few characters of the name are shown.

Subsequent characters are not displayed.

Mute

Temporarily silences the track.

Range: Off , On

DlyCho Send (Delay/Chorus Send Level)

Specifies the amount of signal sent to the delay/chorus effect.

Range: 0 –127

Reverb Send (Reverb Send Level)

Specifies the amount of signal sent to the reverb effect.

Range: 0 –127

Pan

Sets the panning of the track.

Range: L63– 0 –R63

Level

Specifies the volume of the track.

Range: 0– 100 –127

• You can use the eight sliders on the top panel to adjust the

Level parameter.

Output

Specifies the signal output destination for each track.

Value

Mix

AUX1–

AUX4

MLT1–

MLT8

M1/2–

M7/8

Explanation

Output the sound to the Mix bus. The sound will be output from Master and Phones.

Output the sound to an AUX bus.

Output the sound to a MULTI OUTPUT (mono output).

Output the sound to a pair of MULTI OUTPUT

(stereo output).

F-buttons

• [F1](Audio Track)

Displays the MIXER (AUDIO TRACK) screen (this

screen).

• [F2](Part 1–8)

Displays parts 1–8 of the MIXER (INSTRUMENT PART) screen (p. 236).

• [F3](Part 9–16)

Displays parts 9–16 the MIXER (INSTRUMENT PART) screen (p. 236).

• [F4](AUX/Phrs/In)

Displays the MIXER (AUX/FX/AUDIO PHRASE/INPUT) screen (p. 237).

• [F5]( ➔ EQ)

Displays the MIXER (AUDIO TRACK EQ) screen (p.

238).

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-235

MV-8800_r_e.book 236 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

MIXER

MIXER (INSTRUMENT PART) screen

This is the mixer screen for each instrument part. Here you can specify the level, pan, and output assign.

■ To access this screen

• [MIXER] ➜ [F2](Part 1–8) or [F3](Part 9–16)

Explanation of each area

Patch name

Displays the patch name of the selected part.

• The first few characters of the name are shown.

Subsequent characters are not displayed.

Mute

Temporarily silences the part.

Range: Off , On

DlyCho Send (Delay/Chorus Send Level)

Specifies the amount of signal sent to the delay/chorus effect.

Range: 0 –127

Reverb Send (Reverb Send Level)

Specifies the amount of signal sent to the reverb effect.

Range: 0 –127

Pan

Sets the panning of the part.

Range: L63– 0 –R63

Level

Specifies the volume of the part.

Range: 0– 100 –127

• You can use the eight sliders on the top panel to adjust the

Level parameter.

Value

Prtl

Mix

AUX1–

AUX4

MLT1–

MLT8

M1/2–

M7/8

Output

Specifies the signal output destination for each part.

Explanation

Follow the setting of the partial’s Output Assign

(Partial output assign) (p. 125)

Output the sound to the Mix bus. The sound will be output from Master and Phones.

Output the sound to an AUX bus.

Output the sound to a MULTI OUTPUT (mono output).

Output the sound to a pair of MULTI OUTPUT

(stereo output).

F-buttons

• [F1](Audio Track)

Displays the MIXER (AUDIO TRACK) screen (p. 235).

• [F2](Part 1–8)

Displays parts 1–8 the MIXER (INSTRUMENT PART) screen (this screen).

• [F3](Part 9–16)

Displays parts 9–16 the MIXER (INSTRUMENT PART) screen (this screen).

• [F4](AUX/Phrs/In)

Displays the MIXER (AUX/FX/AUDIO PHRASE/INPUT) screen (p. 237).

• [F5]( ➜ EQ)

Displays the MIXER (IMSTRUMENT PART EQ) screen

(p. 239) for channels 1–8 or 9–16.

S-236

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 237 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

MIXER (AUX/FX/AUDIO PHRASE/INPUT) screen

This is the mixer screen for the AUX buses, effects, audio phrase parts, and inputs.

■ To access this screen

• [MIXER] ➜ [F4](AUX/Phrs/In)

MIXER

Explanation of each area

Name

This is the name of each mixer.

Display

AUX1–AUX4

DlyCho

Reverb

A.Phrs

In (A)

Explanation

AUX bus

Delay/Chorus

Reverb bus

Audio Phrase

Analog input

MFX (Multi-effect)

A bus in which MFX is inserted is displayed as “MFX.”

• “---” indicates that MFX is not inserted.

DlyCho Send (Delay/Chorus Send Level)

Specifies the amount of signal sent to the delay/chorus effect.

Range: 0 –127

Reverb Send (Reverb Send Level)

Specifies the amount of signal sent to the reverb effect.

Range: 0 –127

Pan

Specifies the panning of the signal.

Range: L63– 0 –R63

Level

Specifies the volume of each part.

Range: 0– 100 –127

• You can use the eight sliders on the top panel to adjust the

Level parameter.

Level meter

Displays the post-fader level of each part.

• The top indicator of the meter will light when the signal clips

(= 0 dB). If this occurs, lower the value of the Level parameter.

Output

Specifies the signal output destination for AUX buses 1–

4 and audio phrases.

Value

Off

Mix

AUX1–

AUX4

MLT1–

MLT8

M1/2–

M7/8

Explanation

No output (AUX buses 1–4 only)

Output the audio to the Mix bus. The sound will be output from Master and Phones.

Output the audio to the AUX bus (audio phrases only)

Output the audio to a MULTI OUTPUT (mono output).

Output the audio to a pair of MULTI OUTPUT

(stereo output).

F-buttons

• [F1](Audio Track)

Displays the MIXER (AUDIO TRACK) screen (p. 235).

• [F2](Part 1–8)

Displays parts 1–8 the MIXER (INSTRUMENT PART) screen (p. 236).

• [F3](Part 9–16)

Displays parts 9–16 the MIXER (INSTRUMENT PART) screen (p. 236).

• [F4](AUX/Phrs/In)

Displays the MIXER (AUX/FX/AUDIO PHRASE/INPUT) screen (this screen).

• [F5](Reset Peak)

Clears the indicators of the peak hold in the Level meters.

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-237

MV-8800_r_e.book 238 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

MIXER

MIXER (AUDIO TRACK EQ) screen

This is the equalizer screen for the audio tracks, where you can adjust their tonal character.

■ To access this screen

• [MIXER] ➜ [F1](Audio Track) ➜ [F5]( ➜ EQ)

Explanation of each area

Name

Shows a portion of the audio track name.

EQ Sw

Turns the EQ of each track on/off.

Range: Off , On

EQ High Gain

Specifies the amount of boost or cut at the frequency specified by EQ High Freq.

Range: -15– 0 –15 [dB]

EQ High Freq (EQ high frequency)

Specifies the high-range frequency at which the boost or cut will occur.

Range: 1000, 1120, 1250, 1400, 1600, 1800, 2000,

2240, 2500, 2800, 3150 , 3550, 4000, 4500,

5000, 5600, 6300, 7100, 8000, 9000,10k [Hz]

EQ Mid Gain

Specifies the amount of boost or cut at the frequency specified by EQ Mid Freq.

Range: -15– 0 –15 [dB]

EQ Mid Freq (EQ middle frequency)

Specifies the midrange frequency at which the boost or cut will occur.

Range: 100, 112, 125, 140, 160, 180, 200, 224, 250,

280, 315, 355, 400, 450, 500, 560, 630, 710,

800, 900, 1000 ,1120, 1250, 1400, 1600, 1800,

2000, 2240, 2500, 2800, 3150, 3550, 4000,

4500, 5000, 5600, 6300, 7100, 8000, 9000,

10k [Hz]

EQ Mid Q (EQ middle Q)

Specifies the width of the frequency band that will be boosted or cut. Lower settings will broaden the frequency band; higher settings will sharpen it.

Range: 0.5

, 0.6, 0.7, 0.8, 0.9, 1.0, 1.1, 1.2, 1.4, 1.6,

1.8, 2.0, 2.2, 2.5, 2.8, 3.1, 3.5, 4.0, 4.5, 5.0,

5.6, 6.3, 7.1, 8.0, 9.0, 10.0, 11.2, 12.5, 14.0,

16.0

EQ Low Gain

Specifies the amount of boost or cut at the frequency specified by EQ Low Freq.

Range: -15– 0 –15 [dB]

EQ Low Freq (EQ low frequency)

Specifies the low-range frequency at which the boost or cut will occur.

Range: 100 , 112, 125, 140, 160, 180, 200, 224, 250,

280, 315, 355, 400, 450, 500, 560, 630, 710,

800, 900, 1000 [Hz]

F-buttons

• [F1](Audio Track)

Displays the MIXER (AUDIO TRACK EQ) screen (this

screen).

• [F2](Part 1–8)

Displays parts 1–8 of the MIXER (IMSTRUMENT PART

EQ) screen (p. 239).

• [F3](Part 9–16)

Displays parts 9–16 of the MIXER (IMSTRUMENT PART

EQ) screen (p. 239).

• [F5](

Level/Pan)

Displays the MIXER (AUDIO TRACK) screen (p. 235).

S-238

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 239 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

MIXER

MIXER (IMSTRUMENT PART EQ) screen

This is the equalizer screen for the instrument parts, where you can adjust their tonal character.

■ To access this screen

• [MIXER] ➜ [F2](Part 1–8) or [F3](Part 9–16) ➜

[F5]( ➜ EQ)

Explanation of each area

Patch name

Displays the patch name of the selected part.

• The first few characters of the name are shown.

Subsequent characters are not displayed.

EQ Sw

Turns EQ on/off for each part.

EQ High Gain

Specifies the amount of boost or cut at the frequency specified by EQ High Freq.

Range: -15– 0 –15 [dB]

EQ High Freq (EQ high frequency)

Specifies the high-range frequency at which the boost or cut will occur.

Range: 1000, 1120, 1250, 1400, 1600, 1800, 2000,

2240, 2500, 2800, 3150 , 3550, 4000, 4500,

5000, 5600, 6300, 7100, 8000, 9000,10k [Hz]

EQ Mid Gain

Specifies the amount of boost or cut at the frequency specified by EQ Mid Freq.

Range: -15– 0 –15 [dB]

EQ Mid Freq (EQ middle frequency)

Specifies the midrange frequency at which the boost or cut will occur.

Range: 100, 112, 125, 140, 160, 180, 200, 224, 250,

280, 315, 355, 400, 450, 500, 560, 630, 710,

800, 900, 1000 ,1120, 1250, 1400, 1600, 1800,

2000, 2240, 2500, 2800, 3150, 3550, 4000,

4500, 5000, 5600, 6300, 7100, 8000, 9000,

10k [Hz]

EQ Mid Q (EQ middle Q)

Specifies the width of the frequency band that will be boosted or cut. Lower settings will broaden the frequency band; higher settings will sharpen it.

Range: 0.5

, 0.6, 0.7, 0.8, 0.9, 1.0, 1.1, 1.2, 1.4, 1.6,

1.8, 2.0, 2.2, 2.5, 2.8, 3.1, 3.5, 4.0, 4.5, 5.0,

5.6, 6.3, 7.1, 8.0, 9.0, 10.0, 11.2, 12.5, 14.0,

16.0

EQ Low Gain

Specifies the amount of boost or cut at the frequency specified by EQ Low Freq.

Range: -15– 0 –15 [dB]

EQ Low Freq (EQ low frequency)

Specifies the low-range frequency at which the boost or cut will occur.

Range: 100 , 112, 125, 140, 160, 180, 200, 224, 250,

280, 315, 355, 400, 450, 500, 560, 630, 710,

800, 900, 1000 [Hz]

F-buttons

• [F1](Audio Track)

Displays the MIXER (AUDIO TRACK EQ) screen (p.

238).

• [F2](Part 1–8)

Displays parts 1–8 of MIXER (IMSTRUMENT PART EQ) screen (this screen).

• [F3](Part 9–16)

Displays parts 9–16 of MIXER (IMSTRUMENT PART

EQ) screen (this screen).

• [F5](

Level/Pan)

Displays 1–8 or 9–16 of the MIXER (INSTRUMENT

PART) screen (p. 236).

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-239

MV-8800_r_e.book 240 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

Index

A

ADD AUDIO TRACKS popup ....................................................... 55

ADD MIDI TRACKS popup ........................................................... 54

ASSIGN TO PAD popup ............................................................. 100

ASSIGN TO PART / LIBRARY popup ........................................ 224

ASSIGN TO PARTIAL popup ..................................................... 223

ASSIGNABLE SLIDER screen ................................................... 182

AUDIO EVENT PARAMETER popup ........................................... 28

AUDIO EVENT SAMPLE EDIT popup ......................................... 29

AUDIO FILE LIST screen ........................................................... 208

AUDIO PHARASE SAMPLE EDIT screen ................................. 157

AUDIO PHRASE BANK QUICK ASSIGN popup ........................ 227

AUDIO PHRASE EDIT screen ................................................... 155

AUDIO PHRASE QUICK ASSIGN (MULTIPLE) popup ............. 215

AUDIO PHRASE QUICK ASSIGN popup .................................. 214

AUDIO PHRASE STEP REC screen ............................................ 63

AUDIO PHRASES (LIST) screen ............................................... 153

AUDIO PHRASES (PAD) screen ............................................... 152

AUTO CHOP popup ................................................................... 160

AUTO PUNCH popup ................................................................... 49

AUTOMATIC ASSIGN TO PAD popup ...................................... 108

B

BACKUP PROJECT TO CD screen ........................................... 170

BPM/TAP popup ........................................................................... 70

C

CD PLAYER screen ................................................................... 195

CHANGE CONTINUOUS DATA popup ....................................... 68

CHANGE DURATION popup ....................................................... 40

CHANGE VELOCITY popup ........................................................ 39

CHOP popup .............................................................................. 159

CHOP QUICK ASSIGN popup ................................................... 161

COMMAND popup .......................................................................... 7

COPY AS AUDIO PHRASE popup .............................................. 45

COPY AS MIDI CLIP popup ......................................................... 44

COPY AS NEW PATTERN popup ............................................. 105

COPY AS NEW SONG popup ...................................................... 87

COPY PART popup .................................................................... 151

COPY PATTERN popup ............................................................... 97

COPY&INSERT popup ................................................................. 37

COPY&PASTE popup .................................................................. 35

CREATE CONTINUOUS DATA popup ........................................ 67

CREATE EVENT popup ............................................................... 25

CREATE NEW PROJECT screen .............................................. 166

CREATE NEW SONG screen ...................................................... 83

CUE SHEET screen ................................................................... 206

D

DATA THIN popup ........................................................................ 42

DELAY/CHORUS EDIT screen .................................................. 231

DELAY/CHORUS KNOB ASSIGN popup .................................. 234

DELAY/CHORUS LIBRARY popup ............................................ 230

DELETE MEASURE popup .......................................................... 65

DELETE PROJECT screen ........................................................ 168

DELETE SONG screen ................................................................ 86

DELETE TRACKS popup ............................................................. 56

DISK UTILITY screen ................................................................. 193

DISK/USB MENU screen ........................................................... 188

DISPLAY/MOUSE screen .......................................................... 184

DRUM GRID screen ..................................................................... 73

E

EDIT AUDIO PHRASE NAME popup ............................................. 3

EDIT COMMENT popup ............................................................... 80

EDIT DELAY / CHORUS NAME popup .......................................... 3

EDIT FILE NAME popup ................................................................ 3

S-240

MV-8800 Screen Guide

EDIT FOLDER NAME popup ......................................................... 3

EDIT LOCATOR NAME popup ...................................................... 3

EDIT MFX NAME popup ................................................................ 3

EDIT MIDI CLIP NAME popup ....................................................... 3

EDIT MTK NAME popup ................................................................ 3

EDIT PAD BANK NAME popup ...................................................... 3

EDIT PARTIAL NAME popup ......................................................... 3

EDIT PATCH NAME popup ............................................................ 3

EDIT PATTEN NAME popup .......................................................... 3

EDIT PROJECT NAME popup ....................................................... 3

EDIT REVERB NAME popup ......................................................... 3

EDIT SAMPLE NAME popup ......................................................... 3

EDIT SONG NAME popup ............................................................. 3

EDIT TRACK NAME popup ............................................................ 3

EDIT VOLUME LABEL popup ........................................................ 3

EFFECTS ASSIGN TO LIBRARY popup ................................... 228

EFFECTS screen ....................................................................... 229

EMPHASIS popup ...................................................................... 133

EVENT ERASE popup ................................................................. 61

EVENT LIST screen ..................................................................... 23

F

FADE IN popup .......................................................................... 138

FADE OUT popup ...................................................................... 139

FILE UTILITY screen .................................................................. 189

G

GAP TIME popup ....................................................................... 207

GLOBAL screen ......................................................................... 173

I

IMPORT OPTIONS popup ......................................................... 222

IMPORT screen .......................................................................... 219

INSERT MEASURE popup .......................................................... 64

INSTRUMENTS screen .............................................................. 114

J

JUMP popup ................................................................................. 60

L

LISTEN AUDIO FILE popup ....................................................... 197

LOAD PATCH screen ................................................................. 150

LOAD PROJECT screen ............................................................ 164

LOAD SONG screen .................................................................... 89

LOCATOR popup ......................................................................... 59

LOOP popup ................................................................................ 48

M

MARKER popup ........................................................................... 57

MASTERING FILE NAME popup ................................................... 3

MASTERING screen .................................................................. 199

MASTERING TOOL KIT EDIT screen ........................................ 202

MASTERING TOOL KIT LIBRARY popup ................................. 201

MENU popup .................................................................................. 7

MERGE TRACKS popup .............................................................. 69

METRONOME popup ................................................................... 22

MFX EDIT screen ....................................................................... 231

MFX KNOB ASSIGN popup ....................................................... 234

MFX LIBRARY popup ................................................................ 230

MIDI CLIP LIBRARY popup ......................................................... 46

MIDI FILTER screen ................................................................... 116

MIDI screen ................................................................................ 177

MIXDOWN / MASTERING MENU screen .................................. 196

MIXDOWN FILE NAME popup ....................................................... 3

MIXER (AUDIO TRACK EQ) screen .......................................... 238

MIXER (AUDIO TRACK) screen ................................................ 235

MIXER (AUX/FX/AUDIO PHRASE/INPUT) screen .................... 237

MV-8800_r_e.book 241 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

MIXER (IMSTRUMENT PART 1–8 EQ) screen ......................... 239

MIXER (IMSTRUMENT PART 9–16 EQ) screen ....................... 239

MIXER (INSTRUMENT PART 1–8) screen ................................ 236

MIXER (INSTRUMENT PART 9–16) screen .............................. 236

MOVE AUDIO EVENT popup ..................................................... 113

MOVE PATTERN EVENT popup ............................................... 113

MOVE popup ................................................................................ 36

MUTE CONTROL TRACK screen ................................................ 71

N

NORMALIZE popup .................................................................... 134

P

PAD BANKS popup ........................................................................ 5

PAD screen ................................................................................ 174

PANEL screen ............................................................................ 175

PARTIAL EDIT (AMPLIFIER) screen ......................................... 145

PARTIAL EDIT (FILTER) screen ................................................ 143

PARTIAL EDIT (LFO) screen ..................................................... 147

PARTIAL EDIT (SMT) screen ..................................................... 141

PARTIAL EDIT screen ................................................................ 125

PASTE EVENT popup .................................................................. 26

PASTE MIDI CLIP popup ............................................................. 47

PASTE PATTERN popup ........................................................... 106

PATCH EDIT (CONTROL) screen ............................................. 120

PATCH EDIT (SOLO/PORTAMENTO) screen ........................... 122

PATCH EDIT (SPLIT) screen ..................................................... 124

PATCH EDIT screen .................................................................. 118

PATCH LIBRARY popup ............................................................ 117

PATCH QUICK ASSIGN (MULTIPLE) popup ............................ 218

PATCH QUICK ASSIGN popup ................................................. 216

PATTERN EVENT PARAMETR popup ...................................... 112

PATTERN LIST screen ................................................................ 96

PATTERN PARAMETER popup .................................................. 99

PATTERN PLAY screen ............................................................... 98

PATTERN RECORDING PARAMETER (AUDIO) popup ........... 103

PATTERN RECORDING PARAMETER (MIDI) popup .............. 101

PATTERN screen ......................................................................... 91

PATTERN STEP REC screen .................................................... 110

PATTERN SYNC screen .............................................................. 94

PIANO ROLL EDIT screen ........................................................... 30

PIX ASSIGN screen ................................................................... 186

PIX COPY popup ........................................................................ 187

PIX EXCHANGE popup .............................................................. 187

PIX JAM screen .......................................................................... 185

PIX QUICK ASSIGN popup ........................................................ 226

PROJECT MENU screen ........................................................... 162

PUT PATTERN popup ................................................................ 111

Q

QUANTIZE popup ........................................................................ 38

R

R-BUS screen ............................................................................. 183

RECORDING FILTER popup ....................................................... 18

RECORDING PARAMETER (AUDIO) popup .............................. 19

RECORDING PARAMETER (MIDI) popup .................................. 16

RECORDING PARAMETER (MUTE CONTROL) popup ............. 21

RECORDING PARAMETER (PATTERN) popup ......................... 20

RECORDING PARAMETER popup (for the drum grid) ............... 74

RECOVER PROJECT FROM CD popup ................................... 171

RE-SAMPLING screen ............................................................... 209

RESULT popup .......................................................................... 211

REVERB EDIT screen ................................................................ 231

REVERB KNOB ASSIGN popup ................................................ 234

REVERB LIBRARY popup ......................................................... 230

Index

S

SAMPLE EDIT screen ................................................................ 128

SAMPLE LIST popup ................................................................. 130

SAMPLE MANAGER screen ...................................................... 169

SAMPLE PARAMETER popup .................................................. 131

SAMPLING screen ..................................................................... 209

SAVE AS NEW PROJECT popup .............................................. 165

SAVE AUDIO PHRASE BANK popup ........................................ 154

SAVE DELAY/CHORUS popup ................................................. 233

SAVE MFX popup ...................................................................... 233

SAVE PATCH popup .................................................................. 149

SAVE PATTERN AS SMF popup ............................................... 109

SAVE REVERB popup ............................................................... 233

SAVE SAMPLE AS AIFF popup ................................................. 140

SAVE SAMPLE AS WAV popup ................................................ 140

SAVE SONG AS SMF popup ....................................................... 88

SELECT AUDIO FILE popup ..................................................... 198

SELECT CATEGORY popup ......................................................... 4

SELECT DESTINATION popup ................................................. 192

SELECT DRIVE popup .................................................................. 6

SELECT FILE COMMAND popup .............................................. 191

SELECT MASTERING SOURCE popup .................................... 198

SELECT PIANO ROLL EDIT COMMAND popup ......................... 33

Select Quick Assign message .................................................... 213

SELECT SAMPLE EDIT COMMAND popup .............................. 132

SELECT SEQUENCE EDIT COMMAND popup .......................... 34

SELECT SONG screen ................................................................ 85

SELECT SOURCE PROJECT popup ........................................ 167

SEQUENCE EDIT screen ............................................................ 31

SET MONO popup ..................................................................... 137

SET PROJECT PROTECTION screen ...................................... 163

SET TIME popup ........................................................................ 225

SHIFT TIMING popup .................................................................. 41

SONG LIST popup ....................................................................... 90

SONG MENU screen ................................................................... 78

SONG PARAMETER screen ........................................................ 79

SONG screen ................................................................................. 8

SPLIT NOTES popup ................................................................... 66

STEP REC screen ........................................................................ 62

STEP TIME popup ....................................................................... 58

SYNC screen ................................................................................ 81

SYS-EX popup ............................................................................. 27

SYSTEM INFORMATION screen ............................................... 181

SYSTEM MENU screen ............................................................. 172

T

TEMPO TRACK screen ................................................................ 52

TIME STRETCH popup .............................................................. 135

TRACK LIST (OUTPUT) screen ................................................... 50

TRACK LIST (PLAY QUANTIZE) screen ..................................... 51

TRACK MUTE screen .................................................................. 75

TRACK MUTE SETUP popup ...................................................... 77

TRACK PARAMETER popup (for a MIDI track) ........................... 11

TRACK PARAMETER popup (for a Pattern track) ....................... 15

TRACK PARAMETER popup (for an Audio track) ....................... 14

TRACK REMAP popup .............................................................. 107

TRACK SELECT popup ............................................................... 72

TRACK SOLO screen .................................................................. 76

TRANSPOSE popup .................................................................... 43

TRUNCATE popup ..................................................................... 136

U

USB screen ................................................................................ 194

V

VIEW FILE TYPE popup ............................................................ 221

VIEW FILTER popup .................................................................... 53

V-LINK (SLAVE) screen ............................................................. 180

V-LINK screen ............................................................................ 179

MV-8800 Screen Guide

S-241

MV-8800_r_e.book 242 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

...MEMO....

S-242

MV-8800 Screen Guide

MV-8800_r_e.book 243 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

MV-8800_r_e.book 244 ページ 2006年11月10日 金曜日 午後12時49分

* 0 4 3 4 8 4 1 2 0 2 *

04348412 06-11-2N

advertisement

Was this manual useful for you? Yes No
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Related manuals

Download PDF

advertisement

Table of contents